Customer Information Management

MailStream Plus™ Version 8.3.6

MailStream Plus Guide For All Platforms Table of Contents

DSRSEL 87 E CODE 89 1 - Parameter Reference E DESC 90 E KEY 91 Defining Parameters 9 ENT PT 92 ADC PT 17 ENT SQ 97 ADDLBF 22 ENTRYP 98 ADDNAM 23 EP EXC 100 ADDRES 25 EP INF 101 ADJRDW 26 EP MIN 102 ADQUAL 27 EP MINC 106 ALG AU 29 EP ROL 107 ALG BC 30 EP TBL 111 ALG BL 31 EXITIN 112 ALG CR 33 EXITOP 114 ALG LV 37 FILEDF 116 ALG PL 41 FRM BL 120 ALG PP 46 FRMNAM 123 ALG PS 48 HEADER 124 B CODE 52 IDCURL 126 BATCHP 53 IMBCNT 128 BATINF 54 IMBCTL 130 BG FRC 56 IMBINB 135 BG MAX 59 IMBOUT 139 BG MIN 61 IMBPLT 144 BL FRC 64 IMBSER 146 BL MAX 66 IN CTY 148 CACERT 69 IP IMB 150 CONTRL 70 K CODE 151 CP FRC 71 L CODE 152 CP MAX 74 LABLN 153 CP MIN 77 ML 360 154 CPYCNT 79 ML MIN 156 CRIDS 80 ML TYP 158 DFWORK 81 MOVExx 161 DS CTL 83 NDC PT 163 DS MIN 85 NDC SQ 169 DSRFRC 86 NONSUB 171 OPT FL 173 REPORT DUO FILE 272 P ATTR 174 REPORT DUO TRAN 273 PA INF 181 REPORT FACESLIP 275 PAGESZ 183 REPORT MAILDAT 278 PB FRC 185 REPORT MANIFEST 285 PB MAX 187 REPORT PALSUMM 287 PERNAM 189 REPORT PALTAGS 290 PGMNAM 190 REPORT PRESVFY 292 PL FRC 191 REPORT RUNSTATS 293 PL LVL 194 REPORT SUMMARY 296 PL MAX 198 REPORT TRAYTAGS 300 PL MIN 201 REPORT USPSBNDL 304 POSTBG 204 REPORT USPSCONT 305 POSTBI 206 REPORT USPSQUAL 306 POSTBK 207 REPORT USPSSTMT 308 POSTBL 209 REPORT ZONESUMM 312 POSTCI 210 REPORT ZSDETAIL 314 POSTEI 211 RP INF 316 POSTFM 213 RTYPES 317 POSTGN 214 RUNMSP 319 POSTIB 217 S CODE 320 POSTIJ 219 SCF PT 322 POSTLB 221 SCF SQ 329 POSTLI 226 SEQCHK 330 POSTMD 227 SERIAL 331 POSTMK 229 SFIMPB 332 POSTMR 230 SRTFLD 335 POSTNS 232 SRTFLn 340 POSTPI 233 SRVFEE 347 POSTPL 234 SRVFRQ 349 POSTRC 236 TABLSZ 353 POSTRI 241 TB LKP 356 POSTZN 242 U CODE 359 PRDDTA 243 UDATAI 360 QP AMT 244 UDATAS 361 QU AMT 246 UFTxx 362 R FLAG 248 UHDxx 363 RECPNT 250 ZIP IN 364 RENMBR 251 ZIPINB 369 REPORT 253 REPORT AUDITTRL 261 REPORT BAGTAGS 263 2 - Report Reference REPORT CONTTAGS 267 REPORT CRRTWALK 269 Report Information 372 REPORT DETAIL 270 Report Information Fields 372

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 3 Information Variables 407

3 - Resolving Errors

Parameter Errors 411 Error Code Information 412 Error/Warning Messages 424

4 - MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

MSDR00 - Standard Presort Engine Script 445 MSDRWF - Command Line Executable Presort Engine 448 MSDRAPI - Application Programmers' Interface451

® 5 - USPS Informed Delivery

Informed Delivery support 456 Informed Delivery campaign file (MSIDCMI) 456

® 6 - Defining IBM i Job Parameters

Parameters Defined On the Global Parameter Edit Screen 461

® 7 - IBM i System-Wide Commands

Entering Commands at the Command Line 467 Using the Job Import Utility 469 Copyright

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 4 1 - Parameter Reference

In this section

Defining Parameters 9 ADC PT 17 ADDLBF 22 ADDNAM 23 ADDRES 25 ADJRDW 26 ADQUAL 27 ALG AU 29 ALG BC 30 ALG BL 31 ALG CR 33 ALG LV 37 ALG PL 41 ALG PP 46 ALG PS 48 B CODE 52 BATCHP 53 BATINF 54 BG FRC 56 BG MAX 59 BG MIN 61 BL FRC 64 BL MAX 66 CACERT 69 CONTRL 70 CP FRC 71 CP MAX 74 CP MIN 77 CPYCNT 79 CRIDS 80 Parameter Reference

DFWORK 81 DS CTL 83 DS MIN 85 DSRFRC 86 DSRSEL 87 E CODE 89 E DESC 90 E KEY 91 ENT PT 92 ENT SQ 97 ENTRYP 98 EP EXC 100 EP INF 101 EP MIN 102 EP MINC 106 EP ROL 107 EP TBL 111 EXITIN 112 EXITOP 114 FILEDF 116 FRM BL 120 FRMNAM 123 HEADER 124 IDCURL 126 IMBCNT 128 IMBCTL 130 IMBINB 135 IMBOUT 139 IMBPLT 144 IMBSER 146 IN CTY 148 IP IMB 150 K CODE 151 L CODE 152 LABLN 153 ML 360 154 ML MIN 156 ML TYP 158 MOVExx 161 NDC PT 163 NDC SQ 169 NONSUB 171 OPT FL 173 P ATTR 174 PA INF 181 PAGESZ 183 PB FRC 185

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 6 Parameter Reference

PB MAX 187 PERNAM 189 PGMNAM 190 PL FRC 191 PL LVL 194 PL MAX 198 PL MIN 201 POSTBG 204 POSTBI 206 POSTBK 207 POSTBL 209 POSTCI 210 POSTEI 211 POSTFM 213 POSTGN 214 POSTIB 217 POSTIJ 219 POSTLB 221 POSTLI 226 POSTMD 227 POSTMK 229 POSTMR 230 POSTNS 232 POSTPI 233 POSTPL 234 POSTRC 236 POSTRI 241 POSTZN 242 PRDDTA 243 QP AMT 244 QU AMT 246 R FLAG 248 RECPNT 250 RENMBR 251 REPORT 253 REPORT AUDITTRL 261 REPORT BAGTAGS 263 REPORT CONTTAGS 267 REPORT CRRTWALK 269 REPORT DETAIL 270 REPORT DUO FILE 272 REPORT DUO TRAN 273 REPORT FACESLIP 275 REPORT MAILDAT 278 REPORT MANIFEST 285 REPORT PALSUMM 287 REPORT PALTAGS 290

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 7 Parameter Reference

REPORT PRESVFY 292 REPORT RUNSTATS 293 REPORT SUMMARY 296 REPORT TRAYTAGS 300 REPORT USPSBNDL 304 REPORT USPSCONT 305 REPORT USPSQUAL 306 REPORT USPSSTMT 308 REPORT ZONESUMM 312 REPORT ZSDETAIL 314 RP INF 316 RTYPES 317 RUNMSP 319 S CODE 320 SCF PT 322 SCF SQ 329 SEQCHK 330 SERIAL 331 SFIMPB 332 SRTFLD 335 SRTFLn 340 SRVFEE 347 SRVFRQ 349 TABLSZ 353 TB LKP 356 U CODE 359 UDATAI 360 UDATAS 361 UFTxx 362 UHDxx 363 ZIP IN 364 ZIPINB 369

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 8 Parameter Reference

Defining Parameters

This section provides guidelines for defining your parameters.

Parameter Field Formats

The following information is provided to help you define parameter fields. • You must right-justify all numeric parameter values. • Alphabetic-only fields must be left-justified. • All name/address file locations are defined with a three-position parameter field. To accommodate locations greater than 999, you may extend your location definition one position to the left. To represent locations greater than 9999, you may specify an alphabetic character (A-W) in that position as follows:

A 10 I 18 Q 26

B 11 J 19 R 27

C 12 K 20 S 28

D 13 L 21 T 29

E 14 M 22 U 30

F 15 N 23 V 31

G 16 O 24 W 32

H 17 P 25

For example, to define a field starting in position 26003, you would specify Q003. In another example, to define starting position 24000, specify O000. • The maximum value for any reference to a name/address record field location is 32660. • For fields describing the dimensions of a bundle or container (weight, volume, and thickness), percentage, or record count, you may enter a six-digit number by extending the five-position field one position to the left.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 9 Parameter Reference

• For numeric fields that represent a decimal value, place the decimal point anywhere within the field. For example, specify the value 1.1 as 001.1 or 1.100. Note: For IBM i, locations may not exceed 9999.

Commenting Parameters

Place an asterisk (*) in position 1 of any parameter to comment it. This is useful for altering jobs: you can modify one job by "commenting out" parameters instead of deleting the parameters. Commenting is also useful for documenting your parameters. After you place an asterisk in position 1, you can enter text in positions 2 through 80.

Example Parameter Definition

This guide includes detailed descriptions for each MailStream Plus parameter including: • Description of the purpose and use of each parameter • Description of all fields available for defining each parameter including: • Field positions • Field name • Description for each field

For example, the following description for the ENTRYP parameter appears later in this guide. Following the ENTRYP parameter example is an example for defining each field of the ENTRYP parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 10 Parameter Reference

ENTRYP Optional: The ENTRYP parameter allows you to enter high and low values for specified groups of entry points. You can also run comparisons on those entry point group values.

Note: If both the ENTRYP and BATCHP parameters are in the same job, the ENTRYP is searched for a match. If one is not found, then the BATCHP is searched.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ENTRYP is the only acceptable entry.

8-9 Entry Point Group Number This field allows you to enter the entry point group UPCPEN11 number. Valid values are between 1 and 50.

11-19 Low Group Code This field allows you to enter the lowest group code UPCPEN11 value.

21-29 High Group Code This field allows you to enter the highest group code UPCPEN11 value.

31 Location Enter the location within the entry point to begin your UPCPEN11 comparison. It can only be on the first ENTRYP definition. The default is 1.

33 Length Enter the length of comparison value. It can only be UPCPEN11 on the first ENTRYP parameter. The default is 9.

Figure 1: Example Instructions for Defining ENTRYP Parameter Fields

The following is an example of a parameter definition for defining mailing entry points using the ENTRYP parameter. 1. Positions 1-6 are reserved for specifying the name of the parameter to be defined. In this example, to define the ENTRYP parameter, enter ENTRYP in the Keyword field, positions 1-6.

2. To define the entry point group number, enter a value between 1 and 50 in the Entry Point Group Number field, positions 8-9.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 11 Parameter Reference

3. To define the low group code, enter the lowest group code value in the Low Group Code field, positions 11-19.

4. To define the high group code, enter the highest group code value in the High Group Code field, positions 21-29.

5. To define the starting location within the entry point to begin your comparison, enter the starting position in the Location field, position 31. This is only entered on the first ENTRYP parameter. The default is 1.

6. To define the length of the comparison value, enter the length in the Length field, position 33. This is only entered on the first ENTRYP parameter. The default is 9.

Figure 2: Completed ENTRYP Parameter Definition

Your newly created ENTRYP parameter definition, as defined in the example above, should look like this:

Defining Parameters for the IBM i Platform

Most parameter fields can be defined using the IBM i screens as part of our Character User Interface (CHUI); however, there are a few parameters that are not available on the screens. There are two methods to edit parameters apart from the parameter definition screens on the IBMi. One is to use screens available within the F23=Card Edit option. Select F23 from a job's main "Define and/or Submit a Presort Job" screen (UPCPDS01). Additional information about this method can be found in "Parameters Defined On the Global Parameter Edit Screen"

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 12 Parameter Reference

The second method, below, is to manually edit a job's parameter members. These instructions explain how to access the parameter file members. (This process is sometimes referred to as editing the parameters "behind the scenes.")

Step 1. Locate the Parameter File Identify the name of the parameter you would like to modify, your job name, your specified work library for this job, and the member name to which the parameter belongs (according to the information provided in the parameter description in this chapter). Within your specified work library, each job will have a file name called PRMMSjobid where "jobid" is the name of your job, as identified in step 1. This is the parameter file for your MailStream Plus job and it contains multiple members.

Step 2. Locate the Member Names Using an IBM i editor (such as PDM), edit this file (if you are using the PDM editor, you would enter the WRKMBRPDM command). This parameter file could contain quite a few members, but there are core members that you will be using. You may ignore any members that have the same names mentioned below, but have a 4-digit number at the end (for example, @@PDF0001). These are previously saved versions of the same file that are created in unique circumstances and may not contain current information. The table below describes the table member names that you can work with and a general description of the parameters it contains.

Table 1: MailStream Plus File Members and Their Corresponding Job Steps

This member... Allows you to... And corresponds to this selection on the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen (UPCPDS01)...

@@PXT Define report headers, footers, page sizes, and other output Defaults for Print Output formatting.

@@PAT Define the attributes of the mail pieces, such as size and Mailing Piece Attributes weight.

STPRM Describe the input file location of values on your name/address Name/Address File Layout file, such as the ZIP Code.

NAPRM Specify the data that MailStream Plus will post to your output Name/Address Record Posting name/address file, such as an Optional Endorsement Line.

@@PDF Change various presort defaults; for example, you may request Presort Definitions carrier route or automation or change the mailing's entry point.

M3PRM Define MAIL360 processing. "Define MAIL360 processing"

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 13 Parameter Reference

This member... Allows you to... And corresponds to this selection on the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen (UPCPDS01)...

RPINF Specify additional lines of information for your reports. "Information for USPS Reports"

RPREQ Select the reports to print. "Report Selection"

@@GLB Enable the Global Editor. "Global Editor"

Step 3. Modify the Appropriate Member Using your IBM i editor, modify the appropriate member that is defined on the parameter description/layout in this chapter. You will add the parameter, with all appropriate fields, as described in this chapter. Parameters are position-sensitive. You MUST type the fields in the correct columns on the record. Note: When parameters and/or options are not available for entry via the screens, the parameter/options do not display on a screen. However, when you submit the batch job, the parameter/options are included in the job. Use the Parameter Listing report in your PRNTRPT output spool file for your job to view a listing of the parameters/options that were used for your job. MailStream Plus automatically generates the Parameter Listing.

Presort Levels

List global presort level parameters before individual presort level parameters in scripts or parameter files. Otherwise, the global presort level parameters will override the individual presort level parameters. For example, if you are using a PL MIN parameter with positions 8-10 blank, affecting all pallet levels, that global parameter should be in the parameter list prior to any PL MIN parameters that affect only a single presort level, such as 5DG. This table shows the presort levels available for the following parameters: ALG LV, BG FRC, BG MAX, BG MIN, CP FRC, CP MAX, CP MIN, BL FRC, BL MAX, PL FRC, PL LVL, PL MAX, PL MIN, POSTBG, POSTBL, POSTPL, QP AMT, QU AMT, and SRTFLn

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 14 Parameter Reference

Presort Pallet/Bag/Tray/ Description Level Bundle Level Code

UNK 00 None/unknown (blank) Note: The level UNK is specific to output posting levels and is not intended for a level field on a parameter. A blank level field on a parameter indicates all levels.

SCR 01 Single Carrier Route

M5S 02 Merged 5-digit Scheme (L001)

CS5 03 5-digit Scheme Carrier Routes (L001)

5DL 04 5-digit Scheme (L001, L606)

M5D 05 Merged 5-digit

5CR 06 5-digit Carrier Route

3CR 07 3-digit Carrier Route

S5D 08 5-digit Scheme (L007) Note: For sequencing use only. Use 5DS for activating/deactivating this level.

5DG 09 5-digit

5DS 10 5-digit Scheme (Automation)

5FS 11 5-digit FSS Scheme

FSF 12 FSS Facility

S3D 13 3-digit Scheme (L008) Note: Final sort is 3-Digit Scheme Level 15.

3DG 14 3-digit

3DS 15 3-digit Scheme

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 15 Parameter Reference

Presort Pallet/Bag/Tray/ Description Level Bundle Level Code

M3D 16 Merged 3-digit Note: For sequencing use only.

17 Reserved

SCF 18 SCF

AAD 19 AADC

ADC 20 ADC

ASF 21 ASF- CSA Level 1

NDC 22 Network Distribution Center (NDC) - CSA Level 2

23 Reserved

OMX 24 Origin Mixed ADC

MAA 25 Mixed AADC - CSA Level 3

MAD 26 Mixed ADC - CSA Level 4

ORG 27 Mixed (Origin) NDC - CSA Level 5

RES 28 Residual - CSA Last [Level]

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 16 Parameter Reference

ADC PT

Optional: The ADC PT parameter helps you to perform ADC (Area Distribution Center) drop shipping. This parameter is useful for defining multiple entry ADCs for one mailing allowing you to drop mailings at separate ADCs when that option benefits you. Note: ADC drop shipments apply to Periodicals Mail only. ADC PT is intended to be used for Periodicals mailings and uses the USPS Periodicals ADC information. When used with other mail classes, ADC PT may not route the mail to the correct ADC destinations.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ADC PT is the only acceptable entry.

8 Automatically Qualify all Define whether MailStream Plus should automatically qualify all ADCs UPCPPD97 ADCs as entry points. Y Perform Qualify all ADCs. N Do not Qualify all ADCs. blank Default is N.

If you specify Y, define only one ADC PT parameter. If you specify N, you can define one ADC PT parameter for each ADC defined.

9 Include Offshore ZIP UPCPPD97 Y Include offshore ZIP Codes. Codes in this Entry Point N Do not include offshore ZIP Codes. blank Default is Y.

10 Reserved

12-16 ADC Point Code Valid values are the 3- or 5-character ADC-ID code. See the DMM UPCPPD97 Labeling List L004, and use the 3 or 5 digits in column B. Note: The 3- or 5-character ADC Code is preceded with an "A" when posted to the output record. Do not enter an "A" on the ADC PT parameter. But you will need to use the full 4- or 6-character code on all other parameters that use the entry point code.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 17 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

22-26 ADC ZIP Code If you enter a ZIP Code, that ZIP Code is used as the entry point ZIP UPCPPD97 Code for the ADC. You may also select DDU discounts below. If you do not enter a ZIP Code, MailStream Plus uses a valid ZIP Code within the ADC and you cannot select DDU discounts.

28-57 ADC Constant If this field is left blank, MailStream Plus fills in the field with the UPCPPD97 appropriate entry point information for each ADC, and the information will be used for the tray, bag, and/or pallet tags. If this field contains data, this data is only used when:

• The "Automatically Qualify All ADCs" field is N (or blank), or • If the "Automatically Qualify All ADCs" field is Y AND the ADC PT parameter is the default entry point. In this case, the data will be used for the default entry point.

Otherwise, review the FROM sub keyword to override the origin line information.

Note: If you specified Y in position 8 to automatically qualifying all ADCs, by default MailStream Plus places an N in positions 58 through 61. Also, any settings in positions 58 through 66 will apply to ALL the ADC entry points. To override this, define separate ADC PT parameters for the ADCs you are entering mail at, and select the appropriate position 58-66 values for each one.

58 ADC Discount Specify whether to attempt ADC discounts for this entry point: UPCPPD97 Y Attempt ADC discounts. N Do not attempt ADC discounts. blank Default is N.

59 DDU Discount Specify whether to attempt DDU discounts for this entry point: UPCPPD97 Y Attempt DDU discounts. N Do not attempt DDU discounts. blank Default is N.

DDU discounts, if selected, apply only to the ZIP Code specified in the ADC ZIP Code field. If no ADC ZIP Code is specified, DDU discounts are based on the facility.

60 SCF Discount Specify whether to attempt SCF discounts for this ADC: UPCPPD97 Y Attempt SCF discounts. N Do not attempt SCF discounts.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 18 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default is N.

61 NDC Discount Specify whether to attempt NDC discounts for this ADC: UPCPPD97 Y Attempt NDC discounts. N Do not attempt NDC discounts. blank Default is N.

Warning: : Use option X with caution. In some instances, this option splits mixed-level trays and can change report results.

62 In-County Discount Specify whether to attempt in-county discounts for this ADC: UPCPPD97 Y Attempt in-county discounts. This rule applies per batch for the > 50% rule and < 10,000 pieces. N Do not attempt in-county discounts. X Give the in-county rate all the time (do not use the 50% rule when there are >10,000 pieces in the mailing). blank Default is Y.

63 Reserved

64 Entry Point Facility Type Specify a code indicating the entry point facility type: UPCPPD97 A ASF B NDC C Origin SCF D DDU E Origin DDU H Transfer hub J Origin ADC K Origin NDC L Origin ASF N Non-determined O Origin (also DMU) Q Origin AMF R ADC

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 19 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

S SCF blank Default is R.

To ensure that MailStream Plus correctly determines the entry facility when specifying D (DDU), define an xx INF DRPKEY/PLTKEY parameter as well.

65 Make no-minimum For this entry point, should no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers UPCPPD97 5-digit/scheme be made for DDU entry USPS Marketing Mail parcels? containers for DDU Y Make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry USPS Marketing entry point. Option Y does NOT override "N" on any Mail parcels other entry point (XXX PT) parameters. N Do not make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y.

To enable this feature, ALG PS position 22 must contain Y or must be blank.

66 Make small origin Specify whether to make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for UPCPPD97 3-digit/scheme the current entry point: containers for this entry Y Make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point point. Option Y does NOT override "N" in this field on any of the other entry point (XXX PT) parameters and does NOT make small origin containers for those entry points. N Do not make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y.

For Periodicals flats, this setting applies to Origin SCF containers instead of 3-digit/scheme containers. To enable this feature, ALG PS position 22 must contain Y or must be blank.

70 Use Default ADC PT for Define whether to use the default ADC PT for ZIP Codes matching UPCPPD97 ZIP Codes matching the the ADC ZIP Code on this parameter: ADC ZIP Code in Y Use the default ADC PT. Columns 22-26 N Do not use the default ADC PT.

blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 20 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

72 Default Indicator Specify whether this parameter defines the default indicator for the UPCPPD97 current mailing. Y Yes N No blank Default is N.

Notes About Using ADC PT

• When choosing discounts such as DDU, SCF, NDC, and ADC, please verify that you meet the postal eligibility requirements as specified in the DMM. • Please note there is a maximum number of ADC PT parameters you can define for one MailStream Plus job: one for each ADC. See labeling list L004 in the DMM for a current list of ADCs. • You can have more than one type of xxx PT parameter in a single MailStream Plus job; however, if you use any combination of ADC PT, NDC PT and/or SCF PT parameters, you can only have one ENT PT parameter (and it must be marked as the default in position 72). • We suggest that you use separate entry ADCs when: • You calculate a savings by transporting your mailing to multiple ADCs • You want all recipients to receive your mailing on the same day

• When using the ADC PT parameter, the E CODE parameter should specify only one position for a length of six. Any other definition results in a parameter error.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 21 Parameter Reference

ADDLBF

Use ADDLBF to add buffer space to perform either statistics or name/address processing. You are now able to post data past the output record length and have that information available to the EXITOP parameter and for MailStream Plus required posting that you do not want in your final output file.

Position Field Name Description IBMi Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ADDLBF is the only acceptable entry.

8-11 Statistics Processing Define how many bytes you want to add for statistics processing UPCRDEDT (MSST00) specified on the FILEDF MSSTON file.

13-16 Name/Address Posting Define how many bytes you want to add for name/address posting UPCRDEDT (MSNA00) processing specified on the FILEDF MSNAON file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 22 Parameter Reference

ADDNAM

Use ADDNAM to add name/address records to your mailing to increase the number of pieces that will qualify for Carrier Route level presort. To add a name from the "bank file": • Sort both the input file and the bank file in ascending order by batch code, entry point code, ZIP Code, and Carrier Route. • The entry point code must exist. If your job has only one entry point, either do not include entry point in the sort, or point the E CODE to a blank field. • If you use SCF PT, NDC PT, or ADC PT, do not include the entry point in the sort. Note: When using the Add-A-Name Function on the IBM® i platform (parameter ADDNAM), note that the Bank file name is not saved between jobs. The bank file name is only saved when entered as a new job is being created. When using an existing job, you need to enter the bank file name on the submit screen.

Position Field Name Description IBMi Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ADDNAM is the only acceptable entry.

8 How to Apply Choose how you want to use the Add-A-Name function: UPCPPD40 Add-A-Name B Add from a bank of names (must be in same format as MSSTIN). D Duplicate the last record In the group (default). X Both. Try both options B and D. Try to add from bank. If there are no names in the bank, add by duplicating the last record.

Note: The FILEDF MSSTBK is required for the B and X options.

10-11 Maximum records to Define a value between 1-10. Default is 00. UPCPPD40 add per Carrier Note: If adding the maximum records specified does not raise the count to the minimum number of pieces required per Carrier Route, then no records are added.

16-24 Maximum records to Define a nine-digit value. The default is no maximum number of UPCPPD40 add per run records.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 23 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBMi Screen

32 If Sort Sequence is Choose how you want MailStream Plus to deal with an incorrect sort UPCPPD40 Incorrect sequence. E Error and stop run (default). W Issue a warning. N Do not check.

Tips for Using ADDNAM

To add a name from the "bank file": • Sort both the input file and the bank file in ascending order by batch code, entry point code, ZIP Code, and Carrier Route. • The entry point code must exist. If your job has only one entry point, either do not include entry point in the sort, or point the E CODE to a blank field. • If you use SCF PT, NDC PT, or ADC PT, do not include the entry point in the sort. Note: When using the Add-A-Name Function on the IBM® i platform (parameter ADDNAM), note that the Bank file name is not saved between jobs. The bank file name is only saved when entered as a new job is being created. When using an existing job, you need to enter the bank file name on the submit screen.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 24 Parameter Reference

ADDRES

Use ADDRES to define the parsed input address elements for the MAIL360 Data Manager Mail Piece file. This parameter is required when generating the Mail.dat® *.UPA file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ADDRES is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Primary Address Line Define the location of the primary address line. UPCPM361 Location

12-13 Primary Address Line Define the length of the primary address line. The maximum allowed UPCPM361 Length length is 64.

15-17 Secondary Address Line Define the location of the secondary address line. UPCPM361 Location

19-20 Secondary Address Line Define the length of the secondary address line. The maximum UPCPM361 Length allowed length is 64.

22-24 City Name Location Define the location of the city name. UPCPM361

26-27 City Name Length Define the length of the city name. The maximum allowed length is UPCPM361 28.

29-31 State Code Location Define the location of the two-character state code. UPCPM361

33-34 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 25 Parameter Reference

ADJRDW

Optional: ADJRDW allows you to adjust the Record Descriptor Word (RDW) of the Name/Address file, before it is altered by a MOVExx (or some other) parameter. The first four bytes of each variable-length record composes the RDW. RDWs consist of a halfword length and two bytes of binary zeroes.

Position Field Name Description

1-6 Parameter Keyword ADJRDW is the only acceptable entry.

8 Action Required for Each Must contain one of the following characters to define the action for each RDW RDW: + Add the value in positions 9-13 to the current RDW value. - Subtract the value in positions 9-13 from the current RDW value. S Set each RDW to the value specified in positions 9-13.

9-13 RDW Adjustment Value Must contain the value to replace the current RDW in each record. For MSST00.

15 Action Required for Each Must contain one of the following characters to define the action for each RDW RDW: + Add the value in positions 9-13 to the current RDW value. - Subtract the value in positions 9-13 from the current RDW value. S Set each RDW to the value specified in positions 9-13.

16-20 RDW Adjustment Value Must contain the value to replace the current RDW in each record. For MSNA00.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 26 Parameter Reference

ADQUAL

Optional: The ADQUAL parameter allows you to specify the location of address quality indicators in your Name/Address records. These will be used in the creation of the MAIL360 Data Manager Mail Piece file and also to determine if records are eligible for Presort (see the description of position 24 in ALG PS).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ADQUAL is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Reserved

12-14 Location of LACSLink Specify the location of the one-byte LACSLink correction code in your UPCPST30 Correction Code Name/Address records.

16-18 Location of DPV Specify the location of the one-byte Delivery Point Validation (DPV) UPCPST30 Indicator indicator in your Name/Address records.

20-22 Location of Vacant Specify the location of the one-byte Vacant Address indicator in your UPCPST30 Address Indicator Name/Address records.

24-26 Location of DPVCMRA Specify the location of the one-byte Delivery Point Validation UPCPST30 Indicator (DPV)/Commercial Mail Receiving Agents (CMRA) indicator in your Name/Address records. Commercial Mail Receiving Agents (CMRA) are private companies offering mailbox rental services to individuals and businesses.

28-30 Location of DPV False Specify the location of the one-byte DPV False Positive (Seed) UPCPST30 Positive (Seed) Indicator indicator in the Name/Address records.

32-34 Location of LACSLink Specify the location of the two-byte LACSLink indicator in the UPCPST30 Indicator Name/Address records.

36-38 Location of DPV Specify the location of the 40-Byte DPV Footnote Code indicator in UPCPST30 Footnote Code Indicator the Name/Address records.

40-42 Location of NCOALink Specify the location of the 2-byte NCOALink footnote code in the UPCPST30 Footnote Code Name/Address records.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 27 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

44-46 Location of the ANKLink Specify the location of the 2-byte NCOA ANKLink return code in the UPCPST30 Return Code Name/Address records.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 28 Parameter Reference

ALG AU

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus installed.

Optional: Use ALG AU to commingle your mail (for example, combine different rates on one pallet).

Position Field Name Description IBMi Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG AU is the only acceptable entry.

8 Reserved

10 Commingling Indicator Should mailings on pallets be commingled? UPCRDEDT Y Yes, commingle mailings on pallets. N No, do not commingle mailings on pallets. blank Default is N for First-Class Parcels; otherwise, the default is Y.

Note: If you select option N above you must also define N in ML TYP, Optional DMM Pallet Sort Options, if you are palletizing USPS Marketing Mail flats in bags or trays.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 29 Parameter Reference

ALG BC

Optional: Use ALG BC to qualify your mailing for a barcode discount. This automation type applies only to letters and flats. For 5-digit parcel barcodes, review the P ATTR parameter.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG BC is the only acceptable entry.

8 Attempt Select whether to attempt to qualify this mailing for UPCPPD35 Automation/Barcode automation/barcode discounts: Qualification Y Yes, attempt automation/barcode qualification. N No, do not attempt automation/barcode qualification. blank Default is Y for letters; N for flats.

Note: MailStream Plus does not support postcards and letters in the same automation mailing.

10 Reserved

12-16 Reserved

18-22 Minimum Number of Define a value to change the number of pieces needed for MailStream UPCPPD35 Pieces to Attempt an Plus to attempt an automated mailing. Automated Mailing blank Default is 1.

Note: MailStream Plus uses ML MIN for qualifying amounts.

24 Reserved

26 Attempt Machinable Define whether to create a machinable letter or parcel presort or a UPCPPD35 Qualification non-machinable letter or irregular parcel presort group: Y Attempt machinable qualification.

N Do not attempt machinable qualification. blank Default is Y when valid for the Mail Class and/or Type.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 30 Parameter Reference

ALG BL

Optional: Use ALG BL to override the defaults for bundling mail.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG BL is the only acceptable entry.

8 Piece ID for 5-digit and Define mail bundling: UPCRDEDT Finer Bundles P Select all of the next piece ID if it fits, and continue until the bundle is full. E Evenly split the bundles based on total pieces.

blank Default is P.

10 Piece-ID for Bundles Define mail bundling: UPCRDEDT Higher than 5-digit P Select all of the next piece ID if it fits, and continue bundle until the bundle is full. E Evenly split the bundles based on total pieces. blank Default is P.

12 Perform Co-Bundling Define whether to perform a co-bundling sort: UPCRDEDT Sort Note: This option is only valid for Periodical, and USPS Marketing Mail Flats, when a co-bundling sort is being performed (see the Optional DMM Container Sort Options and Optional DMM Pallet Sort Options fields on the ML TYP parameter).

Also, if you are preparing pallets, you must commingle both automated and non-automated mail. Y Yes, perform the co-bundling sort. N No, do not perform the co-bundling sort. blank Default is Y when doing flats and container sorts; otherwise, the default is N.

14 Bundling Irregular Define whether to produce bags instead of bundles: UPCRDEDT Parcels Y Produce bags instead of bundles.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 31 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

N Bundle as normal. blank Default is N.

18 Reserved

20 Split Bundles Between Define the control of bundle splitting when the entire next bundle does UPCRDEDT Sacks not fit in the current sack. Note: This option is valid for flats only.

Y Place the entire bundle in the next appropriate sack. N Split bundles between sacks. This option splits bundles while filling the sack as completely as possible. blank Default is Y.

22 Split Last Bundle to Define how to split the last bundle to a destination (length = 1): UPCRDEDT Destination Y Evenly split the last bundle. N Do not evenly split the last bundle. Instead, make a full bundle and put the remaining mail into the last bundle. blank Default is N.

Note: The value specified here applies to bundles in sacks and on pallets.

24 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 32 Parameter Reference

ALG CR

Optional: The Algorithm Carrier Route parameter, ALG CR, allows you to override the defaults for carrier route qualification. Note: If you have carrier route turned on, these settings take precedence over DuoSort processing. Turn off carrier route sorting to sort all mailpieces with DuoSort.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG CR is the only acceptable entry.

8 Reserved

10 Optimization Indicator Define whether MailStream Plus will attempt optimization (applies to UPCPPD30 USPS Marketing Mail Letters only): Q Optimize. Handles the anomaly where the Basic Enhanced carrier rate is more expensive than some of the automation letter rates. This option moves mail to the Automation portion of the presort if the resulting presort level rate is less expensive than Basic CRRT under the current USPS rates. If a job contains both for-profit and non-profit mailpieces, the presort is optimized as a for-profit mailing. N No, do NOT optimize for the current rate. blank Default is N.

12 Carrier Walk Sequence Define the Carrier Walk sequence of the input file (applies to all mail UPCPPD30 of Input File classes): W File is in Carrier Walk sequence. L File is in Line of Travel (LOT) sequence. N File is in neither Carrier Walk sequence nor LOT sequence. Z File is in Carrier Walk sequence. Attempt saturation discounts based on a true residential record count of the input file.

blank Default is L for Periodicals and N for all others.

MailStream Plus does not consider multiple pieces per delivery address when applying the Walk Sequence Saturation rate.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 33 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Note: For Periodicals, note the defaults for this field so you meet USPS Carrier Route regulations.

14 Run USPS Marketing Should MailStream Plus run enhanced carrier presort (applies only UPCPPD30 Mail Enhanced Carrier to USPS Marketing Mail)? Presort? Y Run this presort. N Do not run this presort. blank Default is N.

Note: If Enhanced Carrier presort is turned on (option Y), the Carrier Walk Sequence of Input File field must contain W, L, or Z.

16 Run Should MailStream Plus run carrier presort (for Periodicals and UPCPPD30 Periodicals/Package Package Services mail)? Services Carrier Y Run this presort. Presort? N Do not run this presort. blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals, note the defaults for this field so you meet USPS Carrier Route regulations.

18 Attempt Automation Should MailStream Plus attempt Automation-Compatible Enhanced UPCPPD30 Enhanced Carrier Carrier qualification (applies to USPS Marketing Mail Letters only)? Qualification Y Attempt Automation-Compatible Enhanced Carrier. N Do not attempt Automation-Compatible Enhanced Carrier. blank Default is Y.

19 Attempt Barcoded Should MailStream Plus attempt Barcoded Enhanced Carrier UPCPPD30 Enhanced Carrier qualification (applies to USPS Marketing Mail Letters only)? Qualification Y Attempt this qualification. N Do not attempt this qualification. blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 34 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

20 Attempt Machinable Define whether MailStream Plus should attempt machinable enhanced UPCPPD30 Enhanced Carrier carrier presort (applies to USPS Marketing Mail Letters only): Qualification Y Attempt this qualification. N Do not attempt this qualification. blank Default is Y.

If you are not putting barcodes on your Machinable LOT mailpieces, use Y in this field. If your mailpieces are not Machinable, put an N in this field and make sure you have a Y in the "Attempt Manual Enhanced Carrier Qualification" field.

22 Attempt Manual Should MailStream Plus attempt Manual Enhanced Carrier UPCPPD30 Enhanced Carrier qualification (applies to USPS Marketing Mail Letters only)? Qualification Y Attempt this qualification. N Do not attempt this qualification. blank Default is Y.

If you are not putting a barcode on your mailpieces and your mailpieces are not machinable, use Y in this field.

24 Reserved

26 Qualify Walk Sequence (Applies to Carrier Route walk sequencing only) Define whether UPCPPD30 Saturation Rate Based MailStream Plus should qualify walk sequence saturation rate based on Unique Address only on the unique mailing address: Y Attempt this qualification. N Do not attempt this qualification. blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals Mail, note the defaults for this field to ensure that you meet USPS Carrier Route regulations. To use this option, your input file must be sorted on all of the following fields, in this order: ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 Code, Delivery Point Code (DPC), and Carrier Route Code.

28 Create Multi-Carrier (Applies to USPS Marketing Mail flats only) Define whether MailStream UPCPPD30 Route Bundles Plus should create multi-Carrier Route bundles for the current mailing: Y Create multi-carrier route bundles N Do not create multi-carrier route bundles.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 35 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default is N.

Note: To ensure the Enhanced Carrier Route (walk-sequence) is maintained across bundle boundaries, all carrier coded name/address records must contain a ZIP + 4 Code, or all must not contain ZIP + 4 Codes. Additionally, in a Periodicals mailing, all carrier coded name/address records must be marked as subscribers, or all must be marked as being non-subscribers.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 36 Parameter Reference

ALG LV

Optional: Use the ALG LV parameter to define the following details: • Presort Level • Container types • Whether you will allow undersized trays, single-bundle trays, or overflow trays • Presort subclass for this presort level

Changing the defaults on this parameter could produce an invalid mailing. Please check the specific regulations for your class and type of mailing before making changes. Note: If you suppress the 5DG level, the 5DS level will also be suppressed; however, you may suppress the 5DS level and leave the 5DG level on. The same is true for 3DG and 3DS.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG LV is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this mailing. UPCRDEDT MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels. Note: You may leave presort level and subclass definitions blank, to indicate that the values specified in the other fields apply to all presort levels and/or subclasses. Default records may appear in any order, and MailStream Plus processes these in the order in which the parameters are encountered. Non-default records (those having values in both of these fields) are not changed by subsequent default records. You may specify only one default record for any specific presort level and subclass definition.

12 Omit Flag Specify under what conditions, if any, that MailStream Plus should UPCRDEDT omit this level. Certain container types are required and should not be suppressed. For more information, see the DMM "Mail Preparation and Sortation" chapter. S Omit this level for all containers and bundles. P Omit this level for bundles only. X Do not omit this level for containers and bundles.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 37 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Based on class and type of mail per USPS regulations.

14 First Container Code indicating the first container type to be used for this presort UPCRDEDT level: E Extended MM tray F Flats tray H 1-foot tray T 2-foot tray 1 #1 bag 2 #2 bag 3 #3 bag (canvas) 7 #3 bag (polypropylene) blank Defaults as follows:

• T - Letters • F - First-Class™ flats • 2 - Periodicals mail • 3 - First-Class parcels; All USPS Marketing Mail except Letters; All Package Services.

Note: If the First Container is a tray, the First Container will default for lettermail as listed below, unless a value has been listed in P ATTR that is >4.625 inches in height or >10.00 inches in length, at which point the default is E for Extended MM tray.

16 Second Container Code indicating the second container type used for this mailing: UPCRDEDT E Extended MM tray F Flats tray H 1-foot tray T 2-foot tray 1 #1 bag 2 #2 bag 3 #3 bag (canvas) 7 #3 bag (polypropylene)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 38 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Defaults as follows:

• H - Letters • F - First-Class™ flats • 2 - Periodicals mail • 3 - First-Class parcels; All USPS Marketing Mail except Letters; All Package Services

18 Reserved

20 Overflow Container Code indicating whether to allow overflow containers: UPCRDEDT Indicator Y Allow overflow containers. N Do not allow overflow containers. F Roll overflow mail to the next level preserving rate. This option only applies to First-Class automation letters, USPS Marketing Mail automation letters, and USPS Marketing Mail machinable letters. If using option F, you must also specify the correct subclasses on this parameter.

blank Default is Y for:

• Package Services • First-Class non-carrier automation letters • First-Class automation flats processed under the optional tray-based preparation • USPS Marketing Mail non-automation and machinable letters at the 3-digit level • USPS Marketing Mail non-carrier automation letters

Default is N otherwise.

Note: If you do not want 5-digit overflow containers, you need to also turn off overflow for the 5-digit scheme level. The same is true for the 3-digit and 3-digit scheme levels.

22 Single Bundle Tray This field is valid for letters, only. Define an option for making single UPCRDEDT Indicator bundle trays, when possible: Y Make single bundle trays where appropriate. N Bundle mail normally. Less-than-full trays are also bundled. This is the default for flats mailings.

blank Default is based on class of mail; Y when possible.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 39 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Note: For USPS Marketing Mail Enhanced Carrier Route letters prepared under General Tray and Labeling, you cannot make single bundle trays at the 5-digit (5CR) or 3-digit (3CR) carrier route levels. For USPS Marketing Mail Enhanced Carrier Route letters prepared under Traying and Labeling for Automation-Compatible ECR Letters, you cannot make bundles in full 5-digit (5CR) or 3-digit (3CR) carrier route trays.

24 Subclass Code indicating the subclass (presort type) for this level of presort: UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses for this presort level

Note: You may leave presort level and subclass definitions blank, to indicate that the values specified in the other fields apply to all presort levels and/or subclasses. Default records may appear in any order, and MailStream Plus processes these in the order in which the parameters are encountered. Non-default records (those having values in both of these fields) are not changed by subsequent default records. You may specify only one default record for any specific presort level and subclass definition.

28 Level of Value Specify the option for assigning the current presort level to any UPCRDEDT container: Y Only make this level container if it has value. N Make this level all the time. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 40 Parameter Reference

ALG PL

Note: This parameter only works if the Palletization Plus option has been licensed and the license for it installed. You must obtain permission from the USPS to commingle mail. Use IBM® i screens UPCPPD20 and UPCPPD25 to define the ALG PL parameter.

Optional: The palletization algorithm parameter, ALG PL, allows you to override the defaults for palletizing your mail. MailStream Plus does not place unqualified mail on pallets with one exception. First-Class unqualified mail with valid ZIP Codes can be palletized.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG PL is the only acceptable entry.

8 Type of Palletization Define the type of palletization to perform: UPCPPD20 B Palletize bags/trays. P Palletize bundles. N Do not palletize. blank Default is N.

10 Automated Mail Palletize automated mail? UPCPPD20 Palletization Indicator Y Palletize automated mail. N Do not palletize automated mail. blank Default is Y.

12 Machinable Mail Palletize machinable mail? UPCPPD20 Palletization Indicator Y Palletize machinable mail. N Do not palletize machinable mail. blank Default is Y.

14 Enhanced Carrier Mail Palletize enhanced carrier mail (not including USPS Marketing Mail UPCPPD20 Palletization Indicator Automated Carrier)? Y Palletize enhanced carrier mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 41 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

N Do not palletize enhanced carrier mail. blank Default is Y.

16 Non-Automated Mail Palletize non-automated mail? UPCPPD20 Palletization Indicator Y Palletize non-automated mail. N Do not palletize non-automated mail. blank Default is Y.

18-22 Underweight Numeric value indicating the percentage of pallets that may be UPCPPD20 Commingling underweight (under the FRC amount): Percentage blank Default is 00000, equal to 100%.

There is no limit on underweight pallets.

24 Reverse SCF Presort Perform reverse SCF presorting? UPCPPD20 Logic Y Perform reverse SCF presorting. N Do not Perform reverse SCF presorting. blank Default is Y. for USPS Marketing Mail bundled flats. Default is N for all other sortations.

Note: Reverse SCF presorting is available for reverse presorting (bundle reallocation) for USPS Marketing Mail flats, as well as Periodical flats and irregular parcels.

26 Reverse NDC Presort Perform reverse NDC presorting? UPCPPD20 Logic Y Perform reverse NDC presorting. N Do not Perform reverse NDC presorting. blank Default is Y. for USPS Marketing Mail bundled flats. Default is N for all other sortations.

Note: Reverse NDC presorting is available for reverse presorting (bundle reallocation) for USPS Marketing Mail flats.

28-32 Merged Allowable Define the percentage of mail that is permitted to be merged, by ZIP UPCPPD20 Percentage Code, onto a pallet. Default is 00005.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 42 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

34 Put mixed containers on Place mixed containers on ASF/NDC pallets? UPCPPD20 ASF/NDC pallets Y Place mixed containers on ASF/NDC pallets. N Do not place mixed containers on ASF/NDC pallets. blank Default is N.

Palletization Plus reads values on the XXX PT parameters, to determine the entry point facility type. Also, the USPS Drop Ship file is checked to see if the locale code is a joint facility, such as both an NDC and SCF location. In such a case, you may see undersized pallets for NDC and SCF to the one entry point. Palletization Plus does this before allowing undersized pallets for any of the "Allow Undersized Entry..." fields on this parameter.

36 Allow Undersized Allow undersized destination entry for SCF pallets? UPCPPD25 Destination Entry (SCF Y Allow undersized entry for SCF pallets. Pallets) N Do not allow undersized entry for SCF pallets. blank Default is Y for First-Class, Y for bundles on pallets, and N for bags or trays for all other mail classes.

Note that:

• A Y in positions 36 through 38 causes MailStream Plus to ignore those entry points on the PL MIN, CP MIN, PL FRC, and CP FRC parameters for those entry SCF, ADC, and NDC/ASF entry facilities and the corresponding pallet level. • The value in defined in positions 40 through 44 is used when placing bundles or sacks on pallets. • The value defined in positions 50 through 54 is used when placing trays on pallets.

37 Allow Undersized Allow undersized destination entry for ADC pallets? UPCPPD25 Destination Entry (ADC Y Allow undersized entry for ADC pallets. Pallets) N Do not allow undersized entry for ADC pallets. blank Default is N for First-Class, Y for bundles on pallets, and N for bags or trays.

Note that:

• A Y in positions 36 through 38 causes MailStream Plus to ignore those entry points on the PL MIN, CP MIN, PL FRC, and CP FRC parameters for those entry SCF, ADC, and NDC/ASF entry facilities and the corresponding pallet level. • The value in defined in positions 40 through 44 is used when placing bundles or sacks on pallets. • The value defined in positions 50 through 54 is used when placing trays on pallets.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 43 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

38 Allow Undersized Allow undersized destination entry for ASF or NDC pallets? UPCPPD25 Destination Entry Y Allow undersized entry for ASF or NDC pallets. (ASF/NDC Pallets) N Do not allow undersized entry for ASF or NDC pallets.

blank Default is N for First-Class, Y for bundles on pallets, and N for Bags or Trays.

40-44 Undersized Entry Pallet Define the minimum weight for an undersized entry of SCF, ADC, UPCPPD25 Minimum Weight ASF, or NDC pallets. The default is 100.0.

46 Reserved

48 Put Mixed Containers on Put mixed containers on SCF pallets? UPCPPD25 SCF Pallets Note: For First-Class mail, MailStream Plus places mixed containers on the origin SCF pallet only.

Y Allow mixed containers on SCF pallets. N Do not place mixed containers on SCF pallets. blank Default is Y for First-Class mail; otherwise, the default is N.

50-54 Define Minimum Define the minimum number of trays for undersized entry (Length = UPCPPD25 Undersized Entry Trays 5/6) for SCF, ADC, ASF, or NDC pallets. (SCF/ADC/ ASF/NDC Default is 00006. Pallets)

56 Allow ADC/AADC trays Allow ADC/AADC trays on First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail SCF UPCPPD25 on First-Class and pallets? USPS Marketing Mail Note: For First-Class mail, MailStream Plus places both ADC and SCF pallets AADC trays on SCF pallets. For USPS Marketing Mail, MailStream Plus places AADC trays on SCF pallets.

Y Allow mixed containers on ADC/AADC pallets. N Do not place mixed containers on ADC/AADC pallets. blank Default is N.

58 Turn on CSA Pallets? Valid for First-Class letter and flats mailings, only; Define whether to UPCPPD25 perform a CSA pallet sort: Y Allow CSA pallet sort.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 44 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

N Do DMM pallet sort, not the CSA pallet sort. blank Default is N.

Note: This definition is required for CSA mailings. CSA reference files MSRFCM and MSRFCD must be installed and defined in your job.

60 Force Define whether to force MXADC/MXAADC trays onto CSA Working UPCPPD25 MXADC/MXAADC trays Pallets: to CSA Working Pallets? Y Yes, force MXADC/MXAADC trays to CSA Working Pallets. N No, do not force MXADC/MXAADC trays to CSA Working Pallets. Allow them to be placed on other pallet levels. blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 45 Parameter Reference

ALG PP

Optional: Use ALG PP to define the postage payment method used for this mailing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG PP is the only acceptable entry.

8 Method of Postage Code to define the postage payment method: UPCPPD20 Payment C Precanceled stamps; not valid for Parcel Select Lightweight mailpieces. M Meter P Permit imprint blank Default is P.

Note: This field has no effect on Periodicals mailings.

10 Intelligent Mail® Mode Letters and Flats Options: UPCPPD20 Y or F Full Service: This is an Intelligent Mail® full service mailing. Verify that the STID indicates a full service-eligible mailpiece with non-automation/basic STID, then change it to its corresponding full service STID. N or B Basic: This is not an Intelligent Mail® full Service mailing. Verify that the mailpiece STID indicates a full service STID, then change it to non-automation/basic STID. X Do not verify STIDs. Use the assigned STIDs without changing them. blank Default is B.

Parcels and Priority Mail™ Options: Y Verify the STID - Validation is based on class and type of mail. Note: For Package Services mail (Non-Bound Printed Matter) both Media Mail (BS) and Library Rate (BL) Service Type ID codes are treated as valid.

N Generate Intelligent Mail® barcode, not IM® package barcode; valid only for Priority Mail

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 46 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

X Do not verify the STIDs. Use the assigned STIDs without changing them. blank Default is X.

12 Indicate whether this is Is this an eVS mailing? (For IM®p Barcode mailings, only) UPCPPD20 an eVS® Mailing Y Yes, this is an eVS mailing. Note: "eVS" will be included in the banner text of the IM®p Barcode. If MailStream Plus is creating the IM®p Barcode, the STID is validated for eVS mailings.

N No, this is not an eVS Mailing. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 47 Parameter Reference

ALG PS

Optional: Use ALG PS to override the defaults for making 3-digit small trays and maximizing mail trays or sacks.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ALG PS is the only acceptable entry.

8 Make Small Origin Make small origin 3-digit containers? UPCPPD32 3-digit Containers Y Make small origin 3-digit containers. Option Y does NOT override N in the "Make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point field on any of the entry point (XXX PT) parameters, and does NOT make small origin containers for those specific entry points. N Do not make small origin 3-digit containers. Option N overrides option "Y" in the "Make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point" fields on the entry point (XXX PT) parameters, and turns off all small origin containers. blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals flats, this setting applies to Origin SCF containers instead of 3-digit/scheme containers.

10 Maximize Mail Maximize containers or split evenly? UPCPPD32 Containers Y MailStream Plus will maximize all containers and create a less-than-full overflow container, if allowed. N MailStream Plus will fill all but the last two containers to the maximum value. MailStream Plus will then attempt to fill the next-to-last container to the force amount and use the remainder to create a legally-full last container. If the remainder does not create a legally-full last container or does not fit in the last container, MailStream Plus will maximize the next-to-last container and create a less-than-full overflow container, if allowed. blank Default is Y.

12 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 48 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

16 Add Tray Preparation Add tray preparation types? This only applies to mail in trays. UPCPPD32 Types Y Yes, add Tray Preparation Types. Use separator cards only when required. B Yes, add Tray Preparation Types. Use separator cards where required and where optional. N No, do not Add Tray Preparation Types. blank Default is N.

The resulting codes are interpreted as follows: P Bundled mail within the tray. L Unbundled mail within the tray.

S Separator cards used in the tray. blank No mail Preparation Indicator Assigned.

Note: To post this information into the Name/Address output records, use the Location to post Tray Preparation Types field on the POSTLB parameter.

18 Process Invalid ZIP Define whether to process invalid ZIP Codes and non-compliant UPCPPD32 Codes and National Change of Address (NCOA) records as single piece mail. Non-Compliant NCOA This is only valid for First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail letters and Records flats. Y Process invalid ZIP Codes and non-compliant NCOA records as single piece mail. N Do not process invalid ZIP Codes and non-compliant NCOA records as single piece mail. blank Default is N.

Note: If the invalid ZIP Code records are written out to the reject file MSSTOR, then this definition has no effect. To process the invalid records as single piece mail, you need to also remove or comment out the FILEDF parameter MSSTOR definition.

20 Creating First Class Define an option to create First Class single piece letter trays: UPCPPD32 Single Piece Letter S Create Separate trays by weight (ounces). Trays blank No, do not Separate trays by weight (ounces).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 49 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

22 Small 5-digit Indicator Define whether to attempt small (no-minimum) 5-digit/scheme UPCPPD32 containers for USPS Marketing Mail parcels entered at a DDU. Y Attempt to make small (no-minimum) 5-digit/scheme containers. N Do not attempt to make small 5-digit/scheme containers. blank Default is Y.

24 Force Non-Compliant Define whether to force non-compliant National Change of Address UPCPPD32 NCOA Record to be (NCOA) records to be invalid. Invalid M Base the non-compliant test on mandatory return code values. NCOA Footnote Values:

• 02 Found COA: Moved Left No Address (MLNA) • 03 Found COA: Box Closed No Order (BCNO)

A Base the non-compliant test on mandatory and optional return code values. NCOA Footnote values:

• 01 Found COA: Foreign Move • 02 Found COA: Moved Left No Address (MLNA) • 03 Found COA: Box Closed No Order (BCNO) • 05 Found COA: New 11-digit DPBC is Ambiguous

• 14 Found COA: New Address Would Not Convert at Run Time • 19 Found COA: New Address Not ZIP + 4 coded • NCOA ANKLink Return Code 77

X Do not check NCOA return codes. blank Default is X.

Note: If you specify "M" or "A", you must also define ADQUAL fields "Location of NCOALink Footnote Code" and "Location of the ANKLink Return Code" for the NCOA codes. If you want to use the non-compliant NCOA record sort and use the Single Piece rate, you must specify "Y" in the "Process Invalid ZIP Codes and Non-Compliant NCOA Records" field of this.

26 Change Entry Point of Define whether to change the entry point for FSS entry scheme pallets. UPCPPD32 FSS Scheme Pallets Y Change the Entry Point of FSS Scheme Pallet. Note: If the current FSS entry point is not the facility where the FSS machine is located, attempt to move the FSS scheme pallet to the facility where the FSS

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 50 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

machine is located. This entry point must currently exist with other records going to this entry point for the FSS pallet to be moved. A new entry point for this FSS will not be generated.

N Do not change the Entry Point of FSS Scheme Pallet. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 51 Parameter Reference

B CODE

Optional: Use B CODE to define the location and length of the characters that make up the batch code. Batch codes are identifiers that are applied to groups of mailpieces based on user specified criteria such as weight and mailpiece content. The process of grouping mailpieces based on certain criteria is called batching. There may be eight segments in a batch code. • The first five characters of a B CODE segment definition must contain the starting position (location) of this element in the input name/address record. • The sixth character defines the format: P for packed (positive) or C for character. • The final characters must define the length of this element in the input name/address record.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword B CODE is the only acceptable entry.

8 Batch Code Length Define the total length of the batch code in the input name/address UPCPST60 record. Note: The maximum length of a batch code is 9.

10-12, Batch Code Element Define the location of each element that makes up the batch code. UPCPST60 18-20, Locations This field may be expanded one position to the left. 26-28, 34-36, 42-44, 50-52, 58-60, 66-68

14, 22, 30, Batch Code Element Define the type of element in each batch code element location: UPCPST60 38, 46, 54, Type C Character 62, 70 P Packed

16, 24, 32, Batch Code Element Define the length of each batch code length defined on this parameter. UPCPST60 40, 48, 56, Length 64, 72

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 52 Parameter Reference

BATCHP

Optional: The BATCHP parameter allows you to control the batch sizes for bundling, containerizing, and palletizing. This optional parameter allows for the identification of up to 50 different group batch codes based on a low/high batch code range. These group batch codes are then referenced in several other parameters for further processing.

There is always a default BATCHP group. If you fail to specify a BATCHP group code on other parameters, you only modify the default BATCHP group. When you use the BATCHP parameter, and want to modify the settings for another parameter in a group(s), you must have a parameter for each BATCHP group code you want to modify. Each BATCHP number table created requires a significant amount of memory. The BATCHP tables are created consecutively internally, beginning at number 1 and including the largest number used on a BATCHP parameter. For example, even if you only have a BATCHP 10 and a BATCHP 45 parameter, BATCHP tables are also initialized for numbers 1-9 and 11-44. We recommend that you use the number 01 for your first BATCHP table and allow the parameter to create the highest BATCHP number you require for the mailing. Note: If both the ENTRYP and BATCHP parameters are in the same job, the ENTRYP is searched for a match. If one is not found, then the BATCHP is searched.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword BATCHP is the only acceptable entry.

8-9 BATCHP Group Number Specify a value in the range 01-50 for the group number. UPCPBP11

11-19 Low Batch code for this Define the lowest batch code for this group. UPCPBP11 Group

21-29 High Batch code for this Define the highest batch code for this group. The entry must be greater UPCPBP11 Group than or equal to low batch code for this group.

31 Location Within Batch Define the location in the batch code to start the comparison string. UPCPBP11 Code to Start You can use the first BATCHP definition, only. The default is 1. Comparison

33 Comparison Length Define the length of the comparison string/value. You can use the UPCPBP11 first BATCHP definition, only. The default is 9.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 53 Parameter Reference

BATINF

Optional: Use BATINF to supply text information for each batch of mail within your mailing. This information displays on the MailStream Plus printed reports and tags.

Note: If two or more xx INF parameters apply due to the determining criteria, the priority order in which xx INF parameters are used is PA INF, BATINF, EP INF, and RP INF.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword BATINF is the only acceptable entry.

Note: If the information in this record only applies to a single batch, you may enter the range in the Low Batch Code field only. Information types and data for the Subkeyword and Information Data fields are listed in Chapter 2 of this guide.

8-16 Low Batch Code Define the lowest batch code number to which the information Fields are specified applies. selected on UPCPRI21 and displayed on UPCPRI11

18-26 High Batch Code Define the highest batch code number to which the information Fields are specified applies. Blank defaults to the value in the low batch code. selected on UPCPRI21 and displayed on UPCPRI11

28-33 Subkeyword Define the appropriate subkeyword. See Chapter 2 of for more Fields are information on the subkeywords used by BAT INF. selected on UPCPRI21 and displayed on UPCPRI11

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 54 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

35-72 Information Data Define text information corresponding to Subkeyword you defined. Fields are You may use text variables here. See Chapter 2 for a list of variable selected on data for these positions. UPCPRI21 and Note: If you are omitting components of a multi-part subkeyword, please insert blank spaces as place-holders in those displayed components. on UPCPRI11

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 55 Parameter Reference

BG FRC

Optional: Use BG FRC to define the pieces, bundles, weight, volume, and thickness to force a container for a specific container type.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword BG FRC is the only acceptable entry.

8 Container type UPCRDEDT Note: Please review ALG LV for the defaults that correspond to each mail class.

E Extended MM tray F Flats tray H 1-foot letter tray T 2-foot letter tray 1 #1 bag 2 #2 bag 3 #3 bag (canvas) 7 #3 bag (polypropylene)

10-12 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this mailing. UPCRDEDT MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

14 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass: UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 56 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

16-20 Number of Pieces to Specify the number of pieces to force a container. You may extend UPCRDEDT Force a Container this field one position to the left.

22-26 Reserved

28-32 Weight to Force a Specify the weight in pounds required to force a new container. You UPCRDEDT Container may extend this field one position to the left.

34-38 Volume to Force a Specify the volume in cubic inches required to force a new container. UPCRDEDT Container You may extend this field one position to the left.

Note: You cannot define both the Thickness to Force a Container field and the Percent of BG MAX Thickness field on the BG FRC parameter.

40-44 Thickness to Force a Specify the container thickness to force a new container. You may UPCRDEDT Container extend this field one position to the left.

46-50 Percent of BG MAX UPCRDEDT Note: Use this field only if the Thickness to Force a Container field Thickness is blank. (Letter Trays only) Specify the thickness percentage to force a container. The percentage is based on the default container maximum thickness, or what is entered in the Maximum Container Thickness field of the BG MAX parameter. The default percentage is to force trays based on an 85% fullness ratio.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this parameter. UPCRDEDT Group Valid values are 01-50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

BG FRC, BG MAX, and BG MIN Logic

The BG xxx parameters are checked in this following order:

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 57 Parameter Reference

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 BG FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you use BG FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use BG MIN.

2 BG MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 BG MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 58 Parameter Reference

BG MAX

Optional: Use BG MAX to override the defaults governing the maximum weight, volume, and thickness of a container of mail.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword BG MAX is the only acceptable entry.

8 Container Type Define the container type: UPCRDEDT Note: Please see the ALG LV parameter, First Container and Second Container fields, to define the defaults that correspond to each mail class.

E Extended MM tray F Flats tray H 1-foot letter tray T 2-foot letter tray 1 #1 bag 2 #2 bag 3 #3 bag (canvas) 7 #3 bag (polypropylene)

10-12 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this mailing. UPCRDEDT MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

14 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass: UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 59 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

28-32 Maximum Container Define the maximum weight, in pounds, for a specified container. You UPCRDEDT Weight may extend this field one position to the left.

34-38 Maximum Container Define the maximum volume, in cubic inches, for a specified container UPCRDEDT Volume You may extend this field one position to the left.

40-44 Maximum Container Define the maximum thickness, in inches, for a specified container UPCRDEDT Thickness You may extend this field one position to the left.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this parameter. UPCRDEDT Group Valid values are 01-50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

BG FRC, BG MAX, and BG MIN Logic

The BG xxx parameters are checked in this following order:

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 BG FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you use BG FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use BG MIN.

2 BG MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 BG MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 60 Parameter Reference

BG MIN

Optional: Use BG MIN to override the defaults governing the minimum number of pieces, minimum number of bundles, and the minimum weight, volume, and thickness for each container type.

Note: In some instances, USPS regulations may override your BG MIN parameters definitions for certain sack levels.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword BG MIN is the only acceptable entry.

8 Container Type Define the container type: UPCRDEDT Note: Please see ALG LV, positions 14 and 16, for the defaults that correspond to each mail class.

E Extended MM tray F Flats tray H 1-foot letter tray T 2-foot letter tray 1 #1 bag 2 #2 bag 3 #3 bag (canvas) 7 #3 bag (polypropylene)

10-12 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this mailing. UPCRDEDT MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

14 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass: UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 61 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default - all subclasses

16-20 Minimum Number of Define the minimum number of pieces allowed in a container. UPCRDEDT Pieces in a Container The default for Periodicals Carrier Route Flats is 24. The default for all other container types is 0. Any value entered must be greater than 0.

22-26 Minimum Number of Define the minimum number of bundles allowed in a container. UPCRDEDT Bundles in a Container The default for all container types is 0, so any value entered must be greater than 0.

28-32 Minimum Container Define the minimum weight in pounds allowed in a container. Default UPCRDEDT Weight for all container types is 0, so any value entered must be greater than 0.

34-38 Minimum Container Define the minimum volume in cubic inches allowed in a container. UPCRDEDT Volume Default for all container types is 0, so any value entered must be greater than 0.

40-44 Minimum Container Define the minimum thickness in inches allowed in a container. Default UPCRDEDT Thickness for all container types is 0, so any value entered must be greater than 0.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this parameter. UPCRDEDT Group Valid values are 01-50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

Note: MailStream Plus will not make containers when there is initially insufficient mail going to a logical destination. MailStream Plus may make additional physical containers with less than the BG MIN value if there was initially enough mail to the destination to make the minimum. When the parameter ML TYP is defined as ML TYP P F, the BG MIN value will default to BG MIN 2 SCR N 00024.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 62 Parameter Reference

BG FRC, BG MAX, and BG MIN Logic

The BG xxx parameters are checked in this following order:

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 BG FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you use BG FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use BG MIN.

2 BG MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 BG MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 63 Parameter Reference

BL FRC

Optional: Use the BL FRC parameter to override the default settings and change the number of mailpieces required to make a bundle.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword BL FRC is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this UPCRDEDT mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12-16 Number Of Pieces To Define the number of pieces needed to force a bundle. This UPCRDEDT Force A Bundle field can accept a 5- or 6-digit entry. Defaults depend on the class of mail, as follows:

• First-Class

• 00001 - Automation and machinable letters, automation tray-based flats • 00010 - All other mail types

• Periodicals

• 00001 - Automation letters • 00006 - All other mail types

• USPS Marketing Mail

• 00001 - Automation and machinable letters and parcels • 00015 - USPS Marketing Mail flats, less than or equal to .3125 lbs. at the 5-digit and 5-digit scheme levels • 00010 - All other mail types

• Package Services

• 00010 - All mail types

18-22 Amount of Weight to Define the weight to force a bundle. Defaults depend on the UPCRDEDT Force a Bundle class of mail:

• All Package Services - default is a maximum internal value. • All other classes - default is a maximum internal value.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 64 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

36 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass: UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this UPCRDEDT Group parameter. Valid values are 01 through 50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

BL FRC and BL MAX Logic

The parameters are checked in this order:

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 BL FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

2 BL MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 65 Parameter Reference

BL MAX

Optional: Use BL MAX to override the defaults governing the maximum size of a bundle of carrier, presort, or residual mail. This parameter defines the maximum weight, volume, thickness, and number of pieces of a bundle.

This parameter applies to bundles not destined for pallets. To specify maximums for bundles that are to be placed on pallets, use the PB MAX parameter.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword BL MAX is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this UPCRDEDT mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12-16 Maximum Number of Numeric field indicating number of pieces to force a bundle; UPCRDEDT Bundle Pieces Defaults vary by class of mail:

• First-Class

• 00001 - Automation and machinable presort groups • 00010 - All other mail types

• Periodicals

• 00001 - Automation and machinable presort groups • 00006 - All other mail types

• USPS Marketing Mail

• 00001 - Automation and machinable presort groups • 00015 - USPS Marketing Mail flats, less than or equal to .3125 lbs. at the 5-digit and 5-digit scheme levels • 00010 - All other mail types

• Package Services

• 00010 - All mail types

18-22 Maximum Bundle Define the maximum weight, in pounds, for a bundle of mail. UPCRDEDT Weight Must be right-justified.

• Package Services

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 66 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• 00020 - Bound Printed Matter flats and Irregular carrier • 00020 - Bound Printed Matter flats and Irregular 5-digit • 00040 - Special (media/library) flats and irregular 5-digit

• All other than Bound Printed Matter

• 00020 - Default

24-28 Maximum Bundle Define the maximum volume, in cubic inches, of a bundle of UPCRDEDT Volume mail. Must be right-justified. 99999 Default

30-34 Maximum Bundle Define the maximum thickness, in inches, of a bundle of mail. UPCRDEDT Thickness The defaults are: First-Class

• 00008 for parcels • 00004 for carrier route letters • 00006 for all other bundles

Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail

• 00006 to 00008, as required to make "legal" bundles, for flats • 00004 for carrier route letters • 006.5 for all other bundles

36 Subclass (Presort) Define the subclass: UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this UPCRDEDT Group parameter. Valid values 01 through 50, and blanks. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 67 Parameter Reference

BL FRC and BL MAX Logic

The parameters are checked in this order:

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 BL FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

2 BL MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 68 Parameter Reference

CACERT

Optional: Use CACERT to define the Certificate Authority file path or DD name. This parameter is valid for the z/OS and IBMi platforms only. For z/OS, the Certificate Authority file path is a Unix System Services (USS) path pointing to the Certificate Authority file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword CACERT is the only acceptable entry.

8-80 Certificate Authority File Define the Certificate Authority file path or DD name. UPCPM320 Path

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 69 Parameter Reference

CONTRL

Required. The CONTRL parameter is used to tell MailStream Plus the location of the sort sequencing control field in the output name/address records.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword CONTRL is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Sequencing Control Field Define the location of the 9-byte output sort sequence UPCPST10 Location control field.

12-14 Length of the Control Field Define the length of the control field when RTYPES is UPCPST10 used with products other than MailStream Plus. Only used in RTYPES programs (MREX00, MRAT00, and MRATS1) for compatibility with systems other than MailStream Plus.

16-19 Reserved

54 Error Handling When Mail Define error handling during MailStream Plus processing UPCPST10 Induction Date is Not if induction date is not specified: Specified E Issue error and stop processing. W Issue warning and continue processing (default). blank Default is W.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 70 Parameter Reference

CP FRC

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus installed. If you are not commingling pallets, use the PL FRC parameter instead of the CP FRC parameter.

Optional: Use CP FRC to override the defaults that define the start of a new pallet for commingled mail. To palletize as much mail as possible, MailStream Plus ignores the CP FRC and PL FRC amounts for the least fine pallet level, such as MNDC. Instead, MailStream Plus makes pallets as soon as the pallet minimums are met.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword CP FRC is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels UPCPD107 for this mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12 Reserved

14-18 Weight to Force Pallet Define the weight in pounds required to force a new UPCPD107 pallet. Default is 00500.

20-24 Volume to Force Pallet Define the volume in cubic inches required to force UPCPD107 a new pallet. Default is a maximum internal value.

26-30 Number of Containers to Define the number of containers required to force UPCPD107 Force Pallet a new pallet. Default is 00036 for letter trays on pallets and 00024 for flats trays on pallets; otherwise, this field defaults to a maximum internal value. Note: When determining values to specify in this field, consider USPS requirements regarding the layers of containers on a pallet. According to USPS, six two-foot or EMM trays can fit on a single layer, with six

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 71 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

stacked layers as the amount to force a pallet. This creates a force number of 36 two-foot trays on a pallet, which is the default for lettermail. MailStream Plus counts two one-foot trays as a single two-foot tray, creating instances where the 36-tray force amount comprises more than 36 physical trays.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the appropriate batch group or entry group UPCPD107 for this parameter. Valid values are 01-50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

CP FRC, CP MAX, and CP MIN Logic

The parameters are checked in the following order.

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 CP FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.*

2 CP MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 CP MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

*If you use CP FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use CP MIN.

For example, if you use the CP FRC parameter and you specify a "weight" value of 00250, you want to force pallets at 250 lbs despite other available measurements. Assume that those measurements are at their maximum internal default values, in cubic inches, for volume, and 36 for number of trays. If MailStream Plus encounters a pallet that weighs 250 lbs. or more, OR has a maximum internal volume in cubic inches, OR contains at least 18 trays, it will be considered a valid pallet. CP FRC uses "or" logic, meaning that the parameter takes effect if one or more of the conditions is met.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 72 Parameter Reference

You can use the Force (FRC) parameters to override defaults governing the weight, volume, and thickness of a grouping or container of mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 73 Parameter Reference

CP MAX

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus installed. If you are not commingling pallets, you must use PL MAX instead of CP MAX.

Optional: Use CP MAX to override the defaults governing the maximum limits of a pallet of commingled mail.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword CP MAX is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this UPCPD107 mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12 Reserved

UPCPD107 Note: If you specify values for the maximum pallet weight, pallet volume, and number of trays per pallet, these values must be at least twice the amounts specified in the corresponding fields on the CP FRC parameter.

14-18 Maximum Pallet Weight Define the maximum weight, in pounds, of a pallet of mail. UPCPD107 Default is 02130.

19-24 or Maximum Pallet Volume Define the maximum volume, in cubic inches, for a pallet. UPCPD107 20-24 You may extend this field one position to the left, if needed. Default is 124800.

26-30 Maximum Pallet Define the maximum number of containers of mail that UPCPD107 Containers may go on one pallet. Default is 00072 for letter mailings, 00048 for flats trays mailings; for all other mail types this field defaults to a maximum internal value. Note: If palletizing by bundle, putting a low value here could result in small pallets. When determining values to specify, consider USPS requirements regarding the layers of containers on a pallet. According to the USPS, six two-foot, or EMM, trays can fit on a single layer, with twelve stacked

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 74 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

layers as the maximum. This creates a maximum of 72 two-foot trays on a pallet, which is the default for letter mail. Realize also that MailStream Plus counts two one-foot trays as a single two-foot tray, creating instances where the 72-tray maximum comprises more than 72 physical trays.

While 12 layers is the maximum, EMM trays and flat trays are taller and the maximum height of a pallet requires that fewer layers be allowed for these container types.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this UPCPD107 parameter. Valid values are 01 through 50 and blank spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

CP FRC, CP MAX, and CP MIN Logic

The parameters are checked in the following order.

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 CP FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.*

2 CP MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 CP MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

*If you use CP FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use CP MIN.

For example, if you use the CP FRC parameter and you specify a "weight" value of 00250, you want to force pallets at 250 lbs despite other available measurements. Assume that those measurements are at their maximum internal default values, in cubic inches, for volume, and 36 for number of trays. If MailStream Plus encounters a pallet that weighs 250 lbs. or more, OR has a maximum internal volume in cubic inches, OR contains at least 18 trays, it will be considered a valid pallet. CP FRC uses "or" logic, meaning that the parameter takes effect if one or more of the conditions is met.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 75 Parameter Reference

You can use the Force (FRC) parameters to override defaults governing the weight, volume, and thickness of a grouping or container of mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 76 Parameter Reference

CP MIN

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus installed. If you are not commingling pallets, use PL MIN instead of CP MIN.

Optional: Use CP MIN to override the defaults governing the minimum requirements for a pallet of commingled mail.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword CP MIN is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for UPCPD107 this mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12 Reserved

14-18 Minimum Pallet Weight Define the minimum weight, in pounds, of a pallet of UPCPD107 mail. Defaults to 00250.

20-24 Minimum Pallet Volume Define the minimum volume, in cubic inches, of a UPCPD107 pallet of mail. Defaults to minimum internal value.

26-30 Minimum Pallet Containers Define the minimum number of containers of mail UPCPD107 that may go on one pallet. Default is 00018 for letters, 00024 for flats trays, and the minimum internal value for all other mail types. Note: When considering the value to define in this field, you must first know the container type. According to USPS, six two-foot, or EMM, trays can fit on a single layer, with three stacked layers as the minimum. This creates a minimum of 18 two-foot trays on a pallet, which is the default for letters.

MailStream Plus counts two one-foot trays as a single two-foot tray, creating instances where the 18-tray minimum comprises more than 18 physical trays.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 77 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the appropriate batch group or entry group UPCPD107 for this parameter. Valid values are 01 through 50 and blank spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

CP FRC, CP MAX, and CP MIN Logic

The parameters are checked in the following order.

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 CP FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.*

2 CP MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 CP MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

*If you use CP FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use CP MIN.

For example, if you use the CP FRC parameter and you specify a "weight" value of 00250, you want to force pallets at 250 lbs despite other available measurements. Assume that those measurements are at their maximum internal default values, in cubic inches, for volume, and 36 for number of trays. If MailStream Plus encounters a pallet that weighs 250 lbs. or more, OR has a maximum internal volume in cubic inches, OR contains at least 18 trays, it will be considered a valid pallet. CP FRC uses "or" logic, meaning that the parameter takes effect if one or more of the conditions is met. You can use the Force (FRC) parameters to override defaults governing the weight, volume, and thickness of a grouping or container of mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 78 Parameter Reference

CPYCNT

Optional: Use CPYCNT to create multiple output name and address records from one input name/address record based on the value in the copy count field.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter keyword CPYCNT is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Copy Count Define the location of Copy Count in the name UPCRDEDT and address record.

12 Length of Copy count field Define the length of the copy count field. Valid UPCRDEDT lengths are 1 through 4. A non-numeric value or zero will be treated as a value of one.

14 Create Multiple Name and Define whether to create multiple name/address UPCRDEDT Address Records for Invalid records for invalid records. ZIPs and/or Non-Compliant Y Yes, create multiple name/address NCOA? records for invalid ZIP Code records and/or non-compliant NCOA records. N No, do not create multiple name/address records for invalid ZIP Code records and/or non-compliant NCOA records. blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 79 Parameter Reference

CRIDS

Optional: Use the CRIDS parameter to define the input file locations of the following Customer Registration Identification numbers (CRIDs): • Organization responsible for compliance with USPS Move Update requirements • Organization responsible for maintaining mailpiece IM® barcode uniqueness • The CRIDS parameter populates the optional *.EPD Mail.dat file, fields EPD-1003 and EPD-1004.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter keyword CRIDS is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Input location - Move Input file location containing the CRID for the UPCPM395 Update Compliance organization responsible for compliance with USPS® Move Update requirements

12-13 Input length - Move Input file length of the field containing the CRID for the UPCPM395 Update Compliance organization responsible for compliance with USPS® Move Update requirements; maximum value - 12

15-17 Input location - IM® Input file location containing the CRID for the UPCPM395 Barcode Uniqueness organization responsible for maintaining mailpiece IM® barcode uniqueness

19-20 Input length - IM® Input file length of the field containing the CRID for the UPCPM395 Barcode Uniqueness organization responsible for maintaining mailpiece IM® barcode uniqueness; maximum value - 12

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 80 Parameter Reference

DFWORK

Note: This parameter is valid for First-Class™ letters only. Learn more about DFWorks® here.

Optional: DFWORK accommodates posting of the Pitney Bowes DFWorks® control field to output name/address records.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword DFWORK is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the Define the location to post the 479-byte DFWorks® UPCPPD55 DFWorks® Control Field control field.

12 Origin of Host Sort ID Define the origin of the input host sort ID; must not UPCPPD55 be blank: R The host ID is in the source record; Location of Host Sort ID in record and Length of Host Sort ID in record must be defined I The host ID is defined by xx INF parameters. RP INF DFWHID is required.

14-16 Location of Host Sort ID in Define the location of the host sort ID; required with UPCPPD55 record R in the Origin of Host Sort ID field.

18-19 Length of Host Sort ID in Define a length, 01 through 20 (lengths 1 through UPCPPD55 record 9 must be expressed as 2-bytes, 01 though 09). This field cannot be blank when Origin of Host Sort ID contains R.

21 Origin of user-defined Define the origin of the user-defined manifest: UPCPPD55 manifest R The manifest originates from the record. Location and length definitions are required. I The manifest is defined using RP INF DFWMUD. blank Use value specified by Host Sort ID.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 81 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

23-25 Location of user-defined Required when Origin of user-defined manifest UPCPPD55 manifest contains R.

27-28 Length of user-defined Define a length, 01 through 25 (lengths 1 through UPCPPD55 manifest 9 must be expressed as 2-bytes, 01 through 09). Must contain a value when Origin of user-defined manifest contains R.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 82 Parameter Reference

DS CTL

Required for DuoSort processing only. Use DS CTL to define a maximum or threshold presort rate level that controls how to split a mailing into USPS-presorted and machine-presorted mailings. Use this parameter with DSREL

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword DS CTL is the only acceptable entry.

8 Highest Rate to Retain in Specify one of the following one-character codes UPCPPD45 USPS Sort (Discount Level to define the highest presort rate to keep as part = none) of any USPS-presorted mailings with no defined discount level. There is no default value. 5 5-digit automated rate 3 3-digit automated rate A AADC/ADC automated rate M MAADC/MADC automated rate X All mail is machine-presorted. If you have carrier route turned on, however, that setting takes precedence over DuoSort processing. Turn off carrier route sorting to sort all mailpieces with DuoSort.

10 Highest Rate to Retain in Specify a 1-character code to define the highest UPCPPD45 USPS Sort (Discount = presort rate to keep as part of any USPS-presorted DNDC) mailings with a defined DNDC discount level. The codes are the same as for Discount Level = none, above. There is no default value.

12 Highest Rate to Retain in Specify a 1-character code to define the highest UPCPPD45 USPS Sort (Discount = presort rate to keep as part of any USPS-presorted DSCF) mailings with a defined DSCF discount level. The codes are the same as for Discount Level = none, above. There is no default value.

14 Highest Rate to Retain in Specify one of the following 1-character codes to UPCPPD45 USPS Sort (Discount = define the highest presort rate to keep as part of DDU) any USPS-presorted mailings with a defined DDU discount level. The codes are the same as for Discount Level = none, above. There is no default value.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 83 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

16 Handling Non-Automation Specify a one-character code to define the UPCPPD45 Mail handling of non-automation mail. M Non-Automation Mail goes to the Machine Sort U Non-Automation Mail goes to the USPS Sort blank Default is M.

18 Move Mailpieces Over One (Applies only to First-Class Mail) Specify one of UPCPPD45 Ounce to the Non-Barcoded the following: Machine Sort Y Move mailpieces exceeding one ounce to the non-barcoded machine sort. N Keep the mailpieces exceeding one ounce to in the automation-compatible machine sort. blank Default is N.

20 Create Separate Trays for (Applies only to First-Class Mail) Specify one of UPCPPD45 Each Ounce Break in the the following: Non-Barcoded Machine Y Create separate trays for each Sort one-ounce break; mailpieces 9 ounces and more are in the same group. N Do not create separate trays for each one-ounce break. blank Default is N. N blank

26 Assign IM® barcode or IM® Specify IM® barcode assignment preferences: UPCPPD45 package barcode to Y Yes machine-sorted mailpieces? N No blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 84 Parameter Reference

DS MIN

Optional: Use DS MIN to define the minimum pieces per scheme for DuoSort processing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword DS MIN is the only acceptable entry.

7-12 Minimum Pieces per Specify a value from 000001-999999 for the UPCPPD40 Scheme minimum number of pieces per scheme. The value specified here must be right-justified with leading spaces or leading zeros.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 85 Parameter Reference

DSRFRC

Optional: Use DuoSort Record Force parameter, DSRFRC, to control the placement of records in to the USPS part of the sort or the Machine part of the sort based on the value of a flag in the input record.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword DSRFRC is the only acceptable entry.

8 Force to USPS or Machine Specify a one-character code to define whether UPCPPD50 Sort to force records to a USPS sort or Machine sort. Note: This field has no default.

M Force to the Machine Sort. U Force to the USPS Sort.

10-12 Location in input record of Specify the location of the flag to check in the UPCPPD50 Flag to Check input record.

14 Check Value If the flag location in the input record matches UPCPPD50 this value, the record is forced to USPS sort or Machine sort, as specified in the Force to USPS or Machine Sort field. Note: Specifying this parameter results in a hard force. The action determined by DSRFRC supersedes any other DuoSort processing determination of record placement. There is only one exception that would cause a record not to be forced as specified by the DSRFRC parameter. This exception occurs when forcing a record to a Machine sort that contains a ZIP Code and/or 3DG ZIP that is not part of a DuoSort scheme. If this exception occurs, the record stays in the USPS part of the Mailing.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 86 Parameter Reference

DSRSEL

Optional: Use DSRSEL to include or exclude specific ZIP Codes or ZIP Code ranges during DuoSort Workshare Manager processing. You can specify multiple DSRSEL parameters for the USPS-presorted portion of your mailing. Use this parameter with DS CTL.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword DSRSEL is the only acceptable entry.

8 Include/Exclude Indicator Select one of the following indicators to include or UPCPD110 exclude individual ZIP Codes or ZIP Code ranges from the USPS-presorted portion of your mailing. This definition is required. There is no default value. I Include these ZIP Codes in the USPS-presorted portion of the mailing. E Exclude these ZIP Codes from the USPS-presorted portion of the mailing.

10-72 Free-form 3-digit/5-digit Define individual 3-digit or 5-digit ZIP Codes or define UPCPD110 ZIP Code Definitions a range of 3-digit or 5-digit ZIP Codes. Please review Valid DSRSEL ZIP Code Definitions for examples of permissible ZIP Code formats.

Valid DSRSEL ZIP Code Definitions

Observe these guidelines when defining your ZIP Codes and ZIP Code ranges. • Only ZIP Codes and ZIP Code ranges are allowed. Any non-numeric separators other than the permitted separators (for example, multiple blank spaces or non-hyphen characters) will cause errors. • Use a single blank space to separate individual ZIP Codes. MailStream Plus will stop processing if the parameter encounters multiple blank spaces. • A range must include a hyphen. • If you define a range of ZIP Codes, the low and high ZIP Codes must have the same format: both 3-digit or both 5-digit. Ranges must start with the low ZIP Code and end with the high ZIP Code, and must include a hyphen.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 87 Parameter Reference

• Five-digit ZIP Codes and ZIP Code ranges take precedence over 3-digit ZIP Codes and ZIP Code ranges. • If you specify Include and Exclude for the same ZIP Code or range of ZIP Codes, DuoSort generates a processing error. Positions 10 through 72 of the DSRSEL parameter requires the following valid formats for entering ZIP Codes and ZIP Code ranges. Each field must be separated by one blank space.

To define this... Use this format...

Include all records containing a specific 3-digit ZIP Code, 163.

Exclude a range of 3-digit ZIP Codes.

Include a specific 5-digit ZIP Code, 12301.

Include all records containing the 3-digit ZIP Codes from 123-127, with the exception of the records starting with 3-digit ZIP Code 124.

Include all records containing the 5-digit ZIP Code 12301. Include a range of 5-digit ZIP Codes, 12551-12751.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 88 Parameter Reference

E CODE

Required. Use E CODE to define the location and length of the characters that make up the entry point code. There may be eight segments in an entry point code. • The first three characters of an E CODE segment definition must contain the starting position (location) of this element in the input name/address record. • The fifth character is the format: P for packed (positive) or C for character. • The seventh character is the length of this element in the input name/address record.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword E CODE is the only acceptable entry.

8 Entry Point Code Define the total length of the entry point in the input UPCPPD10 Length name/address record. Note: The maximum length of an entry point code is 9.

10-12, 18-20, Entry Point Code Define the location of each element that makes up the UPCPPD10 26-28, 34-36, Element Locations entry point code. This field may be expanded one position 42-44, 50-52, to the left. 58-60, 66-68

14, 22, 30, 38, Entry Point Code Define the element type: UPCPPD10 46, 54, 62, 70 Element Type C Character P Packed

16, 24, 32, 40, Entry Point Code Define the length of each element in the entry point codes UPCPPD10 48, 56, 64, 72 Element Length defined above.

Note: When using ADC PT, NDC PT, or SCF PT, E CODE must have a length of 6 bytes and must be defined in one element location/type/length triplet with the Entry Point Code Element Type set to C. This location is filled into the name/address record with the entry point information from ADC PT, NDC PT or SCF PT processing.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 89 Parameter Reference

E DESC

Optional: Use E DESC to identify the location of the Entry Point Description Constant in the name/address file. The Entry Point Description Constant prints on the reports, container tags, and pallet tags. This parameter is used when there is a Y in the "Get Entry Point from Input File" on the ENT PT parameter.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword E DESC is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of the Entry Point Define the location of the entry point description UPCRDEDT Description in the constant in the Name/Address file. Name/Address file

12-13 Length of Entry Point Define the length of the entry point description constant. UPCRDEDT Description The maximum length allowed is 30.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 90 Parameter Reference

E KEY

Note: The E KEY parameter is only required if you are creating and using the mail piece file for MAIL360 Data Manager processing.

Optional: Use E KEY to define the enterprise keys for mailpieces in the mail piece file. Examples of enterprise data include customer information (for example, customer name and address, customer account number, etc.) and any enterprise keys. The Enterprise Key fields are indexed fields in MAIL360 Data Manager and should be unique if used as selection criteria. The E KEY value cannot be in a packed data format.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword E KEY is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Enterprise Key Define the location of Enterprise Key 1 in the UPCPM344 1 Name/Address records.

12-13 Length of Enterprise Key 1 Define the length of Enterprise Key 1. The maximum UPCPM344 length allowed is 64.

15-17 Location of Enterprise Key Define the location of Enterprise Key 2 in the UPCPM344 2 Name/Address records.

19-20 Length of Enterprise Key 2 Define the length of Enterprise Key 2. The maximum UPCPM344 length allowed is 64.

22-24 Location of Enterprise Key Define the location of Enterprise Key 3 in the UPCPM344 3 Name/Address records.

26-27 Length of Enterprise Key 3 Define the length of Enterprise Key 3. The maximum UPCPM344 length allowed is 64.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 91 Parameter Reference

ENT PT

Optional: Use ENT PT to define the Post Office™ where your mail enters the USPS system.

Notes About Using ENT PT

• When choosing discounts such as DDU, SCF, and NDC, please verify that you meet the postal eligibility requirements as specified in the DMM. • You can have more than one type of XXX PT parameter in a single MailStream Plus job, however, if you use any combination of ADC PT, NDC PT and/or SCF PT parameters, you can only have one ENT PT parameter (and it must be marked as the default in position 72). • You must use at least one XXX PT record in your job stream (ENT PT, SCF PT, NDC PT, or ADC PT). Also, the entry point ZIP Code defined on this parameter must be a valid 5-digit ZIP Code contained in the Postal Reference File. • When using SCF PT, NDC PT, or ADC PT, you cannot use an ENT PT definition (entry point code) that starts with a S, B, or A.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ENT PT is the only acceptable entry.

8 Get Entry Point from Input Define the entry point location: UPCPPD75 File Y Get the entry point codes from the input file. The location of the Entry Point ZIP Code is derived from the E CODE parameter. The E CODE parameter length must be 3 or 5. Use the E DESC parameter to get the entry point description location from the input file. If E DESC is not used, the City/State for the ZIP Code will be used. The values in positions 58-70 are used for all entry points. If you specify Y in this position, you may use only one entry point parameter in any job. Space Entry information is defined on the parameter.

9-10 Reserved UPCPPD75

12-20 Entry Point Code Specify characters to identify this post office of mailing. UPCPPD75

22-26 Entry Point ZIP Code Define the ZIP Code of the post office of mailing. UPCPPD75

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 92 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

28-57 Entry Point Constant Define text information to describe this entry point. This UPCPPD75 information will appear on the third line of the bag/tray tags.

58 ADC Discount for this Specify whether to attempt ADC discounts for this entry UPCPPD75 Entry Point point: Y Attempt ADC discounts. N Do not attempt ADC discounts. blank Default is N.

59 Eligible for Intra-DDU Specify whether to attempt DDU discounts for this entry UPCPPD75 Discount For This Entry point: Point Y Attempt DDU discounts. N Do not attempt DDU discounts. blank Default is N.

60 Eligible for Intra-SCF Specify whether to attempt SCF discounts for this entry UPCPPD75 Discount point: Y Attempt SCF discounts. N Do not attempt SCF discounts. blank Default is N.

61 Eligible for Intra-NDC Specify whether to attempt NDC discounts for this entry UPCPPD75 Discount point: Y Attempt NDC discounts. X Attempt NDC discounts, applying them to mixed-level trays.

Note: Use option X with caution. In some instances, this option splits mixed-level trays and impacts report results.

N Do not attempt NDC discounts. blank Default is N.

62 Eligible for In-County Specify whether to attempt in-county discounts for this UPCPPD75 Discount entry point: Y Attempt in-county discounts. This rule applies per Batch for the > 50% rule and < 10,000 pieces.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 93 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

N Do not attempt in-county discounts. X Give the in-county rate all the time (do not use the 50% rule when there are >10,000 pieces in the mailing). blank Default is Y.

63 Reserved

64 Entry Point Facility Type Define the entry point facility type: UPCPPD75 A ASF B NDC C Origin SCF D DDU E Origin DDU H Transfer hub J Origin ADC K Origin NDC

L Origin ASF N Non-determined O Origin (also DMU) Q Origin AMF R ADC S SCF blank Defaults are: • B - For NDC entry discounts (ENT PT position 61 is Y) • R - For attempting ADC entry (position 58) • S - For attempting SCF entry (position 60) • D - For attempting DDU entry (position 59) • N - For all other values

Note: To ensure that MailStream Plus correctly determines the entry facility when specifying D (DDU) in this field, also define an xx INF DRPKEY/PLTKEY parameter as well.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 94 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

65 Make no-minimum Define whether to make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme UPCPPD75 5-digit/scheme containers containers - for DDU entry USPS Marketing Mail parcels for DDU for this entry point: Y Yes, make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. Option Y does NOT override N on any other entry point (xxx PT) parameters.

N No, do not make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y.

Note: To enable this feature, use a Y or leave blank in ALG PS field Small 5-digit Indicator.

66 Make small origin Specify whether to make small origin 3-digit/scheme UPCPPD75 3-digit/scheme containers containers for the current entry point: for this entry point Y Make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. Option Y does NOT override option N in this field on any of the other entry point (XXX PT) parameters, and does NOT make small origin containers for those entry points. N Do not make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals flats, this setting applies to Origin SCF containers instead of 3-digit/scheme containers. To enable this feature, put a Y in or leave blank ALG PS field Small 5-digit Indicator.

68 Tier for This Entry Point These tiers are used with the EP MIN, EP MINC, and EP UPCPPD75 ROL parameters. EP TBL is also required if you are not using the ADC PT, NDC PT, or SCF PT parameters. [blank space] None (default) 1 Tier 1 2 Tier 2 3 Tier 3 4 Tier 4

70 Use the Default ENT PT Specify whether to use the default ENT PT for ZIP Codes UPCPPD75 for ZIP Codes that Match that match the ZIP Code defined on this parameter. the Current Entry Point ZIP Y Use the default entry point. Code

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 95 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

N Use the NDC/SCF for the ZIP Code (if defined). blank Default is N.

72 Use Default Entry Point Define whether this is the default entry point definition: UPCPPD75 Indicator Y Yes, use this as the default entry point. N No, this is not the default entry point. blank Default is N.

Note: If you are only defining one entry point, we suggest that you put a Y in this position.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 96 Parameter Reference

ENT SQ

Use ENT SQ to resequence entry points in your mailing. This allows you to control the timing of your mailing based on geography. The Auto Build functionality is controlled by position 24 of this parameter, and it can sequence your mail in the following ways: • Your mail can be sent in an East to West direction. • Your mail can be sent in a West to East direction. • Sequencing is based on the 3-digit facility ZIP Code prefix. • The maximum number of ENT SQ values permissible is 9999. Note: If you use a SRTFLD or SRTFLn parameter that does not include 001, this parameter will not function.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter keyword ENT SQ is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Entry Point Code This field is only used when an N is entered in position 24. Fields are selected on UPCPP102 and displayed on UPCPP101

18-22 Entry point Sequencing This field is only used when an N is entered in position 24. Fields are Number selected on The entry in this field must be right-justified. UPCPP102 Any Entry Point Codes that are NOT assigned sequence numbers and with this parameter will come out before those that have assigned displayed sequence numbers. More than one Entry Point Code can be assigned on the same sequence number, and the within that sequence number UPCPP101 the Entry Points will be in alpha-numeric order.

24 Auto Build the Auto-build the sequence? Fields are Sequence selected on E Build sequence number east to west. UPCPP102 W Build sequence number west to east. and displayed Note: MailStream Plus accomplishes East and West sequencing on according to facility ZIP Code. UPCPP101

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 97 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

I Radiate the sequence number in. Using I sequences you mail inward, starting at and alternating between both coasts until processing reaches the 3DG ZIP Code defined on this parameter. Sequencing completes across the middle of the country to end at the 3DG ZIP Code. O Radiate the sequence number out. Using O causes the middle of the country to be processed first starting with the 3DG ZIP Code value defined on this parameter. Sequencing continues working outward, alternating between the two coasts, so the two coasts are completed at the same time. N Do not Auto Build. blank Default is N.

Note: When using options E, W, I, or O, only one ENT SQ parameter is allowed. This position is used only on the first ENT SQ definition if you use N in this field.

26-28 3-Digit center point only This position is only used when an I or O is entered in the Auto Build Fields are the Sequence field. selected on UPCPP102 and displayed on UPCPP101

30 Sequence of the default This position has no effect when the Auto Build the Sequence field Fields are entry point contains N. selected on UPCPP102 F Default entry point is first. and L Default entry point is last. displayed on S Default entry point is in sequence based on the UPCPP101 definition in the Auto Build the Sequence field. blank Default is S.

ENTRYP

Optional: Use ENTRYP to enter high and low values for specified groups of entry points. You can also run comparisons on those entry point group values.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 98 Parameter Reference

Note: If both the ENTRYP and BATCHP parameters are in the same job, the ENTRYP is searched for a match. If one is not found, then MailStream Plus evaluates the BATCHP definition.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ENTRYP is the only acceptable entry.

8-9 Entry Point Group Define the entry point group number. Valid values are between 1 and UPCPEN11 Number 50.

11-19 Low Group Code Define the lowest group code value. UPCPEN11

21-29 High Group Code Define the highest group code value. UPCPEN11

31 Location of Comparison Define the location within the entry point to begin your comparison. UPCPEN11 Value It can only be on the first ENTRYP parameter. The default is 1.

33 Length of Comparison Define the length of comparison value. It can only be on the first UPCPEN11 Value ENTRYP parameter. The default is 9.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 99 Parameter Reference

EP EXC

Optional: Use EP EXC to prevent mail from routing to particular entry points automatically generated by the ADC PT, NDC PT, and SCF PT parameters. Mail destined for EP EXC entry points will route instead to the next available entry point, or to the default entry point, as appropriate. On each EP EXC parameter, fields must be populated consecutively with no blank fields existing before a used field. The maximum number of EP EXC values permissible is 700.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 EP EXC EP EXC is the only acceptable entry.

8-13 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

15-20 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

22-27 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

29-34 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

36-41 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

43-48 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

50-55 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

57-62 ADC, NDC, SCF or The first position of the entry point code must contain A, B, or S to UPCPEP11 Entry Point to Exclude define an ADC, NDC, or SCF facility, respectively.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 100 Parameter Reference

EP INF

Optional: Use EP INF to supply text information about each entry point used for your mailing. This information displays on the MailStream Plus printed reports and tags.

Note: If two or more xx INF parameters apply due to the determining criteria, the priority order in which xx INF parameters are used is PA INF, BATINF, EP INF, and RP INF.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword EP INF is the only acceptable entry.

If the information in this record only applies to a single entry point, you may enter the range in the Low Batch Code field only. Information types and data for positions 28-33 and 35-64 are listed in Chapter 2.

8-16 Low Entry Point Code Define the lowest entry point code number to which Fields are selected the information specified applies. on UPCPRI21 and displayed on UPCPRI11

18-26 High Entry Point Code Define the highest entry point code number to which Fields are selected the information specified applies. on UPCPRI21 and displayed on UPCPRI11

28-33 Subkeyword field Define the appropriate sub keyword. See Report Fields are selected Information Fields (Chapter 2 of this guide) for more on UPCPRI21 and information on the sub keywords used by EP INF. displayed on UPCPRI11

35-72 Information Data Define text information corresponding to the Fields are selected subkeyword defined on this parameter. You may on UPCPRI21 and type text in this field or use pre-defined variables. displayed on UPCPRI11 See Information Variables (Chapter 2 of this guide) for more information for a list of variable data for these positions. Note: If you are omitting components of a multi-part subkeyword, please insert blank spaces as place-holders in those components.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 101 Parameter Reference

EP MIN

Optional: Sometimes it can work to your advantage to drop mail at specific, multiple entry points. The EP MIN parameter helps you to perform multiple entry point drops by allowing you to define an original (or "preferred") entry point and an alternate entry point.

You must calculate your cost break-even point to determine whether it is worthwhile to drop your mail at multiple entry points. Break-even points are based upon the number of pieces or total weight of the pieces going to one entry point. EP MIN allows you to calculate the best drop point for your mailpieces by allowing you to define weight and piece count minimums for your original entry point, and assigns the pieces to the alternate entry point if not met. Note: EP MIN parameters are processed in the order in which they are received.

Processing Example

Assume that you define two entry point (ENT PT) parameters, 1 and 2, and you will only drop at entry point 1 if you have 1000 pieces. Using the EP MIN parameter, you would define the Original Entry Point Code as 1, the New Entry Point Code as 2, and the Minimum Number of Pieces for the Original Entry Point as 1000. If there are 1000 or more pieces for entry point 1, the pieces will go to 1. If there are less than 1000 pieces for entry point 1, the pieces will automatically be redirected to 2. Note: You can use EP TBL with EP MIN. See EP TBL description for more information.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword EP MIN is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Original Entry Point Code Define the code for the original entry point. UPCPPD69

18-26 New Entry Point Code Define the entry point from which to drop mail if the UPCPPD69 original entry point requirements are not met. If position 68=Y and 70=N (or blank), then this field must contain one of the following reserved words:

• NEXT or blank (default) - Move mail to the next available discount entry point (for example, SCF to NDC or ADC). • DEFAULT - Move mail to the default entry point.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 102 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

If Move ENT PT based on Tier field (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 68=Y and Build All EP MIN Records for all Tiers in Your Job (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 70=Y, leave this field blank. Note: The new entry point code must also be present in the ENT PT parameter.

28-32 Minimum number of pieces Define the minimum number of pieces for this entry point. UPCPPD69 for entry point (User Any quantity of pieces below this number will have their defined Tier 4, NDC, or if entry point code changed to the New entry point code. using multiple EP MIN The same entry point may not be assigned twice. parameters) - OR - Minimum number of pieces for Tier 4 or NDC entry points when Move ENT PT based on Tier (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 68=Y and Build All EP MIN Records for all Tiers in Your Job or "Internally Generated Entry Points) position 70=Y. Note: This field may be extended 1 position to the left to allow a 6-digit number.

34-38 Minimum weight in lbs for Define the minimum weight in lbs for this entry point. Any UPCPPD69 entry point (User defined weight below this number will have their entry point code Tier 4, NDC, or if using changed to the new entry point code. multiple EP MIN - OR - parameters) Minimum weight for Tier 4 or NDC entry points when Move ENT PT based on Tier (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 68=Y and Build All EP MIN Records for all Tiers in Your Job (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 70=Y. Note: This field may be extended 1 position to the left to allow a 6-digit number.

40-44 Minimum number of pieces UPCPPD69 Note: Use this field only if position 70 = Y. for entry point (User-defined Tier 3/ADC Define the minimum number of pieces for TIER 3/ADC or ASF) or ASF entry-points when position 70 = Y and position 68 = Y. You may extend this field 1 position to the left to accommodate 6-digit entries.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 103 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

46-50 Minimum weight, in lbs., for UPCPPD69 Note: Use this field only if position 70 = Y. entry point (User-defined Tier 3/ADC or ASF) Define the minimum weight for TIER 3/ADC or ASF entry-points when position 70 = Y and position 68 = Y. You may extend this field 1 position to the left to accommodate 6-digit entries.

52-56 Minimum number of pieces If you entered a Y in position 70, enter the minimum UPCPPD69 for entry point (User number of pieces for this entry point. Any number below defined Tier 2 or SCF) your entry will be changed to the new entry point code. You cannot use the same entry point more than once. - OR - Minimum weight for Tier 2 or SCF entry points when Move ENT PT based on Tier (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 68=Y and Build All EP MIN Records for all Tiers in Your Job (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 70=Y. Note: This field may be extended 1 position to the left to allow a 6-digit number. If you are using multiple EP MIN parameters and you do not define position 70 = Y, use position 28 - 32 to define the minimum number of pieces.

58-62 Minimum weight in lbs for If you entered a Y in position 70, enter the minimum UPCPPD69 entry point (User defined weight (in pounds) for this entry point. Any weight below Tier 2 or SCF) this number will be changed to the new entry point code. - OR - Minimum weight for Tier 2 or SCF entry points when Move ENT PT based on Tier (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 68=Y and Build All EP MIN Records for all Tiers in Your Job (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 70=Y. Note: This field may be extended 1 position to the left to allow a 6-digit number. If you are using multiple EP MIN parameters and you do not define position 70 = Y, use positions 34-38 to define the minimum weight in lbs.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 104 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

66 Entry Point minimum This field determines how the entry point minimum is UPCPPD69 calculation calculated. For multiple EP MIN parameters in a single job, specify this field on the first EP MIN parameter only. B If an entry point is in more than 1 batch, the EP MIN counts are counted only within each batch when finding minimum amounts. E If an entry point is in more than 1 batch, the EP MIN counts are evaluated in all batches to find the entry minimums (default).

68 Move ENT PT based on Do you want to move your ENT PT based on Tier or UPCPPD69 Tier internally generated entry points? (Or Internally Generated Y The EP MIN new entry point is based on tiers Entry Points) or internally generated entry points. N The EP MIN new entry point is based on the entry point code defined on this parameter. blank Default is N.

Note: For multiple EP MIN parameters in a single job, specify this field on the first EP MIN parameter only. Also, if you specify a Y in this field, you must either: specify NDC PT, ADC PT, or SCF PT; or define the Tiers on ENT PT.

70 Build All EP MIN Records Do you want to build all of your EP MIN parameters for UPCPPD69 for all Tiers in Your Job all Tiers or internally generated entry points in your job? (Or Internally Generated Y Yes, build EP MIN parameters: Entry Points) • Based on ENT PT • Based on Tiers • For all entry points when using NDC PT, ADC PT, or SCF PT, or • Only if S, B, or A is specified in Facility Type (position 64 of ENT PT)

N No, use the EP MIN definition blank Default is N.

Note: For multiple EP MIN parameters in a single job, specify this field on the first EP MIN parameter only. Also, if this position contains a Y, position 68 must also contain a Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 105 Parameter Reference

EP MINC

Optional: Use EP MINC to define entry point minimums individually by entry point or by entry tier. This parameter is a continuation of the EP MIN parameter.

Note: This parameter is only valid when EP MIN Build All EP MIN Records for all Tiers in Your Job? (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) contains Y.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-7 Parameter Keyword EP MINC is the only acceptable entry. The C in MINC indicates that this is a continuation of the EP MIN parameter definition.

9-13 Minimum Number of Pieces Define the minimum number of pieces for Tier 1 UPCPP105 for Entry Point (User-defined entry points when the following conditions are Tier 1) satisfied on the EP MIN parameter:

• Move ENT PT based on Tier (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 68=Y • Build All EP MIN Records for all Tiers in Your Job (Or Internally Generated Entry Points) position 70=Y

Note: This field may be extended 1 position to the left to allow the entry of a 6-digit number.

15-19 Minimum Weight for Entry Define the minimum weight for Tier 1 entry points UPCPP105 Point when the conditions for the Minimum Number of Pieces for Entry Point field are satisfied. Note: This field may be extended 1 position to the left to allow the entry of a 6-digit number.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 106 Parameter Reference

EP ROL

Optional: EP ROL moves mail into the next level (called "rolling") based on non-palletized and non-destination discounted mail. For example, EP ROL can move the mail from an SCF or Tier 2 entry point to a NDC or Tier 4 entry point. If minimums are still not met after "rolling" from the SCF or Tier 2 entry point to the NDC or Tier 4 entry point, those pieces can then "roll" to the default entry point. This parameter allows you to define the following: • Tier 1 • SCF or Tier 2 • ADC or Tier 3 • NDC or Tier 4

Notes About EP ROL

The following rules apply when using EP ROL: • In order to use EP ROL, you must also be using the ADC PT, NDC PT, SCF PT and/or EP TBL parameters. A valid value must be populated in position 68 of the ENT PT parameter by the software when creating your own ENT PT and EP TBL parameters. • EP ROL is valid for all classes of mail. • Invalid ZIP Code records are maintained in their original entry point and are never moved to a new entry point. • Mailpieces are only rolled due to non-palletization if palletization is enabled through the ALG PL parameter. • You must have Palletization Plus installed in order to use EP ROL. • You must be careful when specifying entry points. EP ROL allows you to define your entry points however you wish - even if you use incorrect XXX PT records in your job. The NEXT variable moves the mail in the following sequence for any manually-defined or internally-generated entry points that exist in the Mailing job: SCF or Tier 2 to ADC or Tier 3 to NDC or Tier 4 to Default. Here are the normal entry point sequences for each class of mail: ® • First-Class Mail - First-Class mail does not receive Destination Discounts; however, EP ROL can be used with manually-defined Tiers to move non-palletized mail. • USPS Marketing Mail • SCF or Tier 2 to ASF or Tier 3 to NDC or Tier 4 to Default ® • For USPS Marketing Mail Letters, when also using SCF PT, EP ROL will attempt to move AADC qualified trays to the appropriate SCF (for SCF discounts) before rolling to the next entry point.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 107 Parameter Reference

• Also for Marketing Mail Letters, when also using NDC PT, EPROL will attempt to move AADC-qualified trays to the appropriate NDC (for NDC discounts), before rolling to the next entry point.

• Periodicals - SCF or Tier 2 to ADC or Tier 3 to Default • Package Services - SCF or Tier 2 to NDC or Tier 4 to Default

• For Tiers, the sequence is Tier 1 to Tier 2 to Tier 3 to Tier 4 to Default • The EP TBL parameter can be used with the EP ROL parameter. See the EP TBL description for more information.

Position Field Name Field Descriptions IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword EP ROL is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Original Entry Point Code Specify the original entry point code. UPCPPD91 Note: If Build EP ROL for each Tier in the job contains Y, this field must be blank.

18-26 New Entry Point to Move Specify the reserved word to define the entry point to UPCPPD91 (Roll) Mail which the mail will be moved for any of the conditions in positions 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, and 42 below. If Build EP ROL for each Tier in the job = N (or is blank), this field must contain one of the following reserved words:

• NEXT - Move mail to the next available discount entry point (for example, SCF to NDC). • DEFAULT - Move mail to the default entry point. • blank - Default is NEXT

Note: In order to use this field correctly, see the normal entry point sequences for each class of mail outlined in Notes About EP ROL.

28 Move Non-Palletized Specify whether to move the Tier 4 or NDC entry point UPCPPD91 Pieces to the New Entry non-palletized pieces to the new entry point. Point Y Move the Tier 4 or NDC entry point non-palletized (User-defined Tier 4 or pieces to the new entry point because they are not NDC when position 70=Y palletized or for all EP ROL parameters when position N Do not move the Tier 4 or NDC entry point 70=N) non-palletized pieces to the new entry point when they are not palletized. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 108 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Field Descriptions IBM i Screen

30 Move Non-Destination Specify whether to move the Tier 4 or NDC entry point UPCPPD91 Discount Pieces to the non-destination discount pieces to the new entry point. New Entry Point Y Move the Tier 4 or NDC entry point non-destination (User-defined Tier 4 or discount pieces to the new entry point because they are NDC when position 70=Y non-destination discount pieces. or for all EP ROL parameters when position N Do not move the Tier 4 or NDC entry point 70=N) non-destination discount pieces to the new entry point when they are non-destination discount pieces. blank Default is N.

32 Move Non-Pallet Pieces to Specify whether to move the Tier 3/ADC or ASF entry UPCPPD91 the New Entry Point point non-palletized pieces to the new entry point. (User-defined Tier 3/ADC Y Move the non-pallet pieces or ASF when position 70=Y) N Do not move the non-pallet pieces blank Default is N.

34 Move non-destination Specify whether to move the Tier 3 or ADC entry point UPCPPD91 discount pieces to the new non-destination discount pieces to the new entry point. entry point Y Move the non-destination discount pieces to the new (User-defined Tier 3/ADC entry point. or ASF when position 70=Y) N Do not move the non-destination pieces to the new entry point. blank Default is N.

36 Move Non-Palletized Specify whether you want to move the Tier 2 or SCF entry UPCPPD91 Pieces to the New Entry point non-palletized pieces to the new entry point. Point Y Move the non-palletized pieces to the new entry point (User-defined Tier 2 or because they are not palletized. SCF when position 70=Y) N Do not move the non-palletized pieces to the new entry point when they are not palletized. blank Default is N.

38 Move Non-Destination Specify whether you want to move the Tier 2 or SCF entry UPCPPD91 Discount Pieces to the point non-destination discount pieces to the new entry New Entry Point point. (User-defined Tier 2 or Y Move the non-destination discount pieces to the new SCF when position 70=Y) entry point because they are non-destination discount pieces.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 109 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Field Descriptions IBM i Screen

N Do not move the non-destination discount pieces to the new entry point when they are non-destination discount pieces. blank Default is N.

40 Move Non-Pallet Pieces to Specify whether you want to move the entry point UPCPPD91 New Entry Point non-pallet pieces to the new entry point. (User-defined Tier 1 when Y Move the non-pallet pieces to the new entry point position 70=Y) because they are non-pallet pieces. N Do not move the non-pallet pieces to the new entry point when they are non-pallet pieces. blank Default is N.

42 Move Non-Destination Specify whether you want to move the entry point UPCPPD91 Discount Pieces to New non-destination discount pieces to the new entry point. Entry Point Y Move the non-destination discount pieces to the new (User-defined Tier 1 when entry point because they are non-destination discount position 70=Y) pieces. N Do not move the non-destination discount pieces to the new entry point when they are non-destination discount pieces. blank Default is N.

68 Reserved.

70 Build EP ROL for each Tier Specify whether you want to build the EP ROL parameters UPCPPD91 in the job for each Tier or all ADCs, NDCs, and SCFs in your job based on the ENT PT parameters. Y Build the EP ROL parameters based on the ENT PT parameters. N The EP ROL parameters are user-defined (positions 8-16). blank Default is N. Note: For multiple EP ROL parameters in a single job, specify this field on the first EP ROL parameter only.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 110 Parameter Reference

EP TBL

Use EP TBL to assign a 3-digit ZIP Code to an entry point for use in the EP MIN and EP ROL parameters.

Position Field Name Field Descriptions IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword EP TBL is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Entry Point Code Define the entry point code for this EP TBL parameter. UPCPPD87

• The entry point defined in these positions must have a corresponding ENT PT parameter. • The entry point defined in these positions can be used as is on the EP ROL or EP MIN parameters. It can also be used with the tier options.

18-20 22-24 3-Digit ZIP Code These fields can be individual 3-digit ZIP Codes or a UPCPPD87 26-28 30-32 range of 3-digit ZIP Codes if separated by a dash (-). 34-36 38-40 The first series of blank fields terminates processing 42-44 46-48 of the parameter. 50-52 54-56 58-60 62-64 66-68 70-72

21, 25, 29, 33, Separators These fields may contain a dash (-) to specify a 3-digit UPCPPD87 37, 41, 45, 49, ZIP Code range. No two consecutive fields may 53, 57, 61, 65, contain dashes. 69

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 111 Parameter Reference

EXITIN

Optional: Use EXITIN to activate any custom (in-house) routines that assume processing control (outside of MailStream Plus) just after reading each record, or before invoking MOVExx parameters, or before invoking stop/start ZIP Code comparisons. The EXITIN parameter may: • Modify the record in the input area • Drop the record • Force the end-of-file

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword EXITIN is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Exit Routine Specify the exit routine to be used. For Windows, UPCRDEDT Unix and Linux, the exit routine name specified must be given in the same case (UPPER or lower or Mixed) as the routine that is to be executed.

18-80 User-Defined Data These positions are reserved for use by the exit UPCRDEDT routine, and will permit the information to be conveyed to it by the user.

EXITIN Routine Processing

The EXITIN routine is dynamically loaded at execution time and receives the following parameter list using standard linkage: • The input area containing the next input record. • A single character action indicator for the function to perform: To EXITIN from the statistics program: • E - Last record was already read. Perform the close logic that the EXITIN subprogram requires. • Any other value - Do any processing required by the EXITIN subprogram. From EXITIN: • E - Force end-of-file and shut down: exit has completed all processing. • R - Reject this record.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 112 Parameter Reference

• X - Drop the record without processing the record. • Any other value - Use normal processing on this record. • The 80-byte EXITIN parameter. • A two-byte File Activator code. The following are the valid File Activator codes and the Assign DD names: • IN - MSNAIN • IS - MSSTIN

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 113 Parameter Reference

EXITOP

Optional: Use EXITOP to activate routines that assume processing control before each OPEN, WRITE, and CLOSE operation for specific sequential files.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword EXITOP is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Exit Routine Specify the exit routine to be used. For Windows, Unix UPCRDEDT and Linux, the exit routine name specified must be given in the same case (UPPER or lower or Mixed) as the routine that is to be executed.

18-80 User-Defined Data These positions are reserved for the exit routine. UPCRDEDT

EXITOP Routine Processing

The exit routine receives the following parameter list using standard linkage. • A single byte indicating the function performed: • O - Open the file. • W - Write the record. • C - Close the file.

• A two-byte field containing one of the following File Activator characters describing the file:

Table 2: EXITOP File Activators

Activator Code Work File Description

CF MSWKCF Control file for qualification sort

CM MSWKCM Statistics step communication file

DT MSWKDT Detail statistics file

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 114 Parameter Reference

Activator Code Work File Description

MS MSWKMS Mail sequence statistics file

NR MSWKNRC Name record report file

ON MSNAON Posting name/address output

OR MSSTOR Rejected records

OS MSST0N Statistics name/address output

SF MSNDSSF Shipping services file

SS MSWKSS Statistics work file

• The record to write to the file (this parameter is not referenced for OPEN and CLOSE operations) • The 80-byte EXITOP parameter

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 115 Parameter Reference

FILEDF

Required. Use FILEDF to describe input and output files. This description includes the following. • File name • Record format (fixed- or variable-length) • Record length (up to 32,760) Note: For IBM i, the value specified cannot exceed 9999.

• Block size • Device type • Label type • Exit routine • Number of records to skip before beginning processing • Maximum number of records to process File names for the FILEDF parameter are described below.

Table 3: FILEDF Parameter Files

File Name (I)nput/(O)utput Description

MailStream Plus

MSSTBK I Bank file for Add a Name (ST)

MSSTIN I Name/address file input (ST)

MSSTON O Name/address file output (ST)

MSSTOR (optional) O Name/address file rejected records output (ST)

MSNAIN I Name/address input file (NA)

MSNAON O Name/address presorted output file (NA)

Note: For the IBM i, MSST00 adds 100 bytes to the name/address records for internal data. FILEDF, scripts, and JCL are handled internally. This extra information is transparent to you, and is removed during the MSNA00 program. For all other platforms, As MailStream Plus executes, it adds 100 bytes of internal data to the beginning of each input name/address record in the

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 116 Parameter Reference

statistics function, so the FILEDF parameter file MSSTON should be 100 bytes greater than MSSTIN. MSNAIN should equal MSSTON. These 100 bytes are removed during the posting function (MSNA00 program).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword FILEDF is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 File Name Specify the name of the file to use: MSSTIN, MSSTOR, Does not apply MSSTON, MSNAIN, MSSTBK, or MSNAON.

17 Record Format Define whether the records in this file are fixed-length Does not apply or variable-length: F Fixed length with no end of record delimiter, pads with blanks to set record length (byte stream, mainframe fixed blocked and unblocked) L Line-sequential with delimiters at end of record:

• For Windows: CR-LF, carriage return line feed, 2 bytes • For Unix: New line, 1 byte

U Undefined records V Variable-length record; For z/OS, 4-byte record

blank Default is F for all platforms.

19-22 Fixed Record Size or Define the length, in bytes, of the records in the file. UPCPPA11, Maximum Record Size For variable-length records, this is the maximum record UPCPPD10, length (up to 32,760). If you need to enter a 5-digit UPCPST20, number, use positions 18-22. UPCPST60, and UPCRDMD01 Note: For z/OS users, if the file length is greater than 1000 bytes, the record length must be defined for all file names.

Note: For IBM i users, the value specified cannot exceed 9999.

24-28 Maximum Block Size Define the size, in bytes, of the blocks in the file. Does not apply You may use positions 23-28 if you require additional space.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 117 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

39-46 Exit Routine Define the name of the input exit routine called when Does not apply MailStream Plus is about to read an input record or the name of the output exit routine called when MailStream Plus is ready to write an output record.

50-56 Number of Records to Skip Define the number of input records that MailStream Does not apply Plus will skip before selecting the first record to process.

58-64 Reserved

66-72 Maximum Number of Specify the maximum number of records that Does not apply Records to Process MailStream Plus should read from (input records) or write to (output records) this file.

Limiting Processing with FILEDF

Note: This feature does not apply to IBM i.

Use one of these ways to limit the number of records MailStream Plus processes: • You can skip a portion of the file before any records are selected. • You can specify a maximum number of records to process; in this case, MailStream Plus starts at the beginning of the input file and processes every record until the maximum number is reached. • For the Generate Presort Statistics function, you may specify a range of ZIP Codes to process on the HEADER parameter. You can use these fields with each other. For example, you could enter a number of records to skip, and a maximum number of records to read if you wanted to process the middle of the file, but not the beginning or the end.

Exit Routine Notes

Note: This feature does not apply to the IBM® i platform.

CALL program USING exit-parm-1, exit-parm-2, buffer, exit-parm-4. 1. EXIT-PARM-1: 9-byte program that contains: • DDname X(8). • Function X(1). Contains one of the following codes.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 118 Parameter Reference

C Close R Read

O Open W Write

2. EXIT-PARM-2: 5-byte program that contains: • LRECL S9(05) Packed-Decimal. • Read: Return the actual length of the record, or 0 to indicate End-of-File. • Write: Write only the number of bytes indicated.

3. BUFFER: 32760-byte area. 4. Input to MSST00 or Output from MSNA00, data starts at beginning of buffer. 5. Output to MSST00 or Input to MSNA00: User's data is offset by 100 bytes, the first 100 bytes are reserved for Pitney Bowes Software information. 6. If variable-length, the first 4 bytes are RDW information, with above references following the RDW. 7. EXIT-PARM-4: An 80-byte program that contains FILEDF parameter image X(80).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 119 Parameter Reference

FRM BL

Optional: Use FRM BL to activate firm bundling for periodicals. This parameter allows multiple copies of the same publication destined for the same address to be bundled together as a "firm bundle" with only one per-piece rate paid for the bundle. This parameter includes the following items: • Minimum quantity to create firm bundles. (Note this is not the threshold amount and not the same as the minimum copies in a firm bundle.) • Minimum number of pieces in a firm bundle when it becomes necessary to split a firm bundle. • Length of the fields that will be compared to determine a firm bundle (firm bundling comparands) • Location of the fields on the FRM BL parameter. • You must sort your input file prior to using MailStream Plus in ascending order by Batch Code, Entry Point, ZIP Code, Carrier Route, and all fields specified on the FRM BL parameter. If you are performing a Carrier Route Line-of-Travel or Carrier Route Walk Sequence in addition to Firm Bundling, you need to use an X in the Out of Sequence Processing Code field on the ZIP IN parameter.

Please note: • If the ZIP IN parameter contains the carrier route location, MailStream Plus uses the carrier route information for firm bundle sequence checking. • If the carrier route is invalid in a name/address input record, MailStream Plus considers the record's carrier route to be blank. This can result in a firm bundle sequence error. • Verify the definition in the Blank Walk-Sequence/Line-of-Travel Disposition field of the ZIP IN parameter. An incorrect setting can result in MailStream Plus interpreting the carrier route information as blank. This can result in a firm bundle sequence error. • If you are also using SCF PT, NDC PT, or ADC PT to assign the entry points to your mailpieces, you must set How to handle firm bundle seq errors (position 72) to "W" or "1." We recommend "1." Note: If your mailing contains only one entry point, ensure that the E CODE parameter references the first byte of the input ZIP Code field (Entry Point Code Element Locations field) to avoid sequence errors. As described earlier in the FRM BL text, to ensure that all possible records are prepared as firm bundles, you must sort the Name/Address file by certain fields. When using the ADC PT, NDC PT, or SCF PT parameters to have MailStream Plus assign the entry point code, the Entry Point field must be excluded from that sortation.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 120 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword FRM BL is the only acceptable entry.

8 Minimum Quantity for Firm Value from 2-9 indicating the minimum number of UPCPST50 Bundle copies to make up a firm bundle. This is the threshold amount necessary to do firm bundling. This value will also be used to define the minimum bundle size (in number of copies) when it is necessary to split firm bundles, the exception being, when a firm bundle is split due to volume, thickness, or weight constraints, in which case the firm bundle may be as few as two copies. Enter the minimum number of pieces that must be present and going to the same destination to make a firm bundle. MailStream Plus makes from these pieces one or more physical firm bundles. After taking physical constraints into account, these bundles may have as few as two pieces in them.

The next two rows define the location and length of each firm bundling comparand field. For example, the location of comparand #2 appears in bytes 17-19, and the length of comparand #2 appears in bytes 21-22. You may define up to eight firm bundling comparand fields with combined lengths not exceeding 99.

10-12, 17-19, Location of Firm Bundling Define the location of the comparison field on the input UPCPST50 24-26, 31-33, Comparand Field name/address record. 38-40, 45-47, 52-54, 59-61

14-15, 21-22, Length of Firm Bundling Define the length of the comparison field on the UPCPST50 28-29, 35-36, Comparand Field name/address record. 42-43, 49-50, 56-57, 63-64

72 Handling Firm Bundle Define how to handle firm bundle sequencing errors: UPCPST50 Sequence Errors E Generate an error and stop the run. W Generate a warning message each time an error occurs. Continue processing. 1 Generate a warning message on the first error. Continue processing. Issue no additional warnings.

blank Default is E.

Note: As described previously, to ensure that all possible records are prepared as firm bundles,

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 121 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

you must sort the name/address file by certain fields. When using the ADC PT, NDC PT, or SCF PT parameters to have MailStream Plus assign the entry point code, the Entry Point field must be excluded from that sortation. The USPS assigns many 3-digit ZIP Codes to their facilities non-sequentially or non-contiguously. This makes it possible that, when using ADC PT, NDC PT, or SCF PT, MailStream Plus may generate a sequence error messages and end the job. To avoid this situation when using ADC PT, NDC PT, or SCF PT, you may need to use a W or 1 in field to ensure that the job completes.

MailStream Plus Reporting of Firm Bundling Postage Rates

Piece ID counts and postage costs are accurately reflected in your non-regulatory reports. However, in cases of multiple piece IDs within firm bundles, you may notice results that seem contradictory at first, therefore, it is important that you understand how firm bundles are set up and reported upon. You must pay a piece rate and pound rate for each piece in a mailing. In firm bundling, a "piece" can consist of more than one piece ID. So, when reporting by piece ID, you cannot report solely on the piece ID portion of the postage calculation, because this would not reflect accurate postage calculations, especially when you have multiple piece IDs. In fact, this may even cause inaccurate postal rates to print on your reports. Alternatively, if the MailStream Plus reports showed the total valid rate for all piece IDs, and then added these, it would reflect a total exceeding the actual postal rate. For example, let's assume that your firm bundle is made up of the multiple piece IDs. There are 15 copies one firm bundle, but all copies count as one piece for the purpose of postal calculations. This firm bundling is to your advantage, since you pay postage on a single piece instead of 15 separate pieces of mail. When MailStream Plus prints statements by piece ID, the statement for piece ID FRM01 will show 4 "copies" and one piece, and calculations. The FRM02 breakdown will show 11 copies, no pieces, and no calculations. Why? Since the single piece of this firm bundle is already paid for on the FRM01 postage statement (reported by piece ID), the FRM02 statement does not repeat the same details. In other words, the FRM02 pieces are allowed to "tag along" with the FRM01 bundle pieces. In order to reflect the most accurate postage calculations possible, we show the total postage for the first piece ID in a firm bundle. When MailStream Plus prints the All Piece IDs statement, it includes all calculations together so that there is no appearance of inaccuracies or miscalculations.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 122 Parameter Reference

FRMNAM

Use the FRMNAM parameter to define the input location and length of the firm name for the MAIL360 Data Manager Mail Piece file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword FRMNAM is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Company Name Location Define the location of the firm name in the input file. UPCPM361

12-13 Company Name Length Define the length of the firm name in the input file. UPCPM361

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 123 Parameter Reference

HEADER

Required. Use HEADER to specify the date and text to be printed at the top of every page of each report and limit processing to only those records whose ZIP Codes fall within a specified range. You cannot use batch code- or entry point-sorted files when using this feature.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword HEADER is the only acceptable entry.

7 Rate Choice Define rates to use when producing reports: UPCPPX01 P Previous rates blank Current rates

Note: Complex rate changes may not allow this feature in some releases.

8-17 Header Date Define the date to print on the top of each report page UPCPPX01 in an MM/DD/YYYY format. Leave this position blank if you want MailStream Plus to use the system date. If you do not define a xx INF RPDATE parameter, MailStream Plus also uses this field to determine the USPS locale keys.

19-58 Report Header Define the text to print at the top line of every page for UPCPPX01 each report.

60-64 Start ZIP Code Define the first ZIP Code in the range of ZIP Codes to Does not apply, but process. Default is blank. If you leave this field blank, can be edited MailStream Plus processes the entire input file. manually To process a range of ZIP Codes, sort the input file in ZIP Code sequence. MailStream Plus will not process any ZIP Codes before the Start ZIP Code, so if the input file is not sorted prior to this step, many of your ZIP Codes will be left out of the job run.

67-71 Stop ZIP Code Define the last ZIP Code in the range of ZIP Codes to Does not apply, but process. Default is blank. If you leave this field blank, can be edited MailStream Plus processes the entire input file. manually To process a range of ZIP Codes, sort the input file in ZIP Code sequence. MailStream Plus will stop processing any input as soon as a ZIP Code is encountered that is greater than the Stop ZIP Code, so

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 124 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

if the input file is not sorted prior to this step, many of your ZIP Codes will be left out of the job run.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 125 Parameter Reference

IDCURL

Optional: Defines the input name/address file location and length of up to four URLs used to create the RMR records linked to the PDR/PBC file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IDCURL is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Input file location, URL A Defines the starting location of URL A UPCRDEDT

12-14 Length of input URL A UPCRDEDT Defines the length of input URL A; valid lengths are 01 through 250

16-18 Input file location of URL A UPCRDEDT Defines the input file location of the URL A template template code code (length=3/4)

20-22 Input file location, URL B UPCRDEDT Defines the input file location of URL B (length=3/4)

24-26 Length of input URL B Defines the length of URL B, a value of 1 through 250. UPCRDEDT

28-30 Input file location of URL B Defines the input file location of the template used to UPCRDEDT template code format URL B (length = 3/4)

32-34 Input file location, URL C Defines the starting location of URL C UPCRDEDT

36-38 Length of input URL C Defines the length of URL C, a value of 1 through 250. UPCRDEDT

40-42 Input file location of URL C Defines the input file location of the template used to UPCRDEDT template code format URL C (length = 3/4)

44-46 Input file location, URL D Defines the starting location of URL D UPCRDEDT

48-50 Length of input URL D Defines the length of URL D, a value of 1 through 250. UPCRDEDT

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 126 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

52-54 Input file location of URL D Defines the input file location of the template used to UPCRDEDT template code format URL D (length = 3/4)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 127 Parameter Reference

IMBCNT

Optional: Use IMBCNT to create the 24-digit tray/bag Intelligent Mail® barcode number. Your program converts this number into an ISS code 128 24-digit barcode. The Intelligent Mail® barcode is created for sacks and trays. This value is placed in the Mail.dat *.csm and MSRDTRA tag files. This barcode is required by PostalOne!®.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IMBCNT is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Mailer ID (Required) Specify the 6- or 9-digit USPS Mailer ID. UPCPM366 There is no default value. Use the Mailer ID Format definition to define the correct format of this ID. If you define a 6-digit Mailer ID, ensure that you left-justify that value within this field. This Mailer ID populates the Mail.dat MPA-1123 field.

18 Mailer ID Format Specify the format of the USPS-assigned Mailer ID UPCPM366 field (a 6-digit or 9-digit Mailer ID). This definition also changes the format of the 24-digit barcode. 6 6-digit Mailer ID 9 9-digit Mailer ID blank Default is the 9-digit Mailer ID.

20-27 Serial Number Define the starting serial number of the 24-digit UPCPM366 Intelligent Mail® barcode. This number increments serially so that each tray or sack is assigned a unique serial number. The last serial number is saved to the customer information file (MSETCI) depending your Save the Serial Number definition on this parameter. Each Mailer ID is saved independently of other Mailer IDs. Please note these suggestions for this field:

• This field should usually be left blank, using the number from the customer information file. You may specify a value to re-run a job or to reset the customer information file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 128 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• If the format in column 18 of this parameter is 9, this number should not be greater than 5 digits. If the format is 6, this number may be a maximum of 8 digits.

The possible values are:

• User-specified value: The beginning serial number. Ensure that no other jobs with IMBCNT definitions are running when this is selected. If you define a value for this field, you must ensure that the value does not overlap with the values for other jobs. If you define this field, and if Save the Serial Number contains Y, MailStream Plus will not keep the serial numbers unique by sharing the MSETCI file serial numbers with other currently running jobs. The ending serial number from this job is saved regardless of whether other jobs are using the MSETCI file. • Blank or zero (default): Use the serial number from the customer information file. Note: If the customer information file does not contain a serial number, MailStream Plus starts at 1. The value in this field can be left- or right-justified. We strongly recommend that no other job use IMBCNT if this serial number is specified and the Save the Serial Number contains Y.

29 Save the Serial Number Define whether to save the last serial number to the UPCPM366 customer information file: Y Save the last serial number (default). N Do not save the last serial number and leave the customer information file as-is. This is useful for re-running jobs.

blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 129 Parameter Reference

IMBCTL

Optional: Use IMBCTL to define a general control flag and control the creation of the Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. If you define the IMBCTL parameter, you must also define the following parameter fields:

Table 4: Related IMBCTL Definitions

Parameter Description Positions

POSTEI Post Entry Point Information 12-14

POSTBI Post Batch Code Information 8-10

POSTLI Post Pallet Number 8-10

POSTLI Post Pallet IMB Number (only when creating Shipping Services file) 16-18

POSTCI Post Container Number 8-10

POSTCI Post Container IMB Number (only when creating Shipping Services file) 16-18

POSTPI Post Bundle Number 8-10

POSTRI Post Final Sort Sequence Number 12-14

POSTMD 39-byte Mail.dat single piece information 8-10

POSTRC Location to post the Pricing Tier Indicator 16-18

POSTRC Location to post the Full Service Eligibility flag 60-62

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IMBCTL is the only acceptable entry.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 130 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

8 Outbound/Inbound UPCPM310 Note: This position is only valid if MailStream Plus is generating Assignment Option the Intelligent Mail® barcode.

Define the outbound/inbound assignment option: B Assign both outbound and inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. This value is valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes only. I Assign only inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. This values is valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes only. O Assign only outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode/Intelligent Mail® Package barcode numbers. U Assign outbound and inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers based on the value in the input file. This value is valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes only.

Note: If you specify U in this field, at least one of the User-Defined Intelligent Mail® barcode definitions on this parameter must contain a definition. A blank in these fields defines the value is not to be compared to the value specified in the Intelligent Mail® Barcode Assignment Type Location field.

This field is also required if the TADF Payload/Banner Text Output Location definition (IMBOUT) contains the numeric location for posting the (65-character) output TADF Payload.

10-12 Intelligent Mail® Barcode Specify the location of the Intelligent Mail® barcode assignment type UPCPM310 Assignment Type in the input record. Location Note: This position is only valid if MailStream Plus is generating the Intelligent Mail® barcode.

14 User-Defined Outbound Specify the user-defined value for outbound only Intelligent Mail® UPCPM310 Intelligent Mail® Barcode barcode numbers. Number Note: This position is only valid if MailStream Plus is generating the Intelligent Mail® barcode.

16 User-Defined Inbound ® UPCPM310 ® Specify the user-defined value for inbound only Intelligent Mail Intelligent Mail Barcode barcode numbers. Number Note: This position is only valid if MailStream Plus is generating the Intelligent Mail® barcode.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 131 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

18 User-Defined Specify the user-defined value for both outbound and inbound UPCPM310 Outbound/Inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. Intelligent Mail® Barcode Note: This position is only valid if MailStream Plus is generating Number the Intelligent Mail® barcode.

20, 22 Reserved

24 Process for Handling Define the handling of invalid Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers: UPCPM310 Invalid Intelligent Mail® E Generate an error message and stop execution of the Barcode Numbers job. W Generate a warning message in the execution log for each invalid Intelligent Mail® barcode. Continue processing and output all spaces for the invalid Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers.

blank Default is E.

26 Define MAIL360 Error Define error handling for serial number errors passed from the UPCPM310 Handling During MAIL360™ Manager API: MailStream Plus E Issue error and stop processing (default). Processing W Issue warning and continue processing.

blank Default is E.

28 Mail Piece File Indicator Define whether to create the IMB Mail Piece File/IMpb USPS Shipping UPCPM311 Services file: X Create the Mail Piece File in an XML file format (valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes only).

M Create the Mail Piece File in a flat file format (valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes only).

S Create the USPS Shipping Services file (valid for Intelligent Mail® Package barcodes only).

N Do not create either file. blank Default is N.

Note: Using X or M to generate the Mail Piece File requires Mail360™ Manager, a separately licensed Pitney Bowes product.The Mail Piece File is a custom format used to input mailpiece information into the EngageOne™ Delivery Audit tracking application.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 132 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Output assignments:

• Mailpiece File (X and M)

• IBMi - written to work library in the M3XRFjobid file, member M3XRF • UNIX/Linux and Windows - written to file pointed to by variable G1IMBXRF • z/OS - written to DD G1IMBXRF

• Shipping Services Files

• IBMi - Variable format written to MVSSFjobid file, MVSSF member; Fixed format written to MFSSFjobid file, MFSSF member. • UNIX/Linux and Windows output is written to file pointed to by variable DD MSNDSSF. • z/OS output is written to DD MSNDSSF

30 USPS Shipping Define the USPS Shipping Services File level of detail. UPCPM311 Services File Detail B Level of detail is Batch and Entry Point. Level Indicator E Level of detail is Entry Point only. blank Default is B.

32 USPS Shipping Define the Intelligent Mail® Package barcode USPS Shipping Services UPCPM311 Services File Type file type to create. 2 Create the Tracking File. blank Default is 2.

34 USPS Shipping Define whether to create the optional D2 record for the USPS Shipping UPCPM311 Services File D2 Record Services file. Indicator Y Yes: create the optional D2 record. N No: do not create the optional D2 record. blank Default is N.

39 Serial Number Define the process to use for serial number assignment for the UPCPM311 Assignment Mode Shipping Services file electronic file number. Note: Using the MailStream Plus manual numbering engine does not guarantee any uniqueness period required by the USPS for Full Service discounts. It is the responsibility of the user,

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 133 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

when using IMBSER, to keep track of the last serial number used and update IMBSER accordingly. A Automatic - You must purchase and install MAIL360™ Manager to use the this option. M Manual; IMBSER is required. blank Default is M.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 134 Parameter Reference

IMBINB

Optional: Use IMBINB to create and define the placement of the inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode piece numeric representation (31 characters) and the TADF Payload (65 characters).

Note: The IMBINB parameter is only valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes only. This parameter is not valid for creating Intelligent Mail® Package barcodes (IM Package barcodes).

The IMBINB parameter generates the inbound mailpiece barcode that applies to a specific mailpiece rather than a tray, sack, or pallet. The format of the mailpiece barcode is specific, and differs from the tray, sack, and pallet barcodes. It is a 65-bar barcode, known as the TADF Payload, which accommodates 31 digits of data, and is required for letters and flat mailpieces. Note: If you define the IMBINB parameter, you must also define the IMBCTL parameter and the ZIPINB parameter. For more information on the IMBCTL parameter, review the description of the IMBCTL parameter. For more information on the ZIPINB parameter, see the description of the ZIPINB parameter.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IMBINB is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Inbound Intelligent Mail® Define the location of the inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode piece (31 UPCPM340 Barcode Piece Location characters) in the name and address record (LENGTH=3/4).

11 Preassigned Intelligent Define the pre-assigned Intelligent Mail® barcode indicator: UPCPM340 ® Mail Barcode Indicator ® P The location specified by the Inbound Intelligent Mail Barcode Piece Location field is the location of a predefined Intelligent Mail® barcode number. To use P, the following fields must be blank:

• Mailer ID Location • Mailer ID Location in Record • Length of Mailer ID in Record • Default Service Type ID Location • Default Service Type ID Record Location • Default Service Type ID • Serial Number Assignment • 9-Digit Serial Number for 6-Digit Mailer IDs • 6-Digit Serial Number for 9-Digit Mailer IDs • Location of Serial Number in Record

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 135 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• Length of Serial Number in Record

blank Use the location specified for the Inbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Piece Location to locate the generated Intelligent Mail® barcode number.

12 Mailer ID Location Define the location of the Mailer ID: UPCPM340 R In the name and address record (see Mailer ID Location in Record and Length of Mailer ID in Record). If you specify R, then Mailer ID Location in Record and Length of Mailer ID in Record must not be blank. I INF parameters. If you specify I, you must define an information variable (RP INF) for IMBMLR. The assignment sequence is as follows: 1. PA INF 2. BATINF 3. EP INF 4. Defaults to RP INF

S Same as outbound. If you specify S, you must also define IMBOUT.

14-16 Mailer ID Location in Define the location of the Mailer ID in the name and address record. UPCPM340 Record Note: This field must not be blank if you specify R in the Mailer ID Location field.

18 Length of Mailer ID in Define the length of the Mailer ID in the input record. UPCPM340 Record Note: This field must not be blank if you specify R in the Mailer ID Location field.

6 6-digit Mailer ID 9 9-digit Mailer ID blank Default is the 9-digit mailer ID

When you specify 9 in this field, MailStream Plus accepts either a 6- or 9-digit mailer ID. If you specify 9 and a 6-digit mailer ID is found in the record, the mailer ID is formatted with three trailing spaces. All 9-digit mailer IDs start with a 9.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 136 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

30 Default Service Type ID Required - must not be blank. Define the location of the default service UPCPM340 Location type: R In the input record in the location specified in the Default Service Type ID Record Location field. C Specified in Default Service Type ID field.

32-34 Default Service Type ID Define the location of the default Service Type ID in the input record UPCPM340 Record Location (LENGTH=3/4). Note: This field must not be blank if you specify R in Default Service Type ID Location field.

36-38 Default Service Type Define the default service type. This field must not be blank if you UPCPM340 specify C in the Default Service Type ID Location field. Note: The USPS adds and changes new codes regularly, so please check your current USPS documentation for a list of valid codes.

44 Serial Number Define the process to use for assigning serial numbers: UPCPM340 Assignment A Automatically assign serial numbers. MAIL360 Manager or MAIL360 Server determines how many records are in the file and reserves the difference from what it requires to store serial numbers. Numbering starts with the next available value, based on the last call to MAIL360 Manager or MAIL360 Server. You must install MAIL360™ Manager to use option.

B Basic serial number assignment based on the serial number entered in the 9-Digit Serial Number for 6-Digit Mailer IDs field and the 6-Digit Serial Number for 9-Digit Mailer IDs field. M Manually assign serial numbers. Using the MailStream Plus manual numbering engine does not guarantee any uniqueness period required by the USPS for full service discounts. It is the responsibility of the user, when using the IMBSER parameter, to keep track of the last serial number used and update accordingly.

R Assign serial numbers from the input record (see the Location of Serial Number in Record and Length of Serial Number fields).

46-54 9-Digit Serial Number Define the 9-digit serial number to use for all 6-digit Mailer IDs. UPCPM340 for 6-Digit Mailer IDs

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 137 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

56-61 6-Digit Serial Number Define the 6-digit serial number to use for all 9-digit Mailer IDs. UPCPM340 for 9-Digit Mailer IDs

63-65 Location of Serial Define the three-digit location of the serial number in the input record. UPCPM340 Number in Input Record

67 Length of Serial Number Define the length of the serial number in the input record: UPCPM340 6 6-digit serial number 9 9-digit serial number blank Default is the 9-digit serial number.

Note: If you specify 9 in this field, MailStream Plus accepts a 6- or 9-digit serial number from the input file. If you specify 9 and MailStream Plus finds a 6-digit serial number in the record, the serial number is formatted with three trailing spaces.

69-71 Location to Post TADF Define the input name and address record location in which to post UPCPM340 Payload the 65-character TADF Payload. This field allows your 31-digit Intelligent Mail® barcode to be converted to the 65-character TADF payload, which maps each of the 65 characters to an Intelligent Mail® barcode font on the Inkjet printer. Contact your inkjet printer manufacturer for specific instructions on printing Intelligent Mail® barcode fonts.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 138 Parameter Reference

IMBOUT

Required for Intelligent Mail® barcode processing. Use IMBOUT to create and define the placement of the outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode piece numeric representation (31 characters) and the TADF Payload (65 characters) or the outbound Intelligent Mail® Package barcode (IM® Package barcode) numeric representation (34 characters) and the human readable and banner text. Note: If you define the IMBOUT parameter, you must also define the IMBCTL parameter. For more information on the IMBCTL parameter, see the description of IMBCTL.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IMBOUT is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Position of Intelligent Define the name and address file position for the 31-character UPCPM355 Mail® Barcode Intelligent Mail® barcode or the 34-character Intelligent Mail® Package barcode. If the Preassigned IM® Barcode Indicator field on this parameter is blank, this is the location for MailStream Plus to post the generated number. If you specify P for the preassigned indicator, the value specified in this field is the location of the predefined outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode number.

11 Preassigned Intelligent Define the preassigned Intelligent Mail® barcode indicator: UPCPM355 Mail® Barcode Indicator P The location specified in Position of IM Barcode field contains a predefined Intelligent Mail® barcode number. If you specify P, the fields defining the Serial Numbering must be blank. Those positions are only used/required when this field is blank (MailStream Plus generates the Intelligent Mail® barcode number). blank MailStream Plus generates the Intelligent Mail® barcode/Intelligent Mail® Package barcode (IM Package barcode) and places the Intelligent Mail® barcode number in the location specified in the Position of IM barcode field. Note: For Flats mailers, the two-digit Intelligent Mail® barcode Identifier will be updated to correctly reflect the OEL type for Flats mailings when the predefined Intelligent Mail® barcode number is provided.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 139 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

12 Location of Mailer ID This field is required when the pre-assigned IM barcode indicator is UPCPM355 blank. Define the placement of the input mailer ID needed to generate the Intelligent Mail® barcode: R The mailer ID is in the input record. See the Location of Mailer ID In Record and Length of Mailer ID in Record fields. I The mailer ID is defined in the report information variable (xxxINF) parameter. The assignment sequence is as follows:

• Is PA INF defined? If not... • Is BATINF defined? If not... • Is EP INF defined? If not... • Use the RP INF definition

Note: If you specify I, you must define an information variable (RP INF) for IMBMLR. If you specify R, the Location of Mailer ID In Record and Length of Mailer ID in Record fields must not be blank.

14-16 Location of Mailer ID In Define the three-digit record location of the mailer ID. This field must UPCPM355 Record not be blank when Location of Mailer ID field contains R.

18 Length of Mailer ID in Define the length of the mailer ID defined in the previous fields. This UPCPM355 record field must not be blank when Location of Mailer ID field contains R. 6 6-digit mailer ID 9 9-digit mailer ID

Note: When you specify 9 in this field, MailStream Plus accepts either a 6- or 9-digit mailer ID. If you specify 9 and a 6-digit mailer ID is found in the record, the mailer ID is formatted with three trailing spaces. All 9-digit Mailer IDs start with 9.

30 Default Service Type ID Required - This field cannot be blank. Define the location of the default UPCPM355 Location service type: R The default Service Type ID is found in the input record location specified in positions 32-34 on this parameter. C The default Service Type ID is specified in the Default Non-Automation Service Type ID (STID) /Location of Default Service Type ID and the Default Service Type ID for Full Service/Basic Service Intelligent Mail® Barcodes fields.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 140 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

32-34 Define service type: This field must be blank if position 40 - Use full service STID for UPCPM355 Non-automation service non-automation mail - contains Y. type ID (STID) for IM® Define one of the following: Barcode mail or Service type ID (STID) for IM® STIDs: package Barcode mail • When positions 36-38 (IM® Barcode Full Service/Basic type ID) are ® - or - blank, this field's value will also be used for Basic IM barcodes only. Define starting location: • Must be defined if position 30 - Default service type ID location - input service type ID contains C and position 40 - Use full service STID for non-automation mail - does not contain Y. • Define the service type ID for IM® package Barcode or Priority Mail using IM® barcodes.

Starting location, input STID field:

• Must be defined if position 30 - Default service type ID location - contains R. • If this position contains R positions 36-38 must be blank. • Applies to all IM® Barcode service types.

36-38 Define Full Service, or This field must be blank for IM® package Barcodes and Priority Mail UPCPM355 Basic, Service Type ID using IM® Barcodes. for IM® Barcode mail • When position 30 - Default service type ID location - contains C, this field may contain the service type ID for full service- and basic service-eligible mailpieces. • If position 40 contains Y, (Allow full service STID to be used for non-automation), this field cannot be blank. This value is also used for non-full service mail. • This field cannot be blank if ALG PP position 10 - Intelligent Mail® mode - contains F or Y. • When this field is blank, the default is to use the same service type ID used in positions 32-34.

40 Allow full service STID Define whether to allow a full-service type ID (STID) to also be used UPCPM355 to be used for for non-automation mail. non-automation mail Y Yes, allow a full-service STID to be used for non-automation mail. Option Y is valid only for mail classes that are eligible for IM barcode and full service processing. The Non-Automation Service Type ID, positions 32-34, must also be blank when this is field contains Y. N No, do not allow a full-service STID to be used for non-automation mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 141 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default is N.

44 Serial Number Required. Define the method to generate serial numbers for this job: UPCPM360 Assignment A Automatically assign the serial number. Numbering starts with the next available number, based on the last call to MAIL360 Manager (or MAIL360 Server). You must install MAIL360 Manager to use the A (auto-numbering) option. You must have the MAIL360 Manager product installed to use the A (auto-numbering) option. M Manually assign serial numbers. Using the manual numbering engine does not guarantee the uniqueness period required by the USPS for full service discounts. When using the IMBSER parameter, you must keep track of the last serial number used and update assignments accordingly.

B Basic serial number assignment based on the serial numbers defined in the 9-Digit Serial Number for 6-Digit Mailer IDs field and the 6-Digit Serial Number for 9-Digit Mailer IDs field. You must define both of these fields. This value is valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes only.

R Assign serial numbers from the input record (see the descriptions of the Location of Serial Number in Record and Length of Serial Numbers fields).

This field must not be blank. If you specify M for this field, you must also define the IMBSER parameter.

46-54 9-Digit Serial Number Define the 9-digit serial number to use for all 6-digit Mailer IDs. UPCPM360 for 6-Digit Mailer IDs

56-61 6-Digit Serial Number Define the 6-digit serial number to use for all 9-digit Mailer IDs. UPCPM360 for 9-Digit Mailer IDs

63-65 Location of Serial Define the three-digit location of the serial number in the input record. UPCPM360 Number in Record

66-67 Length of Serial Number Define the length of the serial number in the input record: UPCPM360 6 6-digit serial number for the Intelligent Mail® barcode.

9 9-digit serial number for the Intelligent Mail® barcode.

Note: If you specify option 9, MailStream Plus accepts a 6- or 9- digit serial number from the input file. If you specify option 9

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 142 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

and a 6-digit serial number is found in the record, the serial number is formatted with three trailing spaces.

7 7-digit serial number for the Intelligent Mail® Package barcode 10 10-digit serial number for the Intelligent Mail® Package barcode: If you specify the value 10, MailStream Plus accepts a 7- or 10- digit serial number from the input file. If you specify the value 10 and a 7-digit serial number is found in the record, the serial number is formatted with three trailing spaces. 11 11-digit serial number for the Intelligent Mail® Package barcode 14 14-digit serial number for the Intelligent Mail® Package barcode If you specify the value 14, MailStream Plus accepts an 11- or 14- digit serial number from the input file. If you specify the value 14, and an 11-digit serial number is found in the record, the serial number is formatted with three trailing spaces. blank Default is the 9-digit serial number.

69-71 Location to post the Define the output name/address record location to post: UPCPM360 (65-character) output • The (LENGTH=3/4) 65-character TADF Payload for the Intelligent TADF Payload (IM Mail® barcode. This field allows your 31-digit Intelligent Mail® barcode) or the barcode to be converted to the 65-character TADF payload, which 65-character banner text maps each of the 65 characters to an Intelligent Mail® barcode font and human readable on the inkjet printer. information (IM® Package barcode) or • The 65-character banner text and human readable information for Intelligent Mail® Package barcodes. This only posts for MailStream Plus generated Intelligent Mail® Package barcodes. This field consists of:

• Banner Text (positions 01-30) • Human Readable Information (positions 31-65)

Note: We suggest that you contact your inkjet printer manufacturer for instructions on printing Intelligent Mail® barcode fonts.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 143 Parameter Reference

IMBPLT

Optional: Use IMBPLT to create the 21-digit Pallet Intelligent Mail® barcode number. You must use a separate barcode printing application to convert this value to an ISS code 128 21-digit barcode. The barcode is created for Pallets. This value is placed in the Mail.dat *.csm file and the MSRDPLT pallet label data file. This barcode is required by PostalOne!®.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IMBPLT is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Mailer ID Use this field (required) to specify the 6- or 9-digit UPCPM366 USPS Mailer ID. There is no default value. Use the Mailer ID format definition to define the correct format of this ID. If you specify a 6-digit Mailer ID, you must left-justify it within this field. This Mailer ID populates the Mail.dat MPA-1123 field.

18 Mailer ID Format Define the format of the USPS-assigned Mailer ID UPCPM366 (a 6-digit or 9-digit Mailer ID). This definition also changes the format of the 21-digit barcode. 6 6-digit Mailer ID 9 9-digit Mailer ID blank Default is the 9-digit Mailer ID

20-31 Serial Number Define the starting serial number of the 21-digit UPCPM366 Intelligent Mail® barcode. This number increments serially so that each Pallet is assigned a unique serial number. The last serial number is saved to the customer information file (MSETCI) depending on the selection in the "Save the Serial Number" field on this parameter. Each Mailer ID is saved independently of all other Mailer IDs. Please note these suggestions for this field:

• This field should usually be left blank, using the number from the customer information file. You may specify a value to re-run a job or to reset the customer information file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 144 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• If the Mailer ID format is 9, this number should not be greater than 9 digits. If the format is 6, then this number may contain the full 12 digits.

The possible values are:

• A user-specified value: Use the beginning serial number. Ensure that no other jobs with IMBPLT definitions are running when this is selected. If you define a value for this field, you must ensure that the value does not overlap values for other jobs. If you define this field, and if Save the Serial Number contains Y, MailStream Plus makes no attempt to keep the serial numbers unique by sharing the MSETCI file serial numbers with other currently running jobs. The ending serial number from this job is saved regardless of whether other jobs are using the MSETCI file. We strongly recommend that no other job use IMBPLT when this serial number is specified and when Save the Serial Number contains Y. • blank or zero (default): Use the serial number from the customer information file. If the customer information file does not contain a serial number, MailStream Plus starts at 1. Note: The value in this field can be left- or right-justified.

33 Save the Serial Number Define whether to save the last serial number to the UPCPM366 customer information file. Y Save the last serial number (default). N Do not save the last serial number and leave the customer information file as-is. This is useful for re-running jobs. blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 145 Parameter Reference

IMBSER

Optional: Use IMBSER (Intelligent Mail® barcode mailer starting serial number parameter) to manually serial number your mailing IDs. When used with the TRNMID keyword, IMBSER populates the Shipping Service File.

Note: You may define a maximum of 250 IMBSER parameters.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IMBSER is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Mailer ID Define the Mailer ID, left justified. Must be 6 or 9 digits UPCPSR11 long. Note: All 9-digit mailer IDs start with 9.

18-26 Starting Intelligent Mail® Define the starting Intelligent Mail® barcode serial UPCPSR11 Barcode Serial Number number for the Mailer ID, right justified. The starting serial number must be 6 or 9 digits long. If 6 digits long, the starting serial number must include leading spaces or zeroes. Note: If the Mailer ID is 6 digits long, the starting serial number must be 9 digits long. If the Mailer ID is 9 digits long, the starting serial number must be 6 digits long.

28 Intelligent Mail® Package Define the serial number size indicator for IM® Package UPCPSR11 Barcode Serial Number barcode. There is no default value. Size Indicator ® S Use the short Intelligent Mail Package barcode serial number format (7 or 10 digits long). L Use the Long Intelligent Mail® Package barcode serial number format (11 or 14 digits long).

30-43 Intelligent Mail® Package Define the starting Intelligent Mail® Package barcode UPCPSR11 Barcode Starting Serial serial number for mailer ID, right justified. Must be 7, Number 10, 11, or 14 digits long. If 7, 10, or 11 digits long, include leading spaces or zeroes.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 146 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Note: If the Mailer ID is 6 digits long, the starting serial number must be 10 or 14 digits long based on the serial number size indicator defined on this parameter. If the Mailer ID is 9 digits long, the starting serial number must be 7 or 11 digits long based on Serial Number Size Indicator defined on this parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 147 Parameter Reference

IN CTY

Note: This only applies to Periodicals mail.

The IN CTY parameter identifies the name/address records that are in-county and thus eligible for the Periodicals in-county discount. Only records matching the IN CTY criteria will get in-county discounts. Use of this parameter supersedes use of the county field on the ZIP IN parameter.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IN CTY is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Start Position Enter the location of in-county code in the Name/Address UPCRDEDT records. Note: The value of "ALL" identifies all name/address records as in-county. The rest of this parameter is then ignored.

12 Length Enter the length of the In-County code. Maximum is 9. UPCRDEDT

14-15 Comparison Type Determine how records are eligible for the in-county UPCRDEDT discounts. EQ The codes must be equal. NE The codes must not be equal.

17-25 In County Comparison Enter up to five comparison values to compare to the UPCRDEDT Values (1-5) data at the location of the in-county code. 27-35 37-45 • Duplicate comparison values are not allowed. • Comparison values are checked against the codes in 47-55 the name/address records. If EQ is selected in the "In 57-65 County If..." field and a value matches, then the record will be counted as in-county. If NE is selected and a value matches, then the record is not counted as in-county. • Blank comparison values are not checked. No further comparison values are checked after the first blank one is found on this parameter. • There is an exception for those who wish to compare against spaces. If the first value, in positions 17-25, is blank, name/address records with blank codes are

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 148 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

counted as in-county when EQ is selected, or non in-county if NE is selected. Other comparison values may be specified even if the first is blank.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 149 Parameter Reference

IP IMB

Optional: Use IP IMB to identify the MAIL360 Intelligent Mail® serial number IP address.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword IP IMB is the only acceptable entry.

8-57 Intelligent Mail® Barcode Define the Intelligent Mail® barcode Web Service domain UPCPM316 Web Service Domain name or address. Name or Address

59-63 Intelligent Mail® Barcode Define the Intelligent Mail® barcode Web Service port UPCPM316 Web Service Port Number number. Note: The port number must be right-justified with leading spaces or leading zeros.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 150 Parameter Reference

K CODE

Optional: Use K CODE to identify the location and length of the input key codes within the input name/address record to be used by the Mail.dat seed name file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword K CODE is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Key Code Location Define the location of the input key code used by the UPCPST20 Mail.dat seed name file. If the key code is not specified, or if it is blank or low-value, MailStream Plus uses the list code instead.

12-13 Key Code Length Define the location of the input key code used by the UPCPST20 Mail.dat seed name file. If the key code is not specified, or if it is blank or low-value, MailStream Plus uses the list code instead. The maximum length is 20.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 151 Parameter Reference

L CODE

Optional: Use L CODE to define the location and length of a list code in the input record, so that the program may produce results by list code.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword L CODE is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 List Code Location Define the location of the input list code. UPCPST20

12 List Code Length Define the length of the input list code field. UPCPST20

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 152 Parameter Reference

LABLN

Use LABLN to define the fields that make up each label line for the Inkjet File.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-5 Parameter Keyword LABLN is the only acceptable entry.

6 Label Line Number Define a single numeric digit that must be between 1 and LABLN has 6 6 and cannot be repeated. screens for inputting 6 LABLN lines: UPCPNA19 through UPCPNA24

8 Move Type Choose the label line format you want to use. LABLN has 6 screens for inputting V Variable label line. The line is built from the data in 6 LABLN lines: the Name/Address record, using positions and UPCPNA19 through lengths as defined by positions Location and Length UPCPNA24 fields of this parameter. The total concatenated line length cannot exceed 40 bytes. C Character label line. The line will be actual contents of the length and locations fields defined on this parameter.

10-12, 17-19, Location Define the appropriate locations for use by the label lines. LABLN has 6 24-26, 31-33, screens for inputting 38-40 6 LABLN lines: UPCPNA19 through UPCPNA24

14-15, 21-22, Length Define the appropriate lengths for use by the label lines. LABLN has 6 28-29, 35-36, screens for inputting 42-43 6 LABLN lines: UPCPNA19 through UPCPNA24

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 153 Parameter Reference

ML 360

Optional: Use ML 360 to define the configuration options for MAIL360. MAIL360 provides Intelligent Mail® barcode assignment and management capabilities. The ML 360 parameter is required when performing automatic serial number assignment (option "A" in the Serial Number Assignment field of the IMBOUT and/or IMBINB parameters).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ML 360 is the only acceptable entry.

8 Numbering Engine Define the numbering engine to use: UPCPM312 L Use the local numbering engine. R Use the remote numbering engine. The value R (remote numbering engine) is only valid for Intelligent Mail® barcodes.

10 Mailer ID Policy Define the process to use for adding mailer IDs: UPCPM312 A Add the Mailer ID. E Return an error when the Mailer ID does not exist. blank Default is A.

Note: This field is only valid when using the local numbering engine (MAIL360 Manager).

16 Intelligent Mail® Package Define the serial number format to use for Intelligent Mail® UPCPM312 Barcode Serial Number Package barcodes: Format L Use long serial number format. S Use short serial number format.

Note: There is no default value for this field. This field is required when you perform Intelligent Mail® Package barcode processing and you specify A as the Serial Number Assignment Type on the IMBOUT parameter. This field must be left blank for Intelligent Mail® barcode processing.

22 DS File Creation UPCPM312 Note: Valid for UNIX, Linux, or Windows only

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 154 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Define whether to create the local numbering engine (MAIL360 Manager) Data Set file (DS) if the DS file does not already exist: Y Create the DS file N Do not create the DS file blank Default is N.

30-49 Partition ID Define the partition ID. UPCPM312 When using the local numbering engine (MAIL360 Manager), the length of this field is 2. Define a value in from 00 through 99 or leave blank. When using the remote numbering engine (MAIL360 Client Connector), the length of this field is 20. Define any string or leave blank. blank Default is no partitioning used. Note: For a non-partitioned Mailer ID, serial numbering starts at 1. For a partitioned Mailer ID, serial numbering starts at 0 (Zero). When you use a partitioned Mailer ID, the partition number is part of the serial number.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 155 Parameter Reference

ML MIN

Optional: Use ML MIN to override the defaults governing mailing minimums.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ML MIN is the only acceptable entry.

8-12 Minimum Number of Define the minimum number of mailpieces required for UPCRDEDT Mailpieces for Carrier the carrier route portion of this mailing. Route

14-18 Minimum Presort Pieces Define the minimum number of mailpieces required for a UPCRDEDT non-carrier route mailing. Note: This field is used for both automation-compatible and non-automation-compatible presort definitions.

20-24 Minimum Weight for a Define the minimum weight of the mailpieces required for UPCRDEDT Carrier Mailing the carrier route portion of this mailing.

26-30 Minimum Weight for a Define the minimum weight of the mailpieces for the UPCRDEDT Presort Mailing non-carrier route portion of this mailing. Note: This field is used for automation-compatible and non-automation-compatible presort definitions.

32 Mark Undersized Mailings (Does not apply to presorts having only one batch.) Define UPCRDEDT as Presorted whether to mark undersized mail batches as presorted batches if the total of all non-automated batches is greater than the mailing minimum: Y Mark as presorted. N Mark as single-piece mail. blank Default is N.

Note: For the "first choice," "second choice," and "third choice" reporting definitions: You should not specify a third-choice statement without a second-choice statement. To validate these fields, MailStream Plus will interpret AXE to

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 156 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

mean AXX. If you do not report the undersized mailing on any statement, MailStream Plus considers the undersized mailing to be unqualified.

34 First Choice Statement for Define the first choice report on which the undersized UPCRDEDT Reporting Undersized mailing will appear: Mailing A Automation Report C Automation Carrier Report E Enhanced Carrier Report X Do not put undersized mailing on any statement blank Default is A

35 Second Choice Statement Define the second choice report on which the undersized UPCRDEDT for Reporting Undersized mailing will appear: Mailing A Automation Report C Automation Carrier Report (default second choice) E Enhanced Carrier Report X Do not put undersized mailing on any statement blank Default is C.

36 Third Choice Statement for Define the third choice report on which the undersized UPCRDEDT Reporting Undersized mailing will appear: Mailing A Automation Report C Automation Carrier Report E Enhanced Carrier Report (default third choice) X Do not put undersized mailing on any statement blank Default is E.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 157 Parameter Reference

ML TYP

Required. Use ML TYP to describe your mailing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ML TYP is the only acceptable entry.

8 Class of Mail Define the class of mail being processed: UPCPPD10 1 First-Class/Priority Mail P or 2 Periodicals S or 3 USPS Marketing Mail/Package Services Parcel Select Lightweight 4 Package Services

10 Mail Type Define the mailpiece you are processing: UPCPPD10 F Flats I Irregular parcels - Valid for Package Services Mail, Periodicals, and USPS Marketing Mail irregular/non-profit parcels that are tubes or rolls L Letters - For First-Class Postcards choose option L; also, use P or D as the Rate Type definition on the P ATTR parameter M Machinable parcels - Valid for Package Services Mail only P Parcels - Valid for First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail/Parcel Select only. If you set the Mail Type to P and P ATTR position 66 to Y for machinable parcels (automation machinable), you must set ALG BC position 26 to Y for machinable qualification.

12 Presort Type Define the Presort Type (as required):First-Class Mail UPCPPD10 R Regular T Priority Mail blank Default is R

Periodicals (required, no default) N News P Paper (ordinary paper or ordinary periodicals)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 158 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

USPS Marketing Mail R Regular C Customized MarketMail M Marketing parcels (USPS Marketing Mail Parcels only) L Parcel Select Light weight (Parcel Select only)

blank Default is M for USPS Marketing Mail Parcels and R for all others.

Package Services (required, no default) B Bound Printed Matter S Special (Media Mail or Library Mail) - Use the P ATTR parameter record to define whether the mailpiece is Media Mail or Library mail.

14 Optional DMM UPCPPD10 Warning: In some mailings, the sorts affected by DMM Container Sort Options Sort definitions are required and should not be turned off. Please be aware of USPS regulations before changing the defaults in these positions.

Note: Valid for First-Class, Periodicals, and USPS Marketing Mail Flats only.

Values: 1 Co-trayed/Sacked Flats (valid for First-Class, Periodicals, USPS Marketing Mail, Package Services Bound Printed Matter flats) 2 Merged Flats (Valid for Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail flats) T First-Class automation flats, tray-based (Valid for First-Class automation flats, tray-based) N No special presort (Valid for all Classes) blank Default

Defaults: 1 First-Class flats Periodicals flasts and USPS MarketingMail flats when commingling bags Periodicals flats and USPS Marketing Mail flats without carrier route 2 Periodicals flats and USPS Marketing Mail flats with carrier route N Periodicals flats and USPS Marketing Mail flats when palletizing bags

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 159 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

For all other classes of mail or type of mail

16 Optional DMM Pallet UPCPPD10 Warning: Please be aware of USPS regulations before Sort Options making selections for this setting.

Note: Valid for Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail Flats only.

Define the DMM sort option you would like to use for this pallet. 1 Merged Flats using city/state product 2 Merged bundles of flats using 5% threshold 3 Merged bundles of flats using city/state product and 5% threshold 6 Merged flats using city state product without schemes

7 Merged bundles of flats using 5% threshold without schemes 8 Merged bundles of flats using city/state product and 5% threshold without schemes F Full Merged Pallets; for Periodicals flats only N No special presort

blank Default is Pallet Sort Option 1 or F, depending on the USPS regulations for the current mailing.

18 Detached Address Define the Detached Address Label/Detached Marketing UPCPPD10 Label/Detached Label option: Marketing Label A Detached address label (DAL) Indicator B Detached marketing label (DML) blank Default is no detached address label or detached marketing label

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 160 Parameter Reference

MOVExx

Optional: Use the MOVE parameter to define the destination, length, and source of data to be moved. The MOVExx parameter only applies to the statistics function. Some considerations to keep in mind when defining the MOVExx parameter include:

1. MOVExx parameter processing is performed before other parameter functions. For example, if you MOVE the ZIP Code field, the ZIP IN parameter must point to the new location (if the original location is cleared or overwritten). 2. MOVExx parameter definitions are performed in the order that the definitions are listed in the parameter file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-4 Parameter Keyword MOVE is the only acceptable entry.

5-6 Move Identifier Define a two-character file identifier code. Use this field UPCRDEDT as a "comment" so that you can distinguish multiple MOVE parameters from one another. For example, if you are moving the ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 Code, and State elements, you could define MOVEZP, MOVEZ4, and MOVEST, respectively.

8-10 Destination for the Moved Define the position in the final area to which the data UPCRDEDT Data (target) is to be moved.

12-13 Length of the Data String Define the length of the string of data you are moving. UPCRDEDT to Move

14 or 15-17 Source of the Data to Move Define the input location of the data to copy. The UPCRDEDT following codes describe the information to copy to the target destination: nnn Input position from which the data will be moved; numeric and non-zero value. When using the nnn option, a MOVExx parameter *copies* the data from one location to another. The data is also left in the original location. A second MOVExx parameter with SPC can be used to clear the data's original location. The nnn input position can be

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 161 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

extended to the left to specify a 4-byte location. SPC Move blanks (EBCDIC, X'40'; ASCII, X'20') to the target location. X00 Move binary zeros (X'00') to the target location. ZRO Move character zeros (EBCDIC, X'F0'; ASCII X'30') to the target location.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 162 Parameter Reference

NDC PT

Optional: Use NDC PT to perform automated NDC drop shipping. NDC PT is useful for defining multiple entry NDCs for one mailing, allowing you to drop mailings at separate NDCs when this option benefits you.

This parameter comprises the following: • The NDC ID code • The NDC ZIP Code • The NDC constant • Whether this is a default entry point • Whether to apply various discount levels

Notes About Using NDC PT

• When choosing discounts such as DDU, SCF, and NDC, please verify that you meet the postal eligibility requirements as specified in the DMM. • You may define a maximum of 30 NDC PT parameters (one for each NDC and ASF, and one default) for a MailStream Plus job. • You can have more than one type of XXX PT parameter in a single MailStream Plus job, however, if you use any combination of ADC PT, NDC PT and/or SCF PT parameters, you can only have one ENT PT parameter (and it must be marked as the default in position 72). • We suggest that you use separate entry NDCs when: • You calculate a savings by transporting your mailing to multiple NDCs. • You want all recipients to receive your mailing on the same day.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword NDC PT is the only acceptable entry.

8 Automatically Qualify All Define how to qualify (check and validate) all NDCs Fields are selected on NDCs UPCPPD63 and Y Qualify all NDCs. If you specify Y in this displayed on UPCPPD61 field, you can define only one NDC PT or ENT PT to define output locations for ZIP Codes that do not qualify for NDC and ASF discounts. A Y in this field also indicates that the settings in the specific discount type

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 163 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

fields on this parameter will apply to all entry points. N Do not qualify NDCs. If you specify N in this field, you can define up to 30 NDC PT parameters, one for each NDC and ASF plus one default. blank Default is N.

9 Include Offshore ZIP Define whether to include Offshore ZIP Codes in Fields are selected on Codes in this Entry Point this entry point UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Include offshore ZIP Codes (default).

N Do not include offshore ZIP Codes.

10 Include ASFs for this Entry Define whether to include all Auxiliary Service Fields are selected on Point Facilities for this entry point: UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Include ASFs. N Do not include ASFs. blanik Default is N.

Note: This field is only valid when the Automatically Qualify All NDCs field contains a Y.

12-14 NDC Code Valid values are the 3-character NDC-ID code for Fields are selected on the NDC. See DMM labeling list L601 (for NDC) UPCPPD63 and and L602 (for ASF) and use the first 3-digits of the displayed on UPCPPD61 label to ZIP Code shown in column B.

22-26 NDC ZIP Code Define the ZIP Code of the NDC you defined on this Fields are selected on parameter. UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Note: If you define an NDC code, no value is required in this field.

28-57 NDC Constant This is an optional field. Fields are selected on UPCPPD63 and If this field is left blank, MailStream Plus fills in the displayed on UPCPPD61 field with the appropriate entry point information for each NDC, and the information will be used for the tray, bag, and/or pallet tags. If this field contains data, this data is only used when:

• The Automatically Qualify All NDCs field is N (or blank), or

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 164 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• If the Automatically Qualify All NDCs field is Y and the NDC PT parameter is the default entry point. In this case, the data will be used for the default entry point.

Otherwise, review the FROM report information sub keyword to override the origin line information.

Note: If you specified Y in position 8 to automatically qualify all NDCs, by default MailStream Plus places an N in positions 58 through 61. Also, any settings in positions 58 through 66 will apply to ALL the NDC entry points. To override this, define separate NDC PT parameters for the NDCs you are entering mail at, and select the appropriate position 58-66 values for each one.

58 ADC Discount for this Define whether to attempt ADC discounts for this Fields are selected on Entry Point entry point: UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Attempt ADC discounts. N Do not attempt ADC discounts. blank Default is N.

59 DDU Discount for this Define whether to attempt DDU discounts for this Fields are selected on Entry Point entry point: UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Attempt DDU discounts. N Do not attempt DDU discounts. blank Default is N.

DDU discounts, if selected, apply only to the ZIP Code specified on this parameter. If no ZIP Code is specified, MailStream Plus bases the DDU discounts on the facility.

60 SCF Discount for this NDC Define whether to attempt SCF discounts for this Fields are selected on NDC: UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Attempt SCF discounts. N Do not attempt SCF discounts. blank Default is N.

61 NDC Discount for this Define whether to attempt NDC discounts for this Fields are selected on NDC NDC: UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Attempt NDC discounts. N Do not attempt NDC discounts.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 165 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

X Attempt NDC discounts, applying them to mixed-level trays. Use this option carefully: in some instances, this option can split mixed-level trays, having an effect on report results. blank Default is N.

62 In-County Discount for this Define whether to attempt in-county discounts for Fields are selected on NDC this NDC: UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Attempt in-county discounts. This rule applies per Batch for the > 50% rule and < 10,000 pieces. N Do not attempt in-county discounts. X Always apply the in-county rate. Do not use the 50% rule when there are >10,000 pieces in the mailing. blank Default is Y.

63 Reserved

64 Entry Point Facility Type define the entry point facility type: Fields are selected on UPCPPD63 and A ASF displayed on UPCPPD61 B NDC C Origin SCF D DDU E Origin DDU H Transfer hub J Origin ADC K Origin NDC L Origin ASF N Non-determined O Origin (also DMU) Q Origin AMF R ADC S SCF blank Default is B if you defined an NDC code. Default is A if you defined an ASF code.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 166 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Note: To ensure that MailStream Plus correctly determines the entry facility when specifying D (DDU) fin this field, define an xx INF DRPKEY/PLTKEY parameter as well.

65 Make no-minimum For this entry point, should no-minimum Fields are selected on 5-digit/scheme containers 5-digit/scheme containers be made for DDU entry UPCPPD63 and for DDU entry USPS USPS Marketing Mail parcels? displayed on UPCPPD61 Marketing Mail parcels Y Make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. Option Y does NOT override an N in this field, nor does it override this definition for any other entry point (XXX PT) parameters. N Do not make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y.

To enable this feature, the Small 5-digit Indicator field on the ALG PS parameter must contain a Y or must be blank.

66 Make small origin Define whether to make small origin 3-digit/scheme Fields are selected on 3-digit/scheme containers containers for the current entry point: UPCPPD63 and for this entry point displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. Option Y does NOT override an N in this field, nor does it override this definition for any other entry point (XXX PT) parameters. N Do not make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y.

For Periodicals flats, this setting applies to Origin SCF containers instead of 3-digit/scheme containers. To enable this feature, the Small 5-digit Indicator field on ALG PS must contain a Y or must be blank.

70 Use the Default NDC PT Define whether to use the default NDC PT for ZIP Fields are selected on for Matching NDC ZIP Codes that match the NDC ZIP Code in you defined UPCPPD63 and Code Definition on this parameter? displayed on UPCPPD61 Y Use the default NDC PT. N Use the NDC for the ZIP (if defined). blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 167 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

72 Default Indicator Define whether this parameter is the default Fields are selected on indicator for the current mailing. UPCPPD63 and displayed on UPCPPD61 Y This parameter defines the default indicator for the current mailing. N This parameter does not define the default indicator for the current mailing. blank Default is N.

Notes About the E CODE Parameter When using the NDC PT parameter, the E CODE parameter should specify only one position for a length of six. Any other definition results in a parameter error.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 168 Parameter Reference

NDC SQ

Optional: The NDC SQ (NDC sequence) parameter, allows you to reorder the processing of mail for different NDCs. This parameter is useful if you are sending a mailing to different parts of the country and you want all the mailpieces to arrive at their destinations at the same time. This parameter comprises the NDC ID code for each NDC, and the correct sequence number, formatted as: • The first four positions of each field after the parameter keyword must contain the NDC ID code. • The fifth position must be blank. • The last two positions in the field must contain the new sequence number. • You may enter up to eight NDC codes per parameter. • The NDC SQ parameter sequences NDCs within each individual entry point, it does not combine entry points to sequence all NDCs across one mailing. • This parameter functions only for mail classes that are processed through a NDC, which are USPS Marketing Mail and Package Services.

For the NDC SQ parameter to function, the NDC sort sequence fields must be included in the sortation, either by using a pre-defined SRTFLD parameter that includes the fields, such as SRTFLD 0002, or by including 101, 201, and 301 sort fields in your SRTFLn parameters.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword NDC SQ is the only acceptable entry.

8-11, 16-19, NDC ID Define the ID of the NDC to be assigned a new UPCRDEDT 24-27, 32-35, sequence number. See NDC IDs - Destination and 40-43, 48-51, Classification Information. 56-59, 64-67

13-14, 21-22, Sequence Number Define the new sequence number to be assigned. UPCRDEDT 29-30, 37-38, 45-46, 53-54, 61-62, 69-70

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 169 Parameter Reference

NDC IDs - Destination and Classification Information

NDC Code/ Number Location NDC Code/ Number Location

SAPR 01 San Juan, PR MPMN 16 Minneapolis/St. Paul, MN

SPMA 02 Springfield, MA DEIA 17 Des Moines, IA

NENJ 03 Newark, NJ FAND 18 Fargo, ND

PHPA 04 Philadelphia, PA SISD 19 Sioux Falls, SD

BUNY 05 Buffalo, NY BIMT 20 Billings, MT

PIPA 06 Pittsburgh, PA KAKS 21 Kansas City, KS

WADC 07 Washington, DC DECO 22 Denver, CO

GRNC 08 Greensboro, NC DATX 23 Dallas, TX

CICH 09 Cincinnati, OH OKOK 24 Oklahoma City, OK

ATGA 10 Atlanta, GA SAUT 25 Salt Lake City, UT

JAFL 11 Jacksonville, FL PHAZ 26 Phoenix, AZ

METN 12 Memphis, TN ALNM 27 Albuquerque, NM

STMO 13 St. Louis, MO LOCA 28 Los Angeles, CA

DEMI 14 Detroit, MI SACA 29 San Francisco, CA

CHIL 15 Chicago, IL SEWA 30 Seattle, WA

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 170 Parameter Reference

NONSUB

Optional: Use NONSUB to identify non-subscriber name/address records. Any record not defined as a non-subscriber is counted as a subscriber. This applies to Periodicals only.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword NONSUB is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Non-Subscriber Define the location of the input non-subscriber UPCPST40 Code code in the name/address records to test. The value of ALL marks all name/address records as non-subscribers. The rest of this parameter is then ignored.

12 Length Non-Subscriber Define the length of the input non-subscriber code. UPCPST40 Code

14-15 Comparison Type Define the comparison type: UPCPST40 EQ Compare the input non-subscriber code to determine if it is equal to the comparison definition values. NE Compare the input non-subscriber code to determine if it is not equal to the comparison definition values.

17-25, 27-35, Comparison Values Define the codes to compare against the input UPCPST40 37-45, 47-55, value described in the non-subscriber 57-65 location/length definitions. Note: Duplicate comparison values are not allowed. Comparison values are checked against the codes in the name/address records. If EQ is selected in the Type of Comparison field, and a value matches, the record is counted as a nonsubscriber. If NE is selected, and a value matches, the record is counted as a subscriber. So with NE, only if the code in the name/address record doesn't match any of the comparison values, then the record will be counted as a nonsubscriber. Blank comparison values are not checked. No

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 171 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

further comparison values are checked after the first blank one is found on this parameter. There is an exception for those who wish to compare against spaces. If the first comparison value definition field is blank, then name/address records with blank codes are counted as nonsubscribers when EQ is selected, or subscribers if NE is selected. Other comparison values may be specified even if the first definition field is blank.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 172 Parameter Reference

OPT FL

Optional: Use OPT FL to create optional output files.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter keyword OPT FL is the only acceptable entry.

8 Create the NRC file (Name Define whether to create the NRC file (Name record UPCPSB03 Record Control file) control file): Y Create the NRC File. N Do not create the NRC File. blank Default is Y if any one of these conditions is true:

• The REPORT RUNSTATS parameter is included in the job. • The REPORT MAILDAT is included in the job, and either the "Produce Seed Name File," "Produce Un-Coded Parcel Address File," or "Produce the Piece Detail Record file" fields contains Y, or the "Produce the Piece Barcode Record file" contains Y, or a IMBCTL definition is included in the job. • REPORT CONTTAGS is defined for this job.

Note: The Name Record Control file is very large. It may not be to your advantage to create this file, depending upon your system memory.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 173 Parameter Reference

P ATTR

Required. Use P ATTR to associate a name/address record with a set of mailing piece characteristics.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword P ATTR is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Piece ID Location Define the location on the input name/address UPCPPA11 record of the Piece ID code. Note: For multiple P ATTR records, specify this field on the first parameter only.

12 Piece ID Length Define the length of the piece ID code on the input UPCPPA11 name/address record. Specify a value from 1-9. Note: For multiple P ATTR records, specify this field on the first parameter only.

13 PA INF Link This field links this P ATTR parameter to a PA INF UPCPPA11 parameter when the 1-byte code you specify matches the 1 byte code in the PA INF to P ATTR Link field of the PA INF parameter. Note: In most cases, this field should be left blank. This setting is used primarily for Periodicals mailings. If you specify L for position 8 of the PA INF parameter, then only position 13 is used for matching. If position 8 is blank, then position 13 AND 14-22 are used.

14-22 Piece ID Define the code that identifies this type of mailpiece. UPCPPA11 Length cannot exceed the Piece ID Length you defined on this parameter. Note: If this position is used for multiple P ATTR parameters, the P ATTR parameters must be present before the corresponding PA INF parameter(s).

24-28 Weight of 100 Pieces Define the weight, in pounds, of 100 mailpieces. UPCPPA11 Please consult the USPS web site for the current

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 174 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

maximums per mailpiece for each class and subclass of mail. This entry must be right-justified. You must use a decimal point if your value includes a less than whole number. For example, 8½ lbs would be entered as 008.5.

30-34 Thickness of 100 Pieces Define the thickness, in inches, of a stack of 100 UPCPPA11 pieces. Must be right-justified. You must use a decimal point if your value includes a less than whole number. For example, 8½ inches would be entered as 008.5. Note: For Priority Mail Cubic Pricing, provide the length in 1/4 inch increments by rounding down to the nearest 1/4 inch.

36-40 Length of 1 Piece Define the length, in inches, of a single piece of UPCPPA11 mail. Required for Priority Mail dimensional weight rate mailings. Must be right-justified. You must use a decimal point if your value includes a less than whole number. For example, 8½ inches would be entered as 008.5. Note: For Priority Mail Cubic Pricing, provide the length in 1/4 inch increments by rounding down to nearest 1/4 inch.

42-46 Height of 1 Piece Define the height, in inches, of a single piece of UPCPPA11 mail. Required for Priority Mail dimensional weight rate mailings. Must be right-justified. You must use a decimal point if your value includes a less than whole number. For example, 4½ inches would be entered as 004.5. Note: For Priority Mail Cubic Pricing, provide the length in 1/4 inch increments by rounding down to nearest 1/4 inch.

48-52 Volume of 100 Pieces UPCPPA11 Optional: Define the volume, in cubic inches, of 100 mailpieces.

Must be right-justified. You must use a decimal point if your value includes a less than whole number. For example, 182½ inches would be entered as

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 175 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

182.5. If you enter a volume in this field, length and height definitions are optional. Note: If you have already entered the dimensions for height, length, and thickness, then MailStream Plus will use the calculated volume based on what you have entered.

54-58 Percentage of Advertising Define the percentage of advertising in a Periodicals UPCPPA11 mailing. For example, if advertising comprises 15% of a mailpiece, enter 15.00 in this field. Note: The percentage of advertising must be from 0 to 100.0 percent.

60 Rate Type Define the rate types for the current piece attributes UPCPPA11 definition: C Classroom (only valid for Periodicals) D Double PostCard (only valid for First-Class) L Library (only valid for Package Services) N Non-Profit (only valid for Periodicals, USPS Marketing Mail) P Postcard (only valid for First-Class) R Regular Not Valid for First-Class Parcels (Retail for Priority Mail) S Science-of-Agriculture (only valid for Periodicals) - or - Media Mail (only valid for Package Services) U Commercial Base (Priority Mail and First-Class Parcels) V Commercial PLUS (Priority Mail) blank Default = "U" for First Class Parcels, "N" for USPS Marketing Mail Parcels that are not Marketing parcels, and "R" for all others

Note: MailStream Plus does not support postcards and letters in the same automation mailing.

To bundle postcard-sized mailpieces in all mail classes, you must use option N in the ALG LV parameter Single Bundle Tray Indicator definition.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 176 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

61 Rate Type Footnote Define one of the following rate type footnotes for UPCPPA11 the current piece attributes definition. Priority Mail Rate Footnote values: B Priority Mail balloon rate C Catalog E Priority Mail flat-rate envelope provided by the USPS G Priority regular flat-rate box J Priority large flat-rate box K Priority large flat-rate box APO/FPO L Priority legal flat-rate envelope N Non-Catalog O Priority small flat-rate box P Priority flat-rate padded envelope R Regular zone/weight based pricing U Cubic prices (Priority Commercial Plus only) V Cubic Soft-Pack prices (Priority Commercial Plus only) X Regional Rate Box A (Priority Commercial Plus and Commercial Base) Y Regional Rate Box B (Priority Commercial Plus and Commercial Base) blank Default is R for Priority Mail

Note:

USPS Marketing Mail Flats Rate Footnote values: blank Default is N for USPS Marketing Mail Flats. For all other class and types, this field defaults to blank.

Note: For Priority Mail Cubic rates, round down all mailpiece dimension definitions to the nearest 1/4 inch. No single dimension is allowed to exceed 18 inches.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 177 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

62 Parcel Surcharge First-Class Mail and USPS Marketing Mail parcels UPCPPA11 required indicator - Define whether a parcel surcharge applies: (First-Class and USPS Y The mailpiece is required to pay the Marketing Mail parcels) surcharge. N The mailpiece is not required to pay the surcharge. blank Default is N.

64 Non-Subscriber Type Define the type of non-subscriber for a Periodicals UPCPPA11 mailing: R Non-subscribers exceed the 10% allowance. U Non-subscribers are within the 10% allowance. blank Default is U.

Note: Please see the NONSUB parameter for more information on identifying non-subscriber records.

66 Automation-Compatible/ Define whether mailpieces are UPCPPA11 Machinable Piece automation-compatible: Indicator Y Mailpieces with this attribute are automation compatible, or are machinable pieces. For Package Services Machinable Parcels, Y indicates that the mailer must place a 6-digit Machinable Parcel Barcode on the mailpieces. N No. Pieces with this attribute are non-automation compatible. F FSM1000 mailpiece (for Periodicals only). X Non-automation compatible piece. No, do not assign the non-machinable surcharge. S Non-machinable Periodicals flats (for Periodicals only). blank Default is N.

Note: If you have automation-compatible pieces in your mailing, ensure that you specify a Y. Otherwise, MailStream Plus assumes the default, N, and your job will not process as automation-compatible.

Valid values for Periodicals are:

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 178 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• Letters: Y or N (default) • Flats: Y (default), F, or S • Irregular: N is the only option/default

67 Enclosure Class Define the mailing class of the Periodicals UPCPPA11 (Periodicals only) enclosure. 1 First-Class S or 3 USPS Marketing Mail blank Default is S.

The Ride-Along/Enclosure field must define an enclosure to use this field. See the Class to Print option of the REPORT USPSSTMT and REPORT SUMMARY parameters to print the First and USPS Marketing Mail statements from within Periodicals Class.

68 Ride-Along/Enclosure Define the Ride-Along or enclosure pieces. UPCPPA11 H Host piece E Enclosure/attachment piece

Note: Option E is not valid for USPS Marketing Mail.

Z Enclosure/attachment piece or Incidental for First-Class Mail Attachments USPS Marketing Mail; similar to option E, except that the Mail.dat component file is marked Z to include as part of the host piece postage. R Ride-Along piece: Leave blank the Automation Compatible/Machinable Piece Indicator and Enclosure Class fields (periodicals only) blank Default is H.

For enclosures and Ride-Along mailpieces, the identifying code in defined in the Identifier for the Current Piece ID field must match a P ATTR parameter defined for the host piece. Multiple enclosures and Ride-Along mailpieces are allowed with each host piece.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 179 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

69 Enclosure Mail Type Define the mail type of the enclosure. The Ride UPCPPA11 Along/Enclosure field must contain E to use this field/definition. L Letter F Flat C Card D Double postcard R Repositionable note attachment blank Default is the mail type specified on the ML TYP parameter.

70 Reserved

71 Simplified Address Does the current piece attribute definition apply to UPCPPA11 Indicator simplified addresses? Y Yes, this piece attribute is for simplified addresses. N No, this piece attribute is not for simplified addresses. blank Default is N.

Note: USPS regulations allow you to sort Simplified Address letter mailpieces into a MANUAL level Carrier Route tray only. This is controlled by the Attempt Manual Enhanced Carrier Qualification field on the ALG CR parameter.

72 Piece Attributes Default Is this the default piece attributes definition? UPCPPA11 Indicator Y Use these piece attributes as defaults. N Do not use these piece attributes as defaults. blank Default is N.

If you are defining one P ATTR parameter, put a Y in this field. Only one parameter may contain a Y in this field. Specify Y on a host piece: Y is not allowed on a ride-along piece or enclosure.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 180 Parameter Reference

PA INF

Optional: Use PA INF to define piece attribute information that is associated with a specific P ATTR parameter.

Note: PA INF is similar to the RP INF, BATINF, and EP INF parameters, but the subkeywords are not interchangeable. If two or more xx INF parameters apply because they match the determining criteria, the priority order in which xx INF parameters are used is PA INF, BATINF, EP INF, and RP INF.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PA INF is the only acceptable entry.

8 Link Default Define the defaults for PA INF to P ATTR links. UPCPPA14 L Use this parameter as a default for all P ATTR parameters and leave blank the PA INF to P ATTR Link field. Or, to include only certain P ATTR parameters, match PA INF/P ATTR Link fields on this parameter and the P ATTR parameter, specifying the same 1-byte value in both places. blank (Default) The link and P ATTR code must match.

Note: If you specify L for this field, then MailStream Plus uses only the PA INF to P ATTR Link field for matching. If this field is blank, then MailStream Plus uses both the PA INF to P ATTR Link and the P ATTR Code fields for matching.

13 PA INF to P ATTR Link This field links this PA INF parameter to a P ATTR UPCPPA14 parameter when the 1 byte code you specify matches the 1 byte code in this same field on the P ATTR parameter. Note: In most cases, this field should be left blank. This setting is used primarily for Periodicals mailings. If you specify L in the Link Default field, only this field is used for matching. If the Link Default field is blank, MailStream Plus

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 181 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

uses this field and the P ATTR Code field for matching.

14-22 P ATTR Code UPCPPA14 Note: This definition must match a P ATTR code (Piece ID) on a P ATTR parameter. MailStream Plus uses only the PA INF to P ATTR Link field for matching. If this field is blank, then position MailStream Plus uses both the PA INF to P ATTR Link and the P ATTR Code fields for matching. If this position is used for multiple P ATTR parameters, the P ATTR parameters must be ahead of the corresponding PA INF parameter(s) in the parameter file.

MailStream Plus ignores this field if the Link Default field of this parameter contains L.

28-33 Subkeyword Define the appropriate subkeyword. Review the Report UPCPPA14 Information Fields in chapter 2 of this guide for more information on the subkeywords used by PA INF.

35-72 Information Define text information corresponding to the information UPCPPA14 type in the Sub keyword field. You may type text here or use variables. Review the Information Variables in Chapter 2 of this guide for descriptions of the variable data for these positions. Note: If you are omitting components of a multi-part subkeyword, please insert blank spaces as place-holders in those components.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 182 Parameter Reference

PAGESZ

Optional: Use PAGESZ to define the number of lines to print on each page of the Execution Log or other reports.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PAGESZ is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Report Page Size Define the number of lines to print on each page of UPCPPX01 each report. The default is 60. The minimum number of lines per page is 25. Note: The report page size applies to all reports except postage statements. The Lines Per Page-Statement field applies to postage statements.

12 Print Translation Define whether to translate characters from lower- to UPCPPX01 upper-case before printing: Y Translate printing. N Do not translate. blank Default is N.

14-16 Execution Log Page Size Define the number of lines that will be printed on each UPCPPX01 page of the execution log. The default is 60. Note: The minimum number of lines per page is 25.

18 Print Requested Reports Define duplex printing: This field only applies to RPT UPCPPX01 for Duplex requested reports and postage statements. E Break when Entry Point changes B Break when Batch Code changes P Break when Presort Group changes

R Break when New Report begins N Default. Process reports serially (no duplex)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 183 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

20-22 Statement Page Size This field only applies to postage statements when UPCPPX01 the duplex printing option is turned on. The minimum number of lines per page is 25 and the default is 999 lines per page.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 184 Parameter Reference

PB FRC

Note: The PB FRC parameter is only valid if Palletization Plus is installed.

Optional: This parameter contains an algorithm to help determine the Bundle Force for pallets.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter keyword PB FRC is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this UPCRDEDT mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12-16 Pieces Define the numeric field indicating number of pieces to UPCRDEDT force a bundle. 6 Periodicals 10 First-Class, USPS Marketing Mail, and Package Services 15 USPS Marketing Mail flats at the 5DG and 5DS levels Defaults Defaults depend on the class of mail requested.

18-22 Weight Define the numeric field indicating the weight to force a UPCRDEDT bundle. Default is all 9s for all classes and types of mail.

36 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass (presort type): UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual)

E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 185 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

This field may contain spaces to define that values specified in the other fields will apply to all Presort Levels and/or Subclasses. These default records may appear in any order, and will be processed in the order in which they are encountered. Non-default records (where there are non-blank values in BOTH of these positions) will not be changed by subsequent default records. Only one non-default record may be present for any specific occurrence of Presort Level and Subclass.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the numeric field indicating the appropriate batch UPCRDEDT group or entry group for this parameter. Valid values are 01 through 50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

PB FRC and PB MAX Logic

The parameters are checked in the following order:

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 PB FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

2 PB MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 186 Parameter Reference

PB MAX

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus installed.

Optional: Use PB MAX to override the defaults governing the maximum size of a bundle of mail on a pallet.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PB MAX is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Associated Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for UPCRDEDT with this PB MAX Definition this mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels. You may leave blank this field (presort level) and Subclass to indicate that the values specified in the other positions apply to all presort levels and/or subclasses. Default records may appear in any order, and MailStream Plus processes these in the order in which the parameters are encountered. Non-default records (those having values in both of these positions) are not changed by subsequent default records. You may specify only one default record for any specific presort level and subclass definition.

12-16 Maximum Bundle Weight on Define the maximum weight, in pounds, of a bundle UPCRDEDT a Pallet of mail on a pallet.

18-22 Maximum Bundle Volume Define the maximum volume, in cubic inches, of a UPCRDEDT bundle of mail on a pallet.

24-28 Maximum Bundle Thickness Define the maximum thickness, in inches, of a bundle UPCRDEDT of mail on a pallet.

30-34 Maximum Pieces per Define the maximum number of pieces that may go UPCRDEDT Bundle into a single bundle of mail on a pallet.

36 Subclass (Presort Type) Define one of the following subclasses: UPCRDEDT A Automated

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 187 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

U Upgradable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the numeric field indicating the appropriate UPCRDEDT batch group or entry group for this parameter. Valid values are 01 through 50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 188 Parameter Reference

PERNAM

Use the PERNAM parameter to define the parsed personal name elements for the MAIL360™ Data Manager Mail Piece file

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PERMNAM is the only acceptable entry.

8-10, 12-13 Reserved

15-17 Prefix Location Define the location of the prefix in your input file UPCPM361 (for example, Mr., Mrs.).

19-20 Prefix Length Define the length of the prefix. The maximum UPCPM361 allowed length is 10.

22-24 First Name Location Define the location of the first name in your input UPCPM361 file.

26-27 First Name Length Define the length of the first name. The maximum UPCPM361 allowed length is 20.

29-31 Last Name Location Define the location of the last name in your input UPCPM361 file.

33-34 Last Name Length Define the length of the last name. The maximum UPCPM361 allowed length is 20.

36-38 Suffix Location Define the location of the suffix in your input file UPCPM361 (for example, ESQ.).

40-41 Suffix Length Define the length of the suffix.The maximum UPCPM361 allowed length is 10.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 189 Parameter Reference

PGMNAM

Optional: Use PGMNAM to specify the new name of a program when the original name has been changed. This record requires both the new and original program names.

Note: You cannot change the names of these programs: ESG1PIOMGR; G1MEMORY; G1PIOMGR; Driver Programs MSDR00, MSDR01; Segment Programs MSST00, MSST00A, MSST00B, MSST00C, MSST00D, MSPS00, MSMS00, MSNA00, MSNA00A, MSNA00B, MSNA00C, MSNA00D, and MSRP00; Sort Programs MSSTS1, MSMSS1, MSMSS2, MSMSS3, MSMSS4, and MSNAS1; Parameter Verification Programs MSXXVP00 and MSXXVPRP.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PGMNAM is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Original Program Name Must contain the original name of the program as delivered Does not apply from Pitney Bowes Software.

17-24 Actual Program Name Contains the changed (new) program name. Does not apply

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 190 Parameter Reference

PL FRC

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus™ installed.

Optional: Use PL FRC to override the defaults for creating a new pallet.

Note: If you are commingling pallets, use the CP FRC parameter instead of the PL FRC parameter.

To palletize as much mail as possible, MailStream Plus ignores the PL FRC and CP FRC amounts for the least fine pallet level, such as MNDC. Instead, MailStream Plus makes pallets as soon as the pallet minimums are met.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PL FRC is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for this UPCPD107 mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass (presort type): UPCPD107 A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

14-18 Force Pallet Weight Define the weight, in pounds, required to force a new UPCPD107 pallet. blank Default is the internal maximum weight.

20-24 Force Pallet Volume Define the volume, in cubic inches, required to force a UPCPD107 new pallet. Field must be left-justified and zero-filled. blank Default is the internal maximum volume.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 191 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

26-30 Number of Containers to Define the number of containers required to force a new UPCPD107 Force a Pallet pallet. This field must be left-justified and zero-filled. blank Default is a maximum internal value for all mail except letter mail and flats trays. The letter mail default is 00036, the flats tray default is 00024. When determining values to specify in this field, consider USPS requirements regarding the layers of containers on a pallet. According to the USPS, six two-foot, or EMM, trays can fit on a single layer, with six stacked layers as the amount at which to force a pallet. This creates a force number of 36 two-foot trays on a pallet, which is the default for lettermail. MailStream Plus counts two one-foot trays as a single two-foot tray, creating instances where the 36-tray force amount comprises more than 36 physical trays.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this UPCPD107 parameter. Valid values are 01 through 50, and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

PL FRC, PL MAX, and PL MIN Logic

The parameters are checked in the following order.

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 PL FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you use PL FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use the PL MIN parameter.

2 PL MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 PL MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you use PL FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also use the PL MIN parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 192 Parameter Reference

For example, if you use the PL FRC parameter and you specify a weight value of 00250, you want to force pallets at 250 lbs despite other available measurements. Assume that the measurements are at their maximum internal default values in cubic inches for volume and 36 for number of trays. If MailStream Plus encounters a pallet that weighs 250 lbs or more, OR has a maximum internal volume in cubic inches, OR contains at least 18 trays, it will be considered a valid pallet. PL FRC uses "or" logic, meaning that the parameter takes effect if one or more of the conditions is met. You can use the Force (FRC) parameters to override defaults governing the weight, volume, and thickness of a grouping or container of mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 193 Parameter Reference

PL LVL

Optional: This parameter is only valid if you are licensed for Palletization Plus. The palletization level parameter, PL LVL, allows you to specify whether you want to make a pallet for each level and subtype of your sortation.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PL LVL is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort UPCRDEDT Levels for this mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass (presort type): UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

14 Pallet Creation Indicator Define whether to make a pallet at this level: UPCRDEDT Y Make a pallet at this level N Do not make a pallet at this level blank Use the Defaults described in the section following Level of Value.

32 Level of Value Define whether to make this pallet level: UPCRDEDT Y Only make this pallet level if it has value. N Always make this level.

blank Default is Y for USPS Marketing Mail Flats, BMP Flats, Periodicals Flats and Irregular mailpieces when putting

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 194 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

bundles on pallets; Default is N for all others.

Presort Level and Subclass may contain spaces to define that the values specified in the other fields apply to all Presort Levels and/or Subclasses. These default records may appear in any order, and will be acted upon in the order in which the parameters are encountered. Non-default records (ones where there are non-blank values in BOTH of these positions) will not be changed by subsequent default records. Only one non-default record may be present for any specific occurrence of Presort Level and Subclass.

Defaults

The following tables lists the "Y" defaults that apply to position 14 of the PL LVL parameter (Pallet Creation Indicator - Make a Pallet at This Level). We provide separate tables for each class of mail/subclass/presort level. Note: To change these defaults, see the table of "Presort Levels" on page 9.

Table 5: Defaults for "Pallet Creation Indicator" On the PL LVL Parameter - First Class Mail

Mail Type Subclass Defaults for Y=Yes

Letters and flats in trays (ML TYP Mail Type Automated & non-automated 5-digit, SCF, AADC, ADC, OMX, Mixed = F or L) (PL LVL Subclass = A or N) ADC.

Table 6: Defaults for "Pallet Creation Indicator" On the PL LVL Parameter - Periodicals Mail

Type Subclass Defaults for Y=Yes

Bundles on pallets (ALG PL Automated & non-automated 5-digit, Merged 5-digit scheme, 5-digit scheme carrier Palletization Type = P) (PL LVL Subclass = A or N) route, 5-digit scheme (L001, L606), Merged 5-digit, 5-digit carrier route, 3-digit, SCF, OMX, Mixed ADC, and ADC

Sacks or trays on pallets (ALG 5-digit, 5-digit carrier route, 3-digit, SCF, ADC, OMX, and PL Palletization Type = B) Mixed ADC

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 195 Parameter Reference

Table 7: Defaults for "Pallet Creation Indicator" On the PL LVL Parameter - USPS Marketing Mail

Type Subclass Defaults for Y=Yes

Letters, Flats, Irregular mailpieces - Bundles All types (PL LVL Subclass 5-digit, Merged 5-digit scheme, 5-digit on pallets (ALG PL Palletization Type = P) = A, N, U, or E) scheme carrier route, Merged 5-digit, 5-digit carrier route, 3-digit, SCF, ASF, NDC

Letters, Flats, Irregular mailpieces - Sacks 5-digit, 5-digit carrier route, 3-digit, SCF, or trays on pallets (ALG PL Palletization ASF, NDC, Mixed (Origin) NDC Type = B)

Parcels - Bundles on pallets (ALG PL Enhanced carrier route (PL 5-digit scheme carrier, 5-digit carrier route, Palletization Type = P) LVL Subclass = E) 5-digit metro scheme, 3-digit, ASF, SCF, NDC, Mixed (Origin) NDC

Parcels - Bundles on pallets (ALG PL Upgradable and 5-digit, 5-digit scheme, SCF, ASF, NDC, Palletization Type = P) non-automated (PL LVL Mixed (Origin) NDC Subclass = N or U)

Parcels - Sacks or trays on pallets (ALG PL Enhanced carrier route (PL 3-digit, SCF, ASF, NDC, Mixed (Origin) NDC Palletization Type = B) LVL Subclass = E)

Parcels - Sacks or trays on pallets (ALG PL Upgradable (PL LVL 5-digit, 5-digit scheme (L001, L606), ASF, Palletization Type = B) Subclass = U) NDC, Mixed (Origin) NDC

Parcels - Sacks or trays on pallets (ALG PL Non-automated (PL LVL 5-digit, 3-digit, SCF, ASF, NDC, Mixed Palletization Type = B) Subclass = N (Origin) NDC

Table 8: Defaults for "Pallet Creation Indicator" On the PL LVL Parameter - Package Services Mail

Type Subclass Defaults for Y=Yes

Bound Printed Matter flats - Bundles on Automated and 5-digit, Merged 5-digit scheme, 5-digit pallets (ML TYP Mail Type = F, Presort Type non-automated (PL LVL scheme carrier route, Merged 5-digit, 5-digit = B) Subclass = A or N) carrier route, 3-digit, SCF, ASF, NDC

Bound Printed Matter flats - Sacks or trays Upgradable, enhanced 5-digit, 5-digit carrier route, 3-digit, SCF, ASF, on pallets (ML TYP Mail Type = F, Presort carrier route (PL LVL NDC, Mixed (Origin) NDC Type = B) Subclass = U or E)

Bound Printed Matter - Irregular mailpieces All types (PL LVL Subclass 5-digit, 5-digit scheme (L001, L606), merged - Bundles on pallets (ML TYP Mail Type = = A, U, N, or E) 5-digit scheme (L001), Merged 5-digit, 5-digit I)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 196 Parameter Reference

scheme carrier route, 5-digit carrier route, 3-digit, SCF, ASF, NDC

Bound Printed Matter - Irregular mailpieces All types (PL LVL Subclass 5-digit, 3-digit, SCF, ASF, NDC, ORG - Sacks or trays on pallets (ML TYP Mail = A, U, N, or E) Type = I)

Media/Library - Irregular mailpieces - Sacks All types (PL LVL Subclass 5-digit, 3-digit, SCF, ASF, NDC, ORG or trays on pallets (ML TYP Presort Type = = A, U, N, or E) S)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 197 Parameter Reference

PL MAX

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus installed. If you are commingling pallets, you must use CP MAX instead of PL MAX.

Optional: Use the PL MAX parameter to override the defaults governing the maximum limits of a pallet of mail.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PL MAX is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for UPCPD107 this mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12 Presort Type Define the presort type: UPCPD107 A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

Note: If you specify values for the maximum pallet weight, pallet volume, and number of trays per pallet, these values must be at least twice the amounts specified in the corresponding fields on the PL FRC parameter.

14-18 Maximum Pallet Weight Define the maximum weight, in pounds, of a pallet of UPCPD107 mail. Default is 02130.

19-24 or Maximum Pallet Volume Define the maximum volume, in cubic inches, of a UPCPD107 20-24 pallet of mail. Range may be extended to position 19, if needed. Default is 124800 (in positions 19-24).

26-30 Maximum Pallet Containers UPCPD107 Note: If palletizing by bundle, defining a low value here could result in small pallets.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 198 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Define the maximum number of containers of mail on one pallet. The default is 00072 for letter mailings, 00048 for flats trays mailings; otherwise, this field defaults to a maximum internal value. Values entered in this field will work for sacks or trays. When determining values to specify, consider USPS requirements regarding the layers of containers on a pallet (review the USPS Quick Service Guide). While 12 layers is the maximum, EMM trays and flat trays are taller and the maximum height of a pallet requires that fewer layers be allowed for these container types.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for UPCPD107 this parameter. Valid values are 01-50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

PL FRC, PL MAX, and PL MIN Logic

The parameters are checked in the following order.

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 PL FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you define PL FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also define the PL MIN parameter.

2 PL MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect.

3 PL MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you define PL FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also define the PL MIN parameter.

For example, if you use the PL FRC parameter and you specify a "weight" value of 00250, you want to force pallets at 250 lbs despite other available measurements. Assume that the measurements are still at their maximum internal default values in cubic inches for volume and 36 for number of

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 199 Parameter Reference

trays. If MailStream Plus encounters a pallet that weighs 250 lbs or more, OR has a maximum internal volume in cubic inches, OR contains at least 18 trays, it is considered a valid pallet. PL MAX use "or" logic, meaning that the parameter takes effect if one or more of the conditions is met. You can use the Maximum (MAX) parameters to override defaults governing the weight, volume, and thickness of a grouping or container of mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 200 Parameter Reference

PL MIN

Note: This parameter is only valid if you have Palletization Plus installed. If you are commingling pallets, you must use CP MIN instead of PL MIN parameter.

Optional: Use PL MIN to override the defaults governing the minimum requirements for a pallet of mail.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PL MIN is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define one of the three-character Presort Levels for UPCPD107 this mailing. MailStream Plus cannot make pallets, bags, and trays at all of these levels. We urge you to check your Domestic Mail Manual for current/valid presort levels.

12 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass (presort type): UPCPD107 A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

14-18 Minimum Pallet Weight Define the minimum weight, in pounds, of a pallet of UPCPD107 mail. Default is 00250.

20-24 Minimum Pallet Volume Define the minimum volume, in cubic inches, of a pallet UPCPD107 of mail. Default is the minimum internal value.

26-30 Minimum Pallet Containers Define the minimum number of containers of mail that UPCPD107 may go on one pallet. Default is 00018 for letter mailings, 00024 for flats trays, and the minimum internal value in all other cases.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 201 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

When determining values to specify, consider USPS requirements regarding the layers of containers on a pallet. According to the USPS, six two-foot, or EMM, trays can fit on a single layer, with three stacked layers as the minimum. This creates a minimum of 18 two-foot trays on a pallet, which is the default for letters. Note: MailStream Plus counts two one-foot trays as a single two-foot tray, creating instances where the 18-tray minimum comprises more than 18 physical trays.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for UPCPD107 this parameter. Valid values are 01-50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

PL FRC, PL MAX, and PL MIN Logic

The parameters are checked in the order shown below.

Order Parameter Logic Description

1 PL FRC Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you define PL FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also define a PL MIN parameter.

2 PL MIN And All conditions must be true in order to take effect

3 PL MAX Or One condition must be true in order to take effect. If you define PL FRC and specify a value less than the default, you must also define a PL MIN parameter.

For example, if you use the PL FRC parameter and you specify a weight value of 00250, you want to force pallets at 250 lbs. despite other available measurements. Assume that the measurements are at their maximum internal default values in cubic inches for volume and 36 for number of trays. If MailStream Plus encounters a pallet that weighs 250 lbs. or more, OR has a maximum internal

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 202 Parameter Reference

volume in cubic inches, OR contains at least 18 trays, it will be considered a valid pallet. PL MIN uses "and" logic, meaning that the parameter takes effect when all conditions are met. You can use the Minimum (MIN) parameters to override defaults governing the weight, volume, and thickness of a grouping or container of mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 203 Parameter Reference

POSTBG

Optional: Use POSTBG to define the output/posting location of the 13-byte bag or tray information.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTBG is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the May contain the output record location to post the 13-byte UPCPNA11 Bag/Tray Destination bag or tray destination information: Information • 2-byte bag/tray level code. For more information, review Presort Levels. • 5-byte bag/tray destination ZIP Code • 1-byte bag/tray destination ZIP Code Suffix. The ZIP Code Suffix byte is used when two different destinations have the same ZIP Code. For example, SCF 028 and ADC 028 would be kept separate by using a suffix letter. The letter being used does not define any specific type of destination, it is just there to keep similar destinations unique. • 4-byte bag/tray carrier route/firm ID • 1-byte bag/tray unique indicator

12-14 Location to Post the May contain the output record location to post the 2-byte UPCPNA11 Bag/Tray NDC Sequence NDC bag/tray sequence numbers. Number This option is only available for USPS Marketing Mail and Package Services mailings.

24-26 Location to Post the May contain the output record location to post the 3-byte UPCPNA11 Bag/Tray SCF Sequence Bag/Tray SCF Sequence number. Number

48-50 Location to post the May contain the output record location to post the UPCPNA11 Container Type one-byte Container Type: H Half Tray T Letter Tray F Flat tray E EMM Tray 1 Number 1 Bag

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 204 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

2 Number 2 Bag 3 Number 3 Bag 7 Number 7 Bag

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 205 Parameter Reference

POSTBI

Optional: Use POSTBI to define the output/posting location for the 9-byte original batch code.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTBI is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the May contain the location to post the original 9-byte batch UPCPNA13 Original Batch Code code.

16-18 Location to post a numeric May contain the location to post the batch number. UPCPNA13 Batch number

19 Format of the Batch Define the format of the batch number: UPCPNA13 number D Display, 5-bytes; default for UNIX/Linux and Windows B Binary, 2-bytes; default for IBM® i

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 206 Parameter Reference

POSTBK

Optional: Use POSTBK to define print indicators placed at the beginning and/or end of pallets/containers/bundles into selected areas of the name/address files. If you define POSTBK, you must also define these parameters: • POSTBI - Location to Post the Original Batch Code • POSTCI - Location to Post the Container Number • POSTEI - Location to Post the New Entry Point Code • POSTLI - Location To Post Pallet Number • POSTPI - Location To Post The Bundle Number

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTBK is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post Pallet Break Define the location to post Pallet break marks in UPCPNA18 Marks the output name/address record.

12-13 Characters Used to Identify Define the characters to identify the start of a new UPCPNA18 New Pallet pallet.

15-16 Characters Used to Identify Define the characters to identify the end of a pallet. UPCPNA18 End of Pallet

18-20 Location to Post Container Define the location to post container break marks UPCPNA18 Break Marks on the output name/address record.

22-23 Characters Used to Identify Define the characters to identify the start of a new UPCPNA18 Start of New Container container.

25-26 Characters Used to Identify Define the characters to identify the end of a UPCPNA18 End of Container container.

28-30 Location to Post Bundle Define the location to post bundle break marks on UPCPNA18 Break Marks the output name/address record.

32-33 Characters Used to Identify Define the characters to identify the start of a new UPCPNA18 New Bundle bundle.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 207 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

35-36 Characters Used to Identify Define the characters to identify the end of bundle. UPCPNA18 End of Bundle

Posting Values

If the output is only one character in length, POSTBK posts a space in the blank position. Records that are not at the beginning or end of a pallet/container/bundle (as specified on the POSTBK parameter) will neither post nor overwrite data in those positions. You may extend location values one position to the left for four-digit posting. Character values may be any valid non-blank value. Hexadecimal and non-printable characters are acceptable but not suggested. If you define a post location, at least one character set (Start or End) must be non-blank. For records posted to the name/address output file, POSTBK posts two bytes at the specified output location, overwriting any data that may exist in the same 2-byte location. For example, if a character is in position 12 and position 13 is blank, the information posts as:

...+....1....+....2 X

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 208 Parameter Reference

POSTBL

Optional: Use the POSTBL parameter to define the output location for the 13-byte bundling information.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTBL is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location To Post The Define the output location for posting the 13-byte UPCPNA11 Bundle Destination bundle destination information: Information • 2-byte Bundle Level code. For more information, review the Presort Levels in this chapter. • 5-byte Bundle Destination ZIP Code. • 1-byte Bundle ZIP Code Suffix. The ZIP Code Suffix byte is used when two different destinations have the same ZIP Code. For example, SCF 028 and ADC 028 would be kept separate by using a suffix letter. The letter being used does not define any specific type of destination, it is just there to keep similar destinations unique. • 4-byte Bundle carrier route/firm ID. • 1-byte Bundle unique indicator (U = unique). Note: When doing a tray based presort logic, the bundle level is based on the sequence level required by the tray (Grp/Bdl Dest level as reported on REPORT USPSQUAL). Using the POSTBG 2-byte bag/tray level code value from this field may be a better choice.

12-14 Location To Post The May contain the output record location to post the UPCPNA11 Bundle NDC Sequencing 2-byte bundle NDC sequencing number. Number

24-26 Location to Post the bundle May contain the output record location to post the UPCPNA11 SCF Sequence Number 3-byte bundle SCF Sequence number.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 209 Parameter Reference

POSTCI

Optional: Use POSTCI to define the output name/address record location for the nine-byte container number, the 5-byte labeling list code, and the 24-byte container Intelligent Mail® barcode number. MailStream Plus uses this parameter to retrieve information added to records by the name/address record posting program (MSNA00).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTCI is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the May contain the location to post the 9-byte container UPCPNA13 Container Number (bag/tray) code.

12-14 Location To Post the May contain the location to post the 5-byte code. UPCPNA13 Labeling List Code

16-18 Location To Post the May contain the location to post the 24-byte container UPCPNA13 Container Intelligent Mail® Intelligent Mail® barcode number. Barcode Number

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 210 Parameter Reference

POSTEI

Optional: Use POSTEI to define the output location for the original and "change to" (new) entry point codes. MailStream Plus uses this parameter to retrieve information added to records by the name/address record posting program (MSNA00).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTEI is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA13 Original Entry Point Code 9-byte original entry point code. The "original" entry point code defines the entry point as processed by MSST00 (after applying the defaults, if applicable).

12-14 Location to Post the New Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA13 Entry Point Code new 9-byte entry point code. The "new" entry point code defines the new point for entering your mail. If the mailpiece is moved to a new entry point due to using either the EP MIN or EP ROL parameters, MailStream Plus uses the new entry point.

16-18 Location to post a numeric May contain the location to post the Entry Point number. UPCPNA13 Entry Point number

19 Format of the Entry Point Define the format of the entry point number: UPCPNA13 number D Display: 5-bytes; Default for UNIX/Linux and Windows B Binary: 2-bytes; Default for z/OS and IBM® i

21-23 Location to Post a Numeric MailStream Plus sorts the entry points in an alphanumeric UPCPNA13 Entry Point Alternate fashion. So if you have entry point A, B, and C, the order Sequence Number they are presented is A,B,C. By using the ENT SQ parameter, you can sort them C, A, B. So the alternate sequence number for C is 1, A is 2, and B is 3. Note: You can review the ENT SQ for additional information concerning Entry Point Alternate Sequence number.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 211 Parameter Reference

Original and New Entry Point Codes

If you define the EP MIN parameter, any pieces falling below the minimum quantity or weight for the original entry point, will automatically be grouped in the new entry point. If you have a name/address record whose entry point code is not found on one of the ENT PT parameters, the original entry point will not represent the field from the name/address record, but instead represent the default entry point code.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 212 Parameter Reference

POSTFM

Optional: Use POSTFM to post firm ID to the Name/Address file. If you define the POSTFM parameter, you may limit the number of output records to one per firm bundle. When this parameter is not present, MailStream Plus writes all records within each firm bundle to the output file. If you define POSTFM, you must also define the following parameters: • POSTBI - Location to Post the Original Batch Code • POSTCI - Location to Post the Container Number • POSTEI - Location to Post the New Entry Point Code • POSTLI - Location To Post Pallet Number • POSTPI - Location To Post The Bundle Number

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTFM is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to post Define the location to post the Firm ID. UPCPNA25 MailStream-generated 4-byte Firm ID

12-14 Location to post 4-digit Define the location to post the Number of copies (a 4-byte UPCPNA25 Number of Copies in field). By using this position, the final name and address this Firm file outputs one record for each firm bundle. The Location will have the all the Copies of the appropriate record.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 213 Parameter Reference

POSTGN

Optional: Use POSTGN to define the output record location for the following general indicators: • Presort group • Mailing statement type • General indicator • Sortation level • Zone discount • Carrier route discount • ZIP + 4 discount • Destination discount

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTGN is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the May contain the output location to post the presort group UPCPNA11 Presort Group indicator. The presort group indicator is a single byte containing: Indicator • X'01' - Automated presort group • X'02' - Machinable presort group • X'04' - Automated carrier presort group • X'08' - Enhanced carrier presort group • X'80' - Non-automated presort group

12-14 Location To Post May contain the output location to post the one-byte mailing UPCPNA11 The Mailing statement identifier, containing: Statement Identifier • X'20' - Single piece rate • X'00' - All others

16-18 Location to Post the May contain the output location to post the general information UPCPNA11 General Indicator indicator, containing:

• X'01' Reserved • X'02' -- on Top cap required on pallet • X'04' -- on Underweight pallet • X'08' -- on Sack under force • X'10' -- on Overflow sack • X'20' -- on 1-ft. Tray • X'40' -- on 2-ft. Tray

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 214 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

20-22 Location to Post the May contain the output location for posting the sortation level UPCPNA11 Sortation Level discount indicator, a single byte containing: Discount Indicator • X'00' Unknown sortation level • X'01' Invalid ZIP Code • X'02' Carrier sortation level • X'04' Presort sortation level • X'08' Basic sortation level

24-26 Location to Post the May contain the output location for posting the carrier route UPCPNA11 Carrier Route discount indicator, a single byte containing: Discount Indicator X'01' Saturation walk sequence X'02' High Density X'04' Line of travel sequence X'08' High Density Plus X'80' Normal carrier route

28-30 Location to Post the May contain the output location for posting the barcode discount UPCPNA11 Barcode Discount indicator, a single byte containing: Indicator • X'01' 5-digit ZIP + 4 barcoded discount • X'02' 3-digit ZIP + 4 barcoded discount • X'04' ZIP + 4 barcoded discount • X'08' Parcels 5-digit barcoded discount (used for USPS Marketing Mail machinable mailpieces and Package Services) • X'10' ADC/AADC ZIP + 4 barcoded discount • X'20' MADC/MAADC ZIP + 4 barcoded discount • X'80' No ZIP + 4 discount

32-34 Location to Post the May contain the output location for posting the 1-byte zone UPCPNA11 Zone Discount discount indicator, containing: Indicator • X'00' DDU/SCF Discount • X'01' Zone 1 • X'02' Zone 2 • X'04' Zone 3 • X'08' Zone 4 • X'10' Zone 5 • X'20' Zone 6 • X'40' Zone 7 • X'80' Zone 8 • X'90' Zone 9

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 215 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

36-38 Location to Post the May contain the output location for posting the 1-byte destination UPCPNA11 Destination Discount discount indicator, containing: Indicator • X'01' Reserved • X'02' -- on ADC discount • X'08' -- on In-county discount • X'10' -- on No destination discount • X'20' -- on NDC discount • X'04' -- on Local zone discount • X'40' -- on SCF discount • X'80' -- on DDU discount

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 216 Parameter Reference

POSTIB

Optional: Use the POSTIB parameter to define the output location for the optional indicators. This parameter includes the following indicators: • General information • Pricing tier • Zone

Data in character format for rate classification, mailing type indicator, and pricing tier appear on the POSTRC parameter.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTIB is the only acceptable entry.

12-14 Location to Post the General May contain the location in the output UPCPNA11 Information Indicators name/address record to post the general information indicator. The general indicator is a single byte containing the following values:

• X'01' - on - Pallet underweight • X'02' - on - Reserved • X'04' - on - Intra-ADC • X'08' - on - Intra-NDC • X'10' - on Intra-SCF • X'20' - on DDU • X'40' - on Local (Bundle Services rates) • X'80' - on - In-County

16-18 Location to Post the Pricing May contain the location in the output UPCPNA11 Tier Indicator name/address record to post the pricing tier code. The pricing tier is a single character containing the following values for all classes:

• X'00' - Unknown rate • X'01' - Carrier route presort • X'02' - Presort • X'04' - Residual/basic • X'08' - Invalid ZIP Code

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 217 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

20-22 Location to Post the Zone May contain the location in the output name and UPCPNA11 Indicator address record for posting a single byte character zone. The zone indicator is a single byte containing the following values:

• X'00' - Local SCF/DDU • X'01' - Zone 9 • X'02' - Zone 8 • X'04' - Zone 7 • X'08' - Zone 6 • X'10' Zone 5 • X'20' Zone 4 • X'40' Zone 3 • X'80' - Zone 2 • X'90' - Zone 1

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 218 Parameter Reference

POSTIJ

Optional: Use POSTIJ to define the output/posting location for the Inkjet File information or to define a separate output file.

Note: This parameter does not apply to the IBM i platform.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTIJ is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to post the Inkjet file This field defines the location of the Inkjet file UPCRDEDT information information. BEG Inserts 360 bytes in front of each record, after all other data has been posted, moving all of the input data and posted data over 360 bytes. The additional 360 bytes must be accounted for in the FILEDF MSNAON. IJ4 Post to optional Inkjet file MSWKIJ4 (400 byte Inkjet file) IJ6 Post to optional Inkjet file MSWKIJ6 (600 byte Inkjet file record). nnn Post the 360 bytes starting in this output record location.

Use the following parameters to get correct bundle and tray break indicators in the INKJET file:

• POSTBI - Location to Post the Original Batch Code • POSTCI - Location to Post the Container Number • POSTEI - Location to Post the New Entry Point Code • POSTLI - Location To Post Pallet Number • POSTPI - Location To Post The Bundle Number

12-14 Location of input user record Defines the location of the user record key in the UPCRDEDT key output name/address record. This information is posted in the Inkjet file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 219 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

16 Length of input user record Defines the length of the user record key; valid UPCRDEDT key entries are 1 through 8.

18 Include the OEL Should MailStream Plus include the OEL in the UPCRDEDT Inkjet file information? Y Include the OEL in the Inkjet file information. N Do not include the OEL in the Inkjet file information blank Default is Y.

Note: This parameter will post spaces for the non-USPS presorted portion of your mailing.

20 Manifest Key Line Should MailStream Plus include the manifest key UPCRDEDT line in the Inkjet information? Y Include the manifest key line in the Inkjet file information. N Do not include the manifest key line in the Inkjet file information blank Default is N.

Note: This parameter posts spaces for the non-USPS presorted portion of your mailing.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 220 Parameter Reference

POSTLB

Optional: MailStream Plus uses POSTLB to define the output/posting location of the 30-byte Optional Endorsement Line (OEL) and Automated Rate Indicator.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTLB is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the May contain the output location to which MailStream UPCPNA11 Optional Endorsement Line Plus will post the 30-byte Optional Endorsement Line. Note: This parameter posts spaces for the non-USPS presorted portion of your mailing.

12-14 Location to Post 6-byte The six-byte output location in which to post the UPCPNA11 Automation Rate/Single automated rate/single piece indicator. The possible Piece Indicator output values are: AUTO Automated presort group SNGLP Single piece rate pieces PRSRT Priority Mail and First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail letters and flats CMM USPS Marketing Mail blank/spaces None of the above

Note: This parameter posts spaces for the non-USPS presorted portion of your mailing.

16-18 Location To Post the May contain the location in the output name/address UPCPNA11 Barcode Requirement record to post the barcode requirement indicator. This Indicator field is one byte long and will be posted to name/address records as follows: R Intelligent Mail® barcode is required.

P Intelligent Mail® barcode is prohibited.

O Intelligent Mail® barcode is optional.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 221 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

20 Post Mail Type Indicator to Define the conditions for posting the following UPCPNA11 OEL indicators in the optional endorsement line, which merges the Location to Post 6-byte Automation Rate/Single Piece Indicator and Location to Post the Optional Endorsement Line fields into the Location to Post OEL field for these mail types:

• AUTO for Automated rate mail • CMM for Customized MarketMail

Specify one of the following posting options: Y Post the indicators in the optional endorsement line. N Do not post the indicators in the optional endorsement line. blank Default is Y.

22 Use the Bag Tag Contents Specify whether to use the bag tag contents line in UPCPNA11 Line place of the Optional Endorsement Line (OEL) for First-Class, Periodicals, and USPS Marketing Mail automated letters and First-Class and USPS Marketing Mail machinable letters. Use one of the following codes: M Use the OEL. B Use the bag tag contents line. blank Default is M.

24 Use Standard OEL or Indicator of whether to use the standard OEL or UPCPNA14 Optional Processing of the optional processing of the OEL for Periodicals and OEL for Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail LOT sortations. This changes USPS Marketing Mail the OEL to include the LOT sequence number and Sortations alpha directional. Note: This option affects only non-FIRM records with the following formats: Periodicals - CAR-RT LOT changes to CR-LOT nnnnA USPS Marketing Mail - ECRLOT changes to ECRLOT nnnnA. To ensure that LOT information is included in your output, ZIP IN field "Out of Sequence Processing Code" must contain X. S Use the standard OEL. O Use the optional LOT processing. blank Default is S.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 222 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Even if you are requesting the optional OEL for this job, MailStream Plus posts the standard OEL if the Line-of-Travel (LOT) information is invalid. The LOT information uses the name/address record data referenced by positions 36-38 and 40-42 on the ZIP IN parameter. Valid LOT information contains four digits for the LOT sequence number, and values A or D for the directional indicator.

If both the "Attempt Automation/Barcode Qualification" and "Attempt Machinable Qualification" fields on the ALG BC parameter contain N, then MailStream Plus will post an Optional Endorsement Line indicating "Manual Only" processing.

26-28 Location to post Tray If specified, the location contains one of the following UPCPNA11 Preparation Types mail preparation indicators: P The location contains bundled mail within the tray. L The location contains unbundled mail within the tray. S The location contains separator cards used in the tray. blank No mail preparation indicator assigned.

Note: You must turn on Tray Preparation Types (ALG PS) before you can post indicator values.

30-32 Location to Post the The starting position in the output file for posting the UPCPNA14 Priority Mail Markings Priority Mail Markings/additional First-Class Parcels markings. If defined, the specified location contains the following components (the markings) of the Priority Mail/First-Class Parcels indicator (34 bytes total).

• Priority Mail

• bytes 1-12 - Spaces/blanks or either the Commercial Plus price indicator or the Commercial Base price indicator (including the period):

• ComPlsPrice. • ComBasPrice.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 223 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• byte 13 - Space/blank • bytes 14-22 - Spaces/blanks or the Cubic pricing indicator (including space and period):

• Cubic .10 • Cubic .20 • Cubic .30 • Cubic .40 • Cubic .50

• First-Class Parcels

• bytes 1-13 - Spaces/blanks or either the Commercial Plus price indicator or the Commercial Base price indicator (including the period):

• ComPlsPrice • ComBasePrice

• bytes 14-34 - Spaces/blanks

61 Post the OEL to Auto Indicator specifying whether to post the OEL to the UPCPNA14 Presort Group Records Automated Presort group records. P Post OEL to Auto Presort group records. B Bypass all Auto Presort group records. blank Default is P.

62 Post the OEL to the Indicator specifying whether to post the OEL to the UPCPNA14 Machinable Presort Group Machinable Presort group records. Records P Post OEL to Machinable Presort group records. B Bypass all Machinable Presort group records. blank Default is P.

63 Post the OEL to the Indicator specifying whether to post the OEL to the UPCPNA14 Non-Automated Presort Non-Automated Presort group records. Group Records P Post OEL to Non-Auto Presort group records. B Bypass all Non-Auto Presort group records.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 224 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default is P.

64 Post the OEL to the Indicator specifying whether to post the OEL to the UPCPNA14 Automated Carrier Presort Automated Carrier Presort group records. Group Records P Post OEL to Automated Carrier Presort group records. B Bypass all Automated Carrier group records. blank Default is P.

65 Post the OEL to the Indicator specifying whether to post the OEL to the UPCPNA14 Enhanced Carrier Presort Enhanced Carrier Presort group records. Group Records P Post OEL to Enhanced Carrier Presort group records. B Bypass all Enhanced Carrier group records. blank Default is P.

66 Post the OEL to the Indicator specifying whether to post the OEL to the UPCPNA14 Unqualified Presort Group Unqualified Presort group records. Records P Post OEL to unqualified presort group records. B Bypass all unqualified presort group records. blank Default is B.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 225 Parameter Reference

POSTLI

Optional: Use POSTLI to define the output 9-byte pallet number, 5-byte pallet labeling list code, ® and 21-byte container Intelligent Mail barcode number.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTLI is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location To Post Pallet Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA13 Number 9-byte pallet number.

12-14 Location to Post Labeling Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA13 List Code 5-byte pallet labeling list code.

16-18 Location to Post Container Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA13 Intelligent Mail® Barcode 21-byte container Intelligent Mail® barcode number. Number

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 226 Parameter Reference

POSTMD

If you have defined the output position for the Intelligent Mail® barcode in positions 8-10 of the IMBOUT parameter, you must define positions 8-10 of the POSTMD parameter to define the location in the output name/address record for the 39-byte Mail.dat single piece information. MailStream Plus uses this information to recreate the MSWKNRC control file for input to Mail.dat. MailStream Plus posts the single-piece information into individual name/address records. Make sure the MSWKNRC file is not turned off by using the OPT FL parameter. Note: The drop site key of the USPS DropShip product specifies the specific postal facility that will accept a container.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTMD is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the Defines the location in the output name/address UPCPNA11 Mail.dat Single-Piece record to post the 39-byte Mail.dat single piece Information information. It comprises the following data:

• 1-byte presort group • 1-byte sort presort group • 2-byte rate • 1-byte zone • 1-byte barcode rate • 1-byte in-county code • 10-byte postage

Note: The format of this field is 999^9999999. Note the implied decimal point between positions 3 and 4. An entry of 0012300000 reads $1.23. This field will not post the postage for Periodicals Mail. For this class, MailStream Plus posts 0000000000.

6-byte Unique Container Number 4-byte Duplicate Delivery Point Barcode (DPB) 12-byte filler

12-14 Location to Post the Define the output location MailStream Plus uses to UPCPNA11 Sack/Tray Drop Site Key post the 9-byte USPS facility drop site key for trays and sacks.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 227 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

16-18 Location to Post the Define the output location MailStream Plus uses to UPCPNA11 Sack/Tray Drop Site ZIP post the 9-byte USPS facility drop site delivery ZIP Code Code and ZIP + 4 Code for trays and sacks.

20-22 Location to Post the Pallet Define the output location MailStream Plus uses to UPCPNA11 Drop Site Key post the 9-byte USPS facility drop site key for pallets.

24-26 Location to Post the Pallet Define the output location MailStream Plus uses to UPCPNA11 Drop Site ZIP Code post the 9-byte USPS facility drop site delivery ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Code for pallets.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 228 Parameter Reference

POSTMK

Optional: Defines the output location to which MailStream Plus will post the Manifest keyline and Manifest keyline components. Note: POSTMK is only valid if you have Manifest Reporting Plus installed. This parameter posts spaces for the non-USPS presorted portion of your mailing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTMK is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA11 Manifest Keyline 26-byte Manifest keyline information.

12-14 Location to Post the Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA11 Manifest ID 9-byte unique manifest ID numbers.

16-18 Location to Post Piece Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA11 Weight Increments 2-byte weight increments for First-Class mail only.

20-22 Location to Post the Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA11 Manifest Rate Code 6-byte rate codes for each mailpiece.

24-26 Location to Post the Piece Define the first position of the output field for posting the UPCPNA11 Postage 6-byte total postage for each mailpiece. This field will not post the correct value for Periodicals Mail. For Periodicals Mail, MailStream Plus posts the value 0.000.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 229 Parameter Reference

POSTMR

Optional: Use the POSTMR parameter to define the output file location for the Manifest Rate code, which is required for Manifest Reporting Plus. Note: This parameter will post spaces for the non-USPS presorted portion of your mailing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTMR is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Manifest Rate Code Location to post the 6-character Manifest rate code in the UPCPNA11 Location name/address file. The codes follow these formats: "SP" single piece First-Class Automation 5-digit "AV" "AT" Automation 3-digit "AB" Automation AADC letters, automation ADC flats "MB" Automation mixed AADC letters, automation mixed ADC flats "FP" Presorted machinable letters "NP" Presorted non-machinable letters and presorted non-automation flats Automation Automation 3-digit 5-digit "AT" "AB" Automation AADC letters, automation ADC flats "MB" Automation mixed AADC letters, automation mixed ADC flats "MA" Machinable AADC letters "MM" Machinable mixed ADC "NV" Non-machinable 5-digit "NT" Non-machinable 3-digit "NA" Non-machinable ADC "NM" Non-machinable mixed ADC

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 230 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

"FV" Non-automation 5-digit flats "FT" Non-automation 3-digit flats "FA" Non-automation ADC flats "FB" Non-automation mixed ADC flats "EB" Enhanced carrier, LOT

"EH" Enhanced carrier, high density "EP" Enhanced carrier route high density plus "ES" Enhanced carrier, saturation WS "EI" Basic carrier route bundles/pallet

• MailStream Plus adds a P to price codes listed above for USPS Marketing Mail pieces claimed at the piece/pound price.

Example: USPS Marketing Mail non-machinable 3-digit pieces that do not pay the piece per pound price would have a manifest rate code of "NT." A USPS Marketing Mail non-machinable 3-digit piece that does pay the piece/pound price would have a manifest rate code of "NTP."

• For destination discount USPS Marketing Mail, one of the following values will be appended to the manifest rate code:

• "/DB" - Destination discount NDC • "/DS" - Destination discount, SCF • "/DD" - Destination discount, DDU

Example: A USPS Marketing Mail Non-machinable 3-digit piece with no destination discount has a manifest rate code of "NT", while a USPS Marketing Mail non-machinable 3-digit piece eligible for an SCF destination discount has a manifest rate code of "NT/DS".

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 231 Parameter Reference

POSTNS

Optional: The POSTNS parameter defines where to post the North/South sequence information in the Name/Address file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTNS is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to post the Define the location to post the 9-byte North/South UPCPNA25 North/South Sequence sequence number. Number

12 Number Up Printing to This field is used to calculate the North/South sequence UPCPNA25 calculate North/South number. Valid values are between 1-5. There is no Sequence Number default.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 232 Parameter Reference

POSTPI

Optional: Use POSTPI to define the output bundle number and 5-byte labeling list code.Bundle numbers are unique within containers, and are assigned as follows: • The bundle number is 0 if the container is not bundled. • The bundle number is 1 through n for each bundle within a container. • Bundle numbers are unique within a container.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTPI is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location To Post The Define the output location to which MailStream Plus will UPCPNA13 Bundle Number post the 9-byte bundle number.

12-14 Location to Post the Define the output location to which MailStream Plus will UPCPNA13 Labeling List Code post the 5-byte labeling list code.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 233 Parameter Reference

POSTPL

Note: This parameter is only valid if Palletization Plus is installed.

Optional: The POSTPL parameter defines the output name/address record location in which to post pallet information. This parameter posts the following: • Pallet destination information • Pallet sequencing number

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTPL is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location To Post the Pallet May contain the output location in which to post the UPCPNA11 Destination Information 13-byte pallet destination information. The Pallet Destination Information comprises the following:

• 2-byte Pallet Level.field For more information, see Presort Levels. • 5-byte Pallet Destination ZIP Code • 1-byte Pallet ZIP Code Suffix. The ZIP Code Suffix byte is used when two different destinations have the same ZIP Code. For example, SCF 028 and ADC 028 would be kept separate by using a suffix letter. The letter being used does not define any specific type of destination, it is just there to keep similar destinations unique. • 4-byte Pallet carrier route • 1-byte Pallet unique indicator (U = unique).

12-14 Location To Post the Pallet May contain the output location to which MailStream UPCPNA11 NDC Sequencing Number Plus will post the pallet NDC sequencing number. The output field will be 2 bytes.

24-26 Location to Post the Pallet May contain the output record location to post the UPCPNA11 SCF Sequence Number 3-byte Pallet SCF Sequence number.

40-42 Location to Post 1-byte Possible output values: UPCPNA11 Protected Pallet Indicator P MailStream Plus is protecting this pallet using reverse presort logic.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 234 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank MailStream Plus made this pallet at the finest level.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 235 Parameter Reference

POSTRC

Optional: Use POSTRC to define where in the output name/address record to post rate classification information, presort group information, and discount eligibility information. This parameter includes the following indicators in character format: • Rate classification information • Pricing tier • Presort group • Carrier route discount • ZIP + 4 discount indicator • Destination discount indicator

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTRC is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the May contain the output location in which to post the 8-byte rate UPCPNA11 Rate Classification classification indicator, comprising the following data:

• 2-byte Manifesting Rate Code • 1-byte Zone • 1-byte B if Intra-NDC or A if Intra-ADC (for Periodicals); blank if neither • 1-byte L if Local-Zone; blank if not Local-Zone • 1-byte S if Intra-SCF; blank if not Intra-SCF • 1-byte C if In-County; blank if not In-County • 1-byte N if Non-Subscriber; S if Subscriber

16-18 Location to Post the May contain the output location in which to post one of the following UPCPNA11 Pricing Tier Indicator 1-byte pricing tier indicators: C Carrier route P Presort R Residual

20-22 Location to Post the May contain the output location in which to post the 1-byte presort UPCPNA11 Presort Group Indicator group indicator. If this field is not blank, it will contain one of the following indicators: A Automated

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 236 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

U Machinable C Automated Carrier Presort Group N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

24-26 Location to Post the May contain the output location in which to post one of the following UPCPNA11 Carrier Route Discount 1-byte carrier route discount indicators: Indicator S Saturation walk-sequence 1 High Density 2 High Density Plus C Regular carrier route L Line of Travel Sequence

Note: You must define this field if you have defined the SRVFRQ parameter in your job.

28-30 Location to Post the May contain the output location in which to post one of the following UPCPNA11 Barcode Discount 1-byte barcode discount indicators: Indicator 5 5-digit barcoded discount 3 3-digit barcoded discount A ADC/AADC barcoded discount M MADC/MAADC barcoded discount B Basic barcoded discount P Parcels 5-digit barcode discount (used for USPS Marketing Mail machinable mailpieces and Package Services) N Non-barcoded discount (including all carrier route coded mail)

If MailStream Plus returns a P when posting a value in the "Location to Post the Pricing Tier Indicator" field, an indicator is also posted in this field to show the presort level: a 3-digit barcode, 5-digit barcode, basic barcode, or non-barcoded. If MailStream Plus returns an R in the Location to Post the Pricing Tier Indicator" field, an indicator is also posted in this field to show the residual sort level: basic or non-barcoded.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 237 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

32-34 Location to Post the May contain the output location in which to post one of the following UPCPNA11 Destination Discount 1-byte destination discount indicators: Indicator L Local zone discount C In-county discount B NDC discount A ADC discount S SCF discount D DDU discount blank No destination discount was applied.

36-38 Location to Post the Sort May contain the output location in which to post one of the following UPCPNA11 Presort Group Indicator 1-byte Sort Presort Group Indicators: A Commingled pallet pieces B Automation palletized pieces C Machinable palletized pieces/marketing parcels over 6 oz. palletized D Non-automation palletized pieces E Irregular palletized pieces/marketing parcels under 6 oz. palletized F Automation Carrier palletized pieces G Enhanced Carrier palletized pieces H Merged non-palletized pieces

I Automation non-palletized pieces J Machinable non-palletized pieces/marketing parcels over 6 oz. non-palletized K Non-automation non-palletized pieces L Irregular non-palletized pieces/marketing parcels under 6oz non-palletized M Auto Carrier non-palletized pieces N Enhanced Carrier Route non-palletized pieces

O Periodicals Carrier Route V DPBC machine sort (DuoSort) W Non-DPBC machine sort (DuoSort)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 238 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

X Unqualified single-piece mailpieces Z Invalid ZIP Code mailpieces

40-42 Location to Post the Location to post the enhanced carrier sub-discount (1-byte). UPCPNA11 Enhanced Sub-Discount A Auto M Machinable N Manual T Auto tray-based

44-46 Location to Post the Location to post the piece weight increment. This does not apply to UPCPNA11 Piece Weight Increment USPS Marketing Mail bulk rate (2 bytes).

48-50 Location to Post the Location to post the piece total postage (6 bytes). UPCPNA11 Piece Total Postage Note: The format for the piece total postage is nn.nnn. However, If the piece total postage is less than $10.00, the first byte of the value posted is a space. For example, if the piece total postage is 23.4 cents, MailStream Plus posts the value "0.234" in a right-justified format with a leading space.

This field will not post the correct value for Periodicals Mail. For Periodicals Mail, MailStream Plus posts "0.000".

52-54 Location to Post the Location to post the sort flag, as defined by the DS CTL fields UPCPNA11 Machine/USPS Sort (DuoSort), Highest Rate to Retain in USPS Sort (Discount = DNDC) Flag field (1 byte). MailStream Plus stores one of the following flag codes in the output location you define: M Machine (external) sort U USPS sort

60-62 Location to Post the Full Location to post the Full Service Eligibility flag (1 byte). MailStream UPCPNA11 Service Eligibility Flag Plus stores one of the following flag codes in the output location you define: Y Piece is eligible for Full Service blank Piece is not eligible for Full Service

Note: This field is required when IMBCTL is defined, regardless of your output requirements.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 239 Parameter Reference

Sample Postings - POSTRC Parameter

For a batch of presorted barcoded lettermail, you will see a P in the location designated by the value in position 16-18, and a 3 or 5 in position 28-30 (to define a 3- or 5-digit presort). For presorted automated or non-automated lettermail, you will see a P in position 16-18 and a B or an N in position 28-30. For a batch of residual barcoded letters, you will see an R in position 16-18 and a B in position 28-30. For residual ZIP + 4 or non-ZIP + 4 lettermail, you will see an R in position 16-18 and an N in position 28-30. For barcoded flats, you will see a P or R in position 16-18 for presorted or residual, and a B in position 28-30. For non-ZIP + 4 flats, you will see a P or R in position 16-18, and an N in position 28-30.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 240 Parameter Reference

POSTRI

Optional: Use POSTRI to define the location for posting the individual record number (piece number) and final sort sequence number. MailStream Plus uses this parameter to retrieve information added to records by the name/address record posting program (MSNA00).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTRI is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post Input May contain the location into which to post the 9-byte UPCPNA13 Sequence Number input sequence number of the records, as determined by the statistics program.

12-14 Location to Post Final Sort May contain the location into which to post the 9-byte UPCPNA13 Sequence Number final sequence number.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 241 Parameter Reference

POSTZN

Optional: Use POSTZN to define the output zone information. You can specify exactly where the mail is to be delivered within a specific USPS Postal Zone, if you designate zones for your mailing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword POSTZN is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location to Post the May contain the output location to which MailStream Plus will post UPCPNA11 Zone Character one of the following 1-byte character zone values: D Intra-DDU - Mail dropped at any post office for delivery to addresses within the same DDU. L Local zone - Mail dropped at any post office for delivery to addresses within the delivery area of that post office. S Intra-zone - Mail dropped at any post office within the same zone to which it is being delivered. 1 Zone 1 - Mail going between two post offices in the same 3-digit ZIP Code area. 2 Zone 2 - Mail whose delivery area falls just outside of zone 1, within a 150-mile radius. 3 Zone 3 - Mail whose delivery area falls outside of zone 2, within a 300-mile radius. 4 Zone 4 - Mail whose delivery area falls outside of zone 3, within a 600-mile radius. 5 Zone 5 - Mail whose delivery area falls outside of zone 4, within a 1000-mile radius. 6 Zone 6 - Mail whose delivery area falls outside of zone 5, within a 1400-mile radius. 7 Zone 7 - Mail whose delivery area falls outside of zone 6, within a 1800-mile radius. 8 Zone 8 - Mail whose delivery area falls outside of zone 7. 9 Zone 9 - Mail whose delivery area falls outside of zone 8.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 242 Parameter Reference

PRDDTA

Optional: Use PRDDTA to define the shipped article information that populates the Shipping Services file (*.SSF). This parameter is also required when generating the Mail.dat *.SFR file. Note: Fields defined on this parameter are assumed to have 2 decimals. For example, a field with a length of 3 is interpreted as 9.99.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword PRDDTA is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Value of Article Define the starting location in the name/address input UPCPM363 Shipped file for the value of the article shipped.

12 Length of the Value of Define the length for the value of the article shipped. UPCPM363 Article Shipped The maximum length allowed is 7.

14-16 Location of COD Amount Define the starting location in the name/address input UPCPM363 Due file for the COD amount due for the article shipped.

18 Length of the COD Amount Define the length for the COD amount due for the UPCPM363 Due article shipped. The maximum length allowed is 6.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 243 Parameter Reference

QP AMT

Optional: Use QP AMT to change the qualifying amounts for bundles on pallets defined for a particular presort level.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword QP AMT is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Define the presort level of the current mailing. See the UPCRDEDT list of current Presort Levels

12-40 Reserved UPCRDEDT

42-46 Bundle Pieces for Bundles Define the number of pieces to qualify a bundle at UPCRDEDT on Pallets selected level.

48-52 Bundle Weight for Bundles Define the weight to qualify a bundle at selected level. UPCRDEDT on Pallets

54-58 Bundle Volume for Bundles Define the volume to qualify a bundle at selected level. UPCRDEDT on Pallets

60 Subclass (Presort Type) Define the subclass (presort type): UPCRDEDT A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

Note: The presort level and subclass (this field) may contain blank spaces to define that the values specified in the other positions should be applied to all presort levels and/or subclasses. These default records may appear in any order, but will be applied in the order in which they are processed by MailStream Plus.

Non-default records (those records with non-blank values in both positions) will not be changed by subsequent default records.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 244 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

You may specify only one non-default record for any specific presort level/subclass definition.

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Group Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for this UPCRDEDT parameter. Valid values are 01through 50, and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 245 Parameter Reference

QU AMT

Optional: Use QU AMT to change the qualifying amounts for non-pallet bundles and pallet or non-pallet containers defined for a particular level. See the QP AMT to define bundles on pallets. The defaults used by MailStream Plus for this parameter are based on USPS regulations found in the Domestic Mail Manual. The QU AMT parameter sets the qualifying amounts for bundles and containers. In some cases, USPS regulations require making containers for reasons other than those controlled by QU AMT. In these situations, the BG MIN and BG FRC parameters can be used to control the minimum container size.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword QU AMT is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Presort Level Code indicating the level of the current mailing. See UPCPPQ11 Presort Levels for more information.

12-16 Container Bundles Define the number of bundles to qualify a container at UPCPPQ11 selected level.

18-22 Container Pieces Define the number of pieces to qualify a container at UPCPPQ11 selected level.

24-28 Container Weight Define the weight to qualify a container at selected level. UPCPPQ11

30-34 Container Volume Define the volume to qualify a container at selected UPCPPQ11 level.

36-40 Container Thickness Define the thickness to qualify a container at selected UPCPPQ11 level.

42-46 Bundle Pieces Define the number of pieces to qualify a bundle at UPCPPQ11 selected level.

48-52 Bundle Weight Define the weight to qualify a bundle at selected level. UPCPPQ11

54-58 Bundle Volume Define the volume to qualify a bundle at selected level. UPCPPQ11

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 246 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

60 Subclass (Presort Define the subclass (presort type): UPCPPQ11 Type) A Automated U Machinable N Non-Automated (manual) E Enhanced Carrier blank Default - all subclasses

71-72 BATCHP/ENTRYP Define the appropriate batch group or entry group for UPCPPQ11 Group this parameter. Valid values are 01-50 and spaces. Note: When this field is left blank and BATCHP or ENTRYP parameters are present in the job, this parameter (or the MailStream Plus default values) will be used for all batches or entry groups that do not have an associated BATCHP or ENTRYP parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 247 Parameter Reference

R FLAG

Optional: The R FLAG parameter identifies the residential name/address records. Every record not defined as residential is counted as non-residential.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword R FLAG is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Input Define the location of the residential code in the UPCRDEDT Residential Code name/address records. Specify "ALL" to define all name/address records are residential. If you specify "ALL", MailStream Plus ignores the remaining definitions on this parameter.

12-12 Length of Input Residential Define the length of the residential code (Max = 9). UPCRDEDT Code

14-15 Type of Comparison Define the type of comparison to be performed: UPCRDEDT EQ The codes must be equal. NE The codes must not be equal.

17-25 27-35 Comparison Values Define the comparison values. The specified comparison UPCRDEDT 37- 45 47-55 values are literal values that MailStream Plus compares 57-65 to the data at the location of the residential code. Duplicate comparison values are not allowed. Comparison values are checked against the codes in the Name/Address records. When the first one matches, if "EQ" is selected in the Type of Comparison field, the record is counted as residential. If "NE" is selected, the record is counted as non-residential. Blank comparison values are not checked. No further comparison values are checked after the first blank value is found on this parameter. An exception is allowed to compare against spaces. If the first Comparison Value field is blank, the Name/Address records with blank codes are counted as:

• Residential when "EQ" is the comparison value • Non-residential if "NE" is the comparison value

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 248 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Other comparison values may be specified even if the first comparison value is blank.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 249 Parameter Reference

RECPNT

Optional. Use RECPNT to define recipient information for the Shipping Services File (SSF).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword RECPNT is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Recipient Email Define the starting position in the name/address input UPCPM363 Address file for the recipient's e-mail address.

12-13 Length of Recipient Email Define the length for the recipient's email address. UPCPM363 Address The maximum length allowed is 64 characters.

15-17 Location of SMS/Text Define the starting position in the name/address input UPCPM363 Address file for the SMS address/phone number.

19-20 Length of the SMS/Text Define the length for the SMS address/phone number UPCPM363 Address (phone number at which recipient receives text messages). The maximum length allowed is 64 characters.

22-24 Location of Customer Define the starting position in the name/address input UPCPM363 Reference Number file for the customer reference number (customer's reference number used for customer internal identification purposes).

26-27 Length of Customer Define the length for the customer reference number. UPCPM363 Reference Number The maximum length allowed is 10 characters.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 250 Parameter Reference

RENMBR

Optional: Use RENMBR to override the default to specify pallet and bag/tray numbers. This line may be used to provide a starting pallet or bag/tray number. The starting number will be the number defined on this line plus 1. This parameter does not affect the bundle number when putting bundles on pallets. Bundle numbers always restart at 1 on each pallet.

If you do not define a RENMBR parameter for your job, and you include the DFWORK parameter in your job, the RENMBR parameter defaults are: • Renumbering Technique = SEU • Starting Pallet Number = 10001 • Starting bag/tray Number = 1

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword RENMBR is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Renumbering Technique Define the pallet and bag renumbering method: UPCRDEDT EPT Reset pallet numbers to Starting Pallet Number for each new entry point. Also reset bag/tray numbers to Starting Bag/Tray Number for containers that are not on pallets. EPU Same as EPT, except do not reset bag/tray numbers for each pallet when palletizing. BAT Reset pallet numbers to Starting Pallet Number for each new batch. Also reset bag/tray numbers to Starting Bag/Tray Number for containers that are not on pallets. BAU Same as BAT except do not reset bag/tray numbers for each pallet when palletizing. SER Set only first pallet number to Starting Pallet Number. Number pallets serially for the entire job. Also reset bag/tray numbers to starting bag/tray number for containers that are not on pallets. SEU Same as SER, but do not reset bag/tray numbers for each pallet when palletizing.

Note: Mail.dat does not require the EPU, BAU, or SEU options.

blank blank Default is SER.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 251 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

12-20 Starting Pallet Number Define the starting value for your first pallet. The value must be right UPCRDEDT justified. Leading zeroes are not required. Zero (0) is not a valid starting number, and causes the first pallet to be assigned the number 1. Default is 1.

22-30 Starting Bag/Tray Define the starting value for your first bag/tray. The value must be UPCRDEDT Number right justified. Leading zeroes are not required. Zero (0) is not a valid starting number, and causes the first bag/tray to be assigned the number 1. Default is 1.

42 Keep package numbers Define the numbering method for packages when starting new UPCRDEDT unique? containers: Y Use unique package numbers across all containers (sacks and/or trays and/or pallets). N Reset package number to 1 for each new container. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 252 Parameter Reference

REPORT

Required for all reports. Use REPORT to specify the characteristics and control the printing of MailStream Plus reports. You must include a REPORT parameter for each report you are printing. All REPORT parameters contain the report name.

About MailStream Plus Reports

Note: Because the number of reports that MailStream Plus offers is so great and because the report content varies so widely, we show only a few samples in this chapter. These samples will give you a general overview of the format and content of MailStream Plus reports.

The MailStream Plus reporting function is quite extensive and allows you to control the content, look, and formatting for each report you print. For each of these reports, you can specify the number of copies to print, which presorting levels to include, and other report-specific options.

Required Reports There are only two reports that cannot be "switched off" because they are either required by MailStream Plus Processing or by the USPS in order to accept your mailings: the Execution Log and the main report. • The Execution Log (MSRPXLG) shows general job processing statistics, including start and completion times, the number of records processed, and several other items. • The MailStream Plus Report (MSRPRPT) and the parameter listing include control totals for each of the functions and interpretation of the parameter records. • USPS-Required Postage Statements identify mail that qualifies for carrier route, automated, and non-automated presorts. • The USPS Standardized Documentation includes the standardized documentation required by the USPS for your sortation. This report can be switched off. • The USPS Carrier Walk-Sequence Report shows carrier walk-sequence discount justification, providing additional proof of a valid mailing. This report can be switched off.

Formatting Reports

MailStream Plus parameters allow you to setup your report content, including: • Headers - UHDxx and HEADER parameters • Footers - UFTxx parameter

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 253 Parameter Reference

• Number of lines per page - PAGESZ parameter

Defining Report Headers MailStream Plus prints the header (HEADER parameter) you define at the top of every page of each report, including: • Line number on which to print the text • Side of the line on which to print the text • Heading text to print on all reports The UHDxx parameter allows you to define additional text will be printed at the top of every page of each report. You may specify up to four separate header lines, and you may define the side of the line on which your text will appear.

Defining Report Footers You may specify up to four footer lines for your reports. MailStream Plus prints the footer you define at the bottom of every page of each report. You can define the: • Line number on which to print the text • Side of the line on which to print the text • Actual text to be printed To define report footers with parameter records, use the UFTxx parameter record. You may specify up to four separate footer lines, and you may define the side of the line on which your text will appear.

Defining the Number of Lines Per Report Page You may specify the number of lines to print on each page of the Execution Log and on the other MailStream Plus reports, and you may also choose to insert page breaks by batch code, and so on. The minimum number of lines per report page is 25. The default number of lines is 60. To define the number of lines per page with parameter records, use the PAGESZ parameter record. PAGESZ allows you to define the following. • The number of lines to print on each page of every requested report • Whether or not characters should be translated from lower- to upper-case before printing • The number of lines to print on each page of the Execution Log • How to set up duplex printing (by inserting breaks).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 254 Parameter Reference

Optional Reports

Report Name Report Title Description

AUDITTRL Mail Content Audit Trail Used by volume mailers and mail shops for all classes of mail - Prints Report details at various levels: pallet, bag/tray, bundle, detail. If needed, you can print a new page for each pallet in your mailing

BAGTAGS Bag Tags Report Used by volume mailers, mail shops, and the USPS with a utility to generate barcoded tray tags; For all classes of mail - Generates non-barcoded tags for non-automation compatible mailings; also generates the input to the Tray Tag Option, which generates barcoded, automation-compatible tags that the USPS requires for automation-compatible sacked mail. Note: Use the REPORT CONTAGS parameter instead of REPORT BAGTAGS when possible.

CONTTAGS Container Tags Report Used by volume mailers, mail shops, and the USPS for all classes of mail; Generates the barcoded information file(s) that can be used to produce the barcoded tray labels.

CRRTWALK Carrier Route Walk Used by the USPS; Generates required Carrier Route Walk Sequence Sequence Report Justification Report for Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail Walk-Sequenced mailings.

DETAIL Detail Statistics Report Used by mail shops, and anyone requiring a paper trail, for all classes of mail; Prints details at various levels: entry point, batch, pallet, bag/tray, and bundle detail. If needed, you can print a new page for each pallet in your mailing. Used for all classes of mail.

DUO FILE DuoSort Creates output files containing the barcoded, and the non-barcoded, machine-presorted machine-presorted (non-USPS presort) mail. DuoSort is a separately (non-USPS presort) mail licensed product. output files

DUO TRAN DuoSort Transmit Creates a report to give to your workshare facility processor, of the Report machine-presorted (non-USPS presort) mail; DuoSort is a separately licensed product.

FACESLIP Facing Slips Report Used by volume mailers and the USPS to generate facing slips used on bundles of mail.

MAILDAT Mail.dat Files and Used by volume mailers, the USPS, and anyone requiring a paper Summary Report trail, for all classes of mail; Generates the Mail.dat files and produces a one-page summary report. Details items entering the USPS.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 255 Parameter Reference

Report Name Report Title Description

MANIFEST Manifest Report Used by the USPS to produce a manifest report for your mailing. Manifest Reporting Plus is a separately licensed product from Pitney Bowes.

PALSUMM Palletization Summary For palletized mailings only - Used by mail shops to produce a Report summary of the palletized portion of your mailing, broken down by pallet, bag/tray, or Piece-ID. Palletization Plus is a separately licensed product from Pitney Bowes.

PALTAGS Pallet Tags Report Used by mail shops and the USPS; for palletized mailings only - Can generate the data file which can be brought into a Pallet Tag printing program and/or can generate the older non-IM barcoded text USPS pallet tags. Palletization Plus is a separately licensed product from Pitney Bowes.

PRESVFY Presort Verification Used by mail shops and former Mailer's Choice users - Provides Report listing container destination information for each container, showing the tray, sack, or pallet label for that container. This report is especially helpful to mailers who use pre-ordered tray tags from the USPS rather than printing their own custom tags.

RUNSTATS MailStream Plus Used by mail shops and anyone requiring a paper trail - Contains Statistical Report information broken down by entry point, batch code, piece ID, list code, and/or key code.

SUMMARY USPS Postage Used by mail shops, and anyone requiring a paper trail - Generates Statements Summary a summary of information on the USPS Statement of Mailing for all classes of mail.

TRAYTAGS Tray Tags Report Used by mail shops and the USPS (when used with a utility to generate barcoded tray tags) for all classes of mail - Generates non-barcoded tags for non-automation compatible mailings. Also generates the input to the Tray Tag Option, which generates barcoded, automation-compatible tags according to USPS standards for automation-compatible trayed mail. Note: When possible, use the REPORT CONTAGS parameter instead of REPORT TRAYTAGS.

USPSBNDL Periodicals Mail Bundle Used by Periodicals mailers and the USPS, for Periodicals Mail, only Report - Provides an accounting of all bundles in a mailing and shows the USPS charges for Outside County processing.

USPSCONT Periodicals Mail Used by Periodicals mailers and the USPS, for Periodicals Mail, only Container Report - Provides an accounting of all containers (sacks, trays, and pallets) and provides information to the USPS to show charges for Outside County processing.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 256 Parameter Reference

Report Name Report Title Description

USPSQUAL USPS Standardized Used by the USPS for all classes of mail - generates the USPS Documentation standardized documentation, which shows how the mail is prepared in containers and the rate codes for the mail.

USPSSTMT USPS Postage Used by the USPS for all classes of mail - generates the postage Statements Report statements required for your mailing: USPS forms 3600, 3541, 3602, and 3605.

ZONESUMM Zone Summary Report Used by the USPS for all classes of mail - For Periodicals and Package Services mailings; Generates a summary of your mailing, organized by USPS zone 3-digit ZIP Code.

ZSDETAIL ZIP Code Sequence Used by any mailer that needs an audit trail for mailings; for all classes Detail Report of mail - Generates a summary of your mailing, organized by 5-digit ZIP Code sequence.

Note: Unless noted otherwise, MailStream Plus assigns the report to file MSRPRPT for z/OS, and to *.rpt for Windows and Unix.

Position Field Name Description

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name Define the name of the report you wish to print.

Note: The information contained in positions 17-28 is identical on all REPORT parameters except where otherwise noted. Therefore, this information is not repeated for each parameter description. Positions 19-24 apply to presort groups only. Positions 25-28 apply to the rate categories. If you are commingling and wish to see only certain rate categories you should use positions 25-28 and not positions 19-24. Also, you must select at least one of each to print

17 Number of Copies Enter a value, 1 through 9, defining the number of copies of this report to print. Default is 1. Note: On z/OS platforms, when writing multiple copies to a DSN, you may need to use a DISP of MOD rather than NEW. This field is ignored for BAGTAGS, TRAYTAGS, DUO FILE, and CONTTAGS.

The following section applies to presort groups only. Positions 19-25 are exclusive positions. If you select one or several of these levels only those levels will be included in a report. If you specify N for any of these positions, MailStream Plus omits those levels from the report. If you specify X or blank for any of these positions, those levels are included as long as no other exclusive levels are selected. If you do not select any of the exclusive levels, MailStream Plus includes all levels without an N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 257 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description

Be careful about your definitions in positions 19-28. With merged presorting rules pertaining to merged and commingled presorts, it is possible to receive incomplete and invalid data for your job. Please see the DMM for USPS regulations.

19 Machine Presorted Mail Select one of the following options for reporting machine (non-USPS) presorted mail: A (Print automation only) Print only the automation-compatible portion of the mailing. O Report non-Automated (manual) mail only. B Report the barcoded portion only. X Include in report; allows machine presorted mail data to be reported along with other groups of mail. N No, do not report machine-presorted mail; report all others specified. blank Default is X.

20 Automated Mailing Define whether the Automated portion of the mailing should be reported: Selection (exclusive) A (Print automation only) Print only the automation-compatible portion of the mailing. N (Do not print automation details) Print everything except the automation-compatible details. X Print all levels of detail - automation and non-automation - on the report. blank Default is X.

21 Machinable Mailing Define whether the Machinable portion of the mailing should be reported: Selection (exclusive) U Report Machinable mail. N No, do not report Machinable mail. X Include in report. blank Default is X.

22 Non-Automated Define whether the non-Automated (manual) portion of the mailing should be (manual) Mailing reported: Selection (exclusive) O Report non-Automated (manual) mail. N No, do not report non-Automated (manual) mail. X Include in report. blank Include in report.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 258 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description

23 Automated Carrier Define whether the Automated Carrier portion of the mailing should be reported: Mailing Selection C Report Automated Carrier mail. (exclusive) N No, do not report Automated Carrier mail. X Include in report. blank Default is X.

24 Enhanced Carrier Define whether the Enhanced Carrier portion of the mailing should be reported: Mailing Selection E Report Enhanced Carrier mail. (exclusive) N No, do not report Enhanced Carrier mail. X Include in report. blank Default is X.

25 Palletized Mailing Define whether the Palletized portion of the mailing should be reported: Selection P Report Palletized mail only. N No, do not report Palletized mail. X Include in report. blank Default is X.

The following section applies to rate categories only. If you are commingling mail and wish to see only certain rate categories, you will use positions 26 through 28, and disregard positions 20 through 25. You must also select at least one of these positions. Be careful of the combinations you use in positions 19-28. With merged presorting rules pertaining to merged and commingled presorts, it is possible to receive incomplete and invalid data for your job. Please see the DMM for USPS regulations.

26 Include Carrier Route Define whether the Carrier Route rate portion of the mailing should be reported: Rate Y Report Carrier Route rate mail. N Do not report Carrier Route rate mail. blank Default is Y.

27 Include Presort Rate Define whether the Presort rate portion of the mailing should be reported: Y Report presort rate mail. N Do not report presort rate mail. blank Default is Y for all reports except REPORT FACESLIP.

28 Include Basic/Residual Define whether the Basic/Residual rate portion of the mailing should be reported: Rate Y Report Basic/Residual rate mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 259 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description

N Do not report Basic/Residual rate mail. blank Default is Y.

30-58 Report Options Information specific to the individual report. We describe these fields in the subsequent REPORT parameter descriptions.

60-67 Output Name These file names cannot be changed on the IBM i platform. Specify the operating system-specific output name/assignment for your reports. For Unix, Windows, and z/OS, define an external file name of up to 8 characters. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 260 Parameter Reference

REPORT AUDITTRL

Optional: REPORT AUDITTRL generates the Mail Content Audit Trail Report. This is one of the most frequently-used reports.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name AUDITTRL is the only acceptable entry. UPCRAT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see REPORT. UPCPRR11 and Selection Criteria

30-32 Finest Level of Detail to Define the reporting level: UPCRAT01 Print PLT Pallet BAG Bag/tray BDL Bundle DTL Detail blank Default is DTL for multiple piece IDs, BDL otherwise.

34 New Page for Each Pallet Define whether to start a new report page for each new UPCRAT01 pallet: Y Begin a new page. N No, don not begin a new page. blank Default is N.

36 Print Page and Cumulative Define whether to print the page and cumulative totals UPCRAT01 Totals on the report: Y Print totals. N Do not print totals. blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 261 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

40 Print Cumulative Column Should a cumulative column should appear on your UPCRAT01 report? Y Print cumulative column. N Do not print cumulative column. blank Default is Y.

42 Reset Page Numbers and Define how to reset page numbers and position totals: UPCRAT01 Cumulative Totals N Do not reset. E Reset for each entry point. B Reset for each batch. blank Default is N.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, use any external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 262 Parameter Reference

REPORT BAGTAGS

Required for Bag Tags. REPORT BAGTAGS generates the USPS-required tags for use with sacked mail. If you define this parameter, MailStream Plus also produces the tray tag data file. Note: Barcoded tray tags are required. MailStream Plus continues to produce the non-barcoded tags as well. If an alternate spacing character (A, B or C) is selected in positions 30-33 then vertical tags per page (positions 35-36) may not contain an odd number. The MSWKWK file is required for North/South orientation.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name BAGTAGS is the only acceptable entry. UPCRBT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see REPORT. Does not apply and Selection Criteria Note: This field is ignored for BAGTAGS, TRAYTAGS, and CONTTAGS.

30-33 Line Spacing Define the number of lines the printer will space UPCRBT01 down before printing lines 1 through 4 of the bag tags. The positions are: Col 30 Line 1 Col 31 Line 2 Col 32 Line 3 Col 33 Line 4

The following codes may also be used: A Alternate 2 and 3 lines B Alternate 3 and 4 lines C Alternate 4 and 5 lines

You may select only one of codes A, B, or C, and you may use that code only once. Defaults are:

• Line 1 = 3 • Line 2 = 1 • Line 3 = 1 • Line 4 = A

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 263 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

35-36 Number of Vertical Tags Define the number of tags to print per column on a UPCRBT01 per Page page. blank Default is 08. Note: If an alternate-spacing character is selected for line spacing, (A, B, or C), this field must contain an even number.

38 Number of Horizontal Tags Define the number of tags to print per row on a UPCRBT01 Per Page page. blank Default is 4.

40-41 Horizontal Positions Define a value from 30 through 41 to define the UPCRBT01 between Tags number of positions from the beginning of one tag to the beginning of the next. blank Default is 34.

43-44 Tag Orientation Define how tags should be printed on a page: UPCRBT01 NS Print North/South orientation. EW Print East/West orientation. blank Default is NS.

Note: This requires a DISK work file. For z/OS, assign a VSAM KSDS file, MSWKWK. The MSRDTRA file is output in the sequence selected here. To change the MSRDTRA sequence to East/West, sort on the msrdtra-sequence-number field in position 14 of the MSRDTRA record. To change the sequence back to North/South, sort on the msrdtra-north-south field in position 242 of the MSRDTRA record.

46 Fourth Line Print/Suppress Define whether to print the optional 4th tag line: UPCRBT01 P Print 4th line. Unless indicated otherwise in RP INF BGLIN4, MailStream Plus will print the default information which consists of: • Container number • Container type • Number of pieces

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 264 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• Weight of container (if a sack) • Size of container in inches (if a tray)

S Suppress 4th line. blank Default is P.

48 Pages of Line-Up Tags to Define a value from 0 through 9 to define the UPCRBT01 Print number of alignment (blank) tags to print at the beginning of the current job. Default is 0.

50 Place the Container Type Define whether to place container types on break UPCRBT01 on Break Records records: Y Place the container type on the break record. N Do not place the container type on the break record. blank Default is N.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, assign an external file name up to 8 characters. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in this field, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows and Unix - *.tra for the tray tag file and *.rbt for the non-automated sack tags report • z/OS - MSRDTRA DD for the tray tag file and MSRPTAG DD for the non-automated sack tags report • IBM i

• The MSTRAjobid fixed-length tag file is written to the work library. • The MVTRAjobid variable-length tag file is written to the work library.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 265 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• The non-automated tray tags report is written to the MSRPTAG spool file. • You cannot change these assignments.

72 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 266 Parameter Reference

REPORT CONTTAGS

REPORT CONTTAGS creates the tray tag data file. This parameter does not create printed tags.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 REPORT REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 CONTTAGS CONTTAGS is the only acceptable entry. UPCRCT01

17-28 Please see REPORT. Does not apply Note: This field is ignored for BAGTAGS, TRAYTAGS, and CONTTAGS.

38 Number of Horizontal Tags Define a number from 1 through 4 to define the UPCRCT01 Per Page number of horizontal tags per page. The default is 1. Note: This column is used to override final print orientation. A value greater than 1 will cause a North/South sequence number to be placed in the tag sequence number of the Pitney Bowes format MMBTAG file for that number of columns on a page and also in the MSRDTRA file. The MSRDTRA file is output in the sequence selected here. To change the MSRDTRA sequence to East/West, sort on the msrdtra-sequence-number field, position 14. To change the sequence back to North/South, sort on the msrdtra-north-south field, 242.

50 Place the Container type Place place container type on break records? UPCRCT01 on Break Records Y Place the container type on the break records. N Do not place container type on the break records. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 267 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

52 Create Pitney Bowes Create the Pitney Bowes format data file for tags? UPCRCT01 Format Data File for Tags Y Create Pitney Bowes MMBTAG file. N Do not create Pitney Bowes MMBTAG file. blank Default is N.

Note: User-written programs should not use this file as input. Use Mail.dat files for all user-written applications.

72 Reserved

REPORT CONTTAGS Output Assignments

• Windows, Unix - All tags are written to the *.tra tag file. • z/OS - All tags are written to the MSRDTRA DD tag file. • IBM i - The output for this report goes to different files: • The MSTRAjobid fixed-length tag file is written to the work library. • The MVTRAjobid variable-length tag file is written to the work library.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 268 Parameter Reference

REPORT CRRTWALK

Optional: Use REPORT CRRTWALK to generate the USPS-required Carrier Route Walk Sequence Report. This report is not required for Line-of-Travel (LOT) presorts. Note that positions 20 through 28 are reserved. The following INF parameters may be used to place data in the headings of this report: • MLRNAM - Allows placement of a mailer name in heading • AGTNAM - If MLRNAM is not present, this parameter is used • MAILID - Allows placement of the mailing identification number

See the RP INF parameter for information on the use of each of these INF records. This report will be presented in Entry Point/Batch/ZIP/Carrier sequence and will print all Enhanced Carrier Walk-Sequence records.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name CRRTWALK is the only acceptable entry. UPCRZS01

17 Number of Copies Define a number, 1 through 9, to define the number UPCRZS01 of copies of this report to print. blank Default is 1.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, assign an external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in positions 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT ® • IBM i - PRNTRPT spool file; this assignment cannot be changed

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 269 Parameter Reference

REPORT DETAIL

Optional: REPORT DETAIL creates a report generated from the detail statistics file. This is one of the most commonly-used mail shop reports. You may generate more than one Detail Statistics report, each showing different options.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name DETAIL is the only acceptable entry. UPCRDT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see REPORT. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30-32 Finest Level of Detail to Define whether to include information at the specified UPCRDT01 Print level on your report: PLT Pallet BAG Bag/tray BDL Bundle DTL Detail BAT Batch EPT Entry point blank Default is DTL for multiple piece IDs; Otherwise, BDL.

34 New Page for Each Pallet Define whether to begin a new report page for each UPCRDT01 new pallet: Y Yes, begin a new page. N No, do not begin a new page.

blank Default is N.

36 Print Page and Cumulative Define whether to print the page and cumulative totals UPCRDT01 Totals on the report: Y Yes, print totals. N No, do not print totals.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 270 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default is Y.

40 Print Cumulative Column Define how to display information on this report: UPCRDT01 Y Yes, print cumulative column. N No, do not print cumulative column.

blank Default is Y.

42 Reset Page Numbers and Define whether to reset page numbers and cumulative UPCRDT01 Cumulative Totals totals for this report: N Do not reset. E Reset for each entry point. B Reset for each batch.

blank Default is N.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in positions 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - PRNTRPT spool file; this assignment cannot be changed

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 271 Parameter Reference

REPORT DUO FILE

Optional: Use REPORT DUO FILE to produce or export the machine-presorted mail counts to two *.csv (comma separated value) files. One file contains the barcoded mail. The second file contains the non-barcoded mail. REPORT DUO FILE output varies for specific classes of mail, as follows: • First-Class Mail: ZIP Code, Record Counts • USPS Marketing Mail: ZIP Codes, Record Counts, ZIP Code Scheme ID, ZIP Code Scheme Description This report is only available if you have purchased and installed DuoSort Workshare Manager™.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name DUO FILE is the only acceptable entry. UPCRDS01

17 Number of Copies Ignored for this report. Default is 1. Does not apply

19-28 Common Reporting Levels For this report, only machine-presorted mail details UPCRDS01 are produced.

34 Replace Commas and/or Define whether to replace commas and/or double UPCRDS01 Double Quotes in All Fields quotes in report fields. Y Replace commas and/or double quotes with a specific replacement value. N Do not replace commas and/or double quotes. blank Default is Y.

36 Value Replacing Commas Define the value to replace commas and double UPCRDS01 and Double Quotes in quotes in reports. May contain any value except a Reports comma or a double quote. The default character is a blank space.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 272 Parameter Reference

REPORT DUO TRAN

Optional: Use REPORT DUO TRAN parameter to produce the DuoSort Workshare Manager Transit Document Report. This is the report that you give to the workshare facility/job shop that is processing your machine-presorted mail. You can segment your report at specific break points (such as batch or facility), and you can specify the finest level of report detail included on your reports. This report is only available if you have purchased DuoSort Workshare Manager.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRTR01

8-15 Report Name DUO TRAN is the only acceptable entry. UPCRTR01

17 Number of Copies Default is 1. Does not apply

19-28 Common Reporting Levels For this report, only machine-presorted Mail details UPCRTR01 are produced.

30-32 Finest Level of Report Define one of the following as the finest level to include UPCRTR01 Detail on this report: SCH Scheme PSG Presort (Pitney Bowes Software/DuoSort) BAT Batch level FAC Facility level blank Default is the level SCH

33-41 Reserved

42 Reset Page Number and Reset page number and totals at one of the following UPCRTR01 Totals break points: B Reset for each new batch. F Reset for each new facility.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 273 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

N Do not reset. Produce running totals and page numbers. blank Default is F.

43-59 Reserved

60-67 Alternate Output File Define the alternate output file for this report. File Does not apply (Mainframe, only) MSRPRPT is the default output file name. Note: For OS/390, use any external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. If you use an alternate output file, specify the file name in a JCL DD statement.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 274 Parameter Reference

REPORT FACESLIP

Optional: Use REPORT FACESLIP to generate the facing slips used to label bundles of mail. If you specify information for the fourth line of the facing slip, this information displays on the facing slip instead of the system-generated information. The system-generated fourth line contains the bag/tray number, the bundle number, the number of copies in a bundle, and additional information, such as the batch code. MailStream Plus also allows you to suppress the fourth line of the facing slip entirely. Note: For more information on requesting facing slips for presort groups other than CRRT, see positions 27 and 28 of the REPORT parameter.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name FACESLIP is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRFS01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30-33 Line Spacing Define the number of lines the printer will space down UPCRFS01 before printing lines 1-4 of the bag tags. The positions are: Col 30 Line 1 (Default is 3) Col 31 Line 2 (Default is 1) Col 32 Line 3 (Default is 1) Col 33 Line 4 (Default is A)

The following codes may also be used: A Alternate 2 and 3 lines B Alternate 3 and 4 lines C Alternate 4 and 5 lines

You may select only one of codes A, B, or C and you may use that code only once.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 275 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

35-36 Number of Vertical Slips Define the number of slips to print in one column on UPCRFS01 per Page a page. blank Default is 11. Note: If you select an alternate-spacing character in the Line Spacing field (A, B, or C), this field must contain an even number.

38 Number of Horizontal Slips Define the number of slips (1-9) to print per row on UPCRFS01 per Page one page. blank Default is 4.

40-41 Horizontal Positions Specify a value from 30 through 41 to define the UPCRFS01 between Slips number of positions from the beginning of one slip to the beginning of the next. blank Default is 34.

43-44 Slip Orientation Define slip printing/orientation: UPCRFS01 NS Print North/South – NORTH/SOUTH ORIENTATION requires a DISK work file. For z/OS, assign a VSAM KSDS file, MSWKWK. EW Print East/West

blank Default is NS.

46 Fourth Line Print/ Define whether to print the optional 4th line of the slip: UPCRFS01 Suppress P Print 4th line. S Suppress 4th line. blank Default is P.

48 Number of Pages of Define a value from 0 through 9 to define how many UPCRFS01 Line-Up Slips to Print pages of alignment (blank) slips to print at the beginning of a run. Default is 0.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define any external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 276 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in positions 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rfs • z/OS - MSRPFAC DD • IBM® i - MSRPFAC spool file; this assignment cannot be changed

FACESLIP Output Assignments

MailStream Plus assigns the Facing Slips report to file MSRPFAC.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 277 Parameter Reference

REPORT MAILDAT

Required to run the Mail.dat report: Use REPORT MAILDAT to generate the Mail.dat files and produce a one-page summary report. Before creating Mail.dat files, you must acquire a license code from Pitney Bowes. Pitney Bowes will furnish one license, and you must contact Idealliance for additional license codes. The license code is a unique four-position alphanumeric code that assures exclusive identification for you and your files. The Mail.dat report does not produce printed output, except for header information in the MSRPRPT file. Several RP INF parameters are required when using this parameter, including: MDLPCN, MDLPCO, MDLPCT, MDLPJN, MDLPPC and MDLPEM. See Chapter 2 of this guide, for a complete listing of required and optional subkeywords. When using subkeywords that populate fields in optional Mail.dat files, you must turn on the optional file using the REPORT MAILDAT parameter. The use of subkeywords that populate an optional file does not automatically cause the optional file to be produced. Note: On Unix, Linux, and Windows only, empty Mail.dat files are automatically deleted after the job finishes.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name MAILDAT is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRMD01 and UPCRMD02

19-28 Reporting Levels and Please see REPORT. Does not Selection Criteria apply

30 Reserved

31 Produce Extra Piece Define whether to populate the extra piece data file (*.epd): UPCRMD01 Data File Y Produce the extra piece data file. N Do not Produce the extra piece data file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 278 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default is N.

32 Produce Seed Name Define whether to populate the seed name file (.snr): UPCRMD01 File Y Populate seed name file. N Do not populate seed name file.

blank Default is N.

Note: To receive a valid.snr file, the Name Record Control file must be created. By default this file is automatically created when needed (see the OPT FL for more information).

In order to request this file, you must also setup an S CODE and either a K CODE or L CODE. See the descriptions of these respective parameters for more details. Mail.dat standards require that each Seed Name record be unique when looking at the combined Seed Name ID and Version Key Code fields in the *.snr file. MailStream Plus does not verify that uniqueness. The Mail.dat application that imports the file set may give a warning if encountering any non-unique *.snr records. One way to guarantee uniqueness is to point the S CODE or K CODE parameter to the CONTRL parameter field, which is unique for each record.

33 Produce Special Define whether to produce the Special Fees/Charges file (.sfr). UPCRMD01 Fees/Charges File Y Produce the file. (*.SFR) N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is N.

Note: To create this file, you must also create the *.pdr file (REPORT MAILDAT position 36 = Y) and you must be processing a Bound Printed Matter Presort (ML TYP position 12 = B). You must also define the PRDDTA and SRVFEE parameters when producing the *.sfr file.

34 Produce Un-Coded Define whether to produce the Un-Coded Parcel Address file (.upa). UPCRMD01 Parcel Address File Y Produce the file. (*.UPA) N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is N.

Note: To create this file, you must also create the *.pdr file (REPORT MAILDAT position 36 = Y) and you must be processing a Bound Printed Matter Presort (ML TYP position

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 279 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

12 = B). You must also define the ADDRES parameter when producing the *.upa file.

35 Produce InkJet Define whether to produce the InkJet Container file (.icr). UPCRMD01 Container file (*.ICR) Y Produce the file. N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is N.

36 Produce the Piece Define whether to produce the Piece Detail file (.pdr). UPCRMD01 Detail Record file Y Produce the file. (*.PDR) N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is Y.

To receive a valid .pdr file (or.snr as appropriate for each position), the OPT FL parameter must be active (either not in the parameters or position 8 must be Y) to create the Name Record Control file (MSWKNRC file). By default, this file is automatically created when needed (see OPT FL).

37 Produce the Component Define whether to produce the Component Characteristic Record file UPCRMD01 Characteristic Record (.ccr). (*.CCR) file Y Produce the file. N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is N.

Note: If you produce this file, the Component Characteristic Record file is populated based on the data in the Mail.dat MDMLCT (content of mail), MDICID (incentive IDs), and MDFEID (fee IDs) PA INF parameters.

38 Produce Special Define whether to produce the Special Barcode file (.sfb). UPCRMD01 Barcode (*.SFB) file Y Produce the file. N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 280 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

39 Produce the Piece Define whether to produce the Piece Barcode Record file (.pbc). UPCRMD01 Barcode Record (*.PBC) Y Produce the file. file N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is N.

40 Create Segments Define whether to create segments file (.seg): UPCRMD02 B Create segments by batch code. N Do not create segments.

blank Default is N.

If segmenting by batch and there are multiple entry points, we suggest that you do the following to avoid multiple batch segment breaks by entry points:

• Use SRTFLn parameters to put the batch sort field (002) before the entry point sort field (001). • Do not use REPORT MAILDAT position 45 to sequence the sort by entry point.

41 Batch Break Start Define the beginning position of the batch code you wish to use as a UPCRMD02 Column segment break indicator: 1-9 Specify the beginning position of the batch code/break indicator.

blank Default is position 1.

1- 9 The default is to start in position 1 for a length of 9, encompassing the entire batch code field.

42 Batch Break Field Define the length of the batch code to use as a segment break UPCRMD02 Length indicator: 1-9 Specify the beginning position of the batch code/break indicator.

blank Default is 9. The default is to start in position 1 for a length of 9, encompassing the entire batch code field.

43 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 281 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

44 Mailpiece Unit ID Define whether to use the piece attribute code or the index number UPCRMD02 as the mailpiece unit ID. The index number, if used, is the ordinal number of the piece attribute code after sorting the codes alphabetically: I Use index numbers, not piece attribute codes. F Fit only, index otherwise. If the piece attribute code fits within 5 bytes, use it for the mailpiece unit ID, otherwise use the index. If the piece attribute code fits within 8 bytes, use it for the component ID, otherwise use the index.

blank Default is I.

45 Sort Sequence Code Define the sort sequence for the output segments and container UPCRMD02 summaries: E Entry sequence, as follows:

• Entry point Batch code • Pallet number • Bag/tray number • Bundle number • Rate code • ZIP Code • Final sequence

M Mailing sequence. This is the order specified on the SRTFLn parameters.

blank Default is M.

46 Abandon Processing Define whether to continue processing if the Mail.dat files generated UPCRMD02 are incomplete or invalid. W Produce a warning in the Execution Log report and continue. E Produce an error in the Execution Log report and terminate the MSRP00 step.

blank Default is E.

47 PostalOne! Verification Define whether to verify that all PostalOne! required fields are UPCRMD02 populated and necessary INF parameters are entered. P Generate an error if any PostalOne! fields are blank. N Do not generate an error if any PostalOne! fields are blank.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 282 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Default is N.

57 Produce Informed Define whether to produce an Informed Delivery Campaign with the UPCRMD01 Delivery campaign? Mail.dat Referenceable Mail Record (.rmr) and Referenceable Mail Summary Record (.rms) files: Y Produce the file. N Do not produce the file.

blank Default is N.

Note: You must define a PA INF IDCSLK for each piece attribute definition (P ATTR) to which Informed Delivery campaigns will apply.

58 Use PA INF IMBMLR as UPCRMD02 Y Yes, use PA INF IMBMLR as Default value for Mailer Default for Mailer ID in ID in CPT file field CPT-1148. CPT Field CPT-1148 N No, do not Use PA INF IMBMLR as Default value for Mailer ID in CPT file field CPT-1148.

blank Default is Y.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output name/assignment for Does not your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file apply name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - PRNTRPT spool file; this assignment cannot be changed

72 Record Format Define whether to create the "previous" or "current" record format. UPCRMD02 "Current" is the current Idealliance Mail.dat standard. "Previous" is the previous Mail.dat standard. Please review your MailStream Plus Release Notes for the current and previous release levels. C Current format (see www.idealliance.org )

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 283 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

P Previous format (see www.idealliance.org)

blank Default is C.

Output Assignments

A complete listing of all MailStream Plus report subkeywords is in Chapter 2 of this Guide.

Mail.dat Report Information Fields

A complete listing of all MailStream Plus report subkeywords is in Chapter 2 of this Guide.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 284 Parameter Reference

REPORT MANIFEST

Required to run the Manifest Report. This parameter produces a manifest report for your mailing. If you have not purchased Manifest Reporting Plus, this report is not available. At this time, you may perform manifesting for First-Class letters and flats and USPS Marketing Mail letters and flats.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name MANIFEST is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRMN01

17 Number of Copies Define the number of copies of this report to produce. UPCRMN01

30 Manifest Report Type Define manifest report type: UPCRMN01 B Batch Manifest I Itemized Manifest blank Default is B.

32-34 Fixed Batch Manifest Use this field to override the Floating Batch report to UPCRMN01 Override create a Fixed Batch Manifest. Allowable values = 1 to 999 Note: The default floating batch size is 300 pieces maximum, or one container, whichever is less. The exception is for letter-size Automation or Machinable mailings where the maximum is one tray.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default report names. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 285 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

position 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - PRNTRPT spool file

If the information in any of the report's data column lines exceeds a 132-byte print area, the report ignores the value defined in this field. Instead, the information writes to a separate output file:

• Windows writes to: SET DD_MSRP256=%PBMSP%\data\%PBJOB%.256 • Unix/Linux writes to: DD_MSRP256="${PBMSP}/data/${PBPBJOB}.256"; export DD_MSRP256 • z/OS writes to: //MSRP256 DD SYSOUT=*,RECFM=FBA,LRECL=257 • IBM® i writes to a separate and larger spool file called MSRP256 (instead of PRNTPRT) so the information is no longer truncated.

Manifest Report INF Parameters

Use the following xxINF parameters to place data in the heading of the Manifest Report. • MLRNAM - Puts the mailer name in the Manifest Report heading. • MLRAD1, MLRAD2, MLRAD3 - Puts the first, second, and third address lines in the Manifest Report heading. • PMTPM# - Puts the postage permit number or postage meter license number in the Manifest Report heading. The Manifest Report derives the report date from the header date (defined on the HEADER parameter). If no header date is defined, the Manifest Report uses the system date.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 286 Parameter Reference

REPORT PALSUMM

Optional: Use REPORT PALSUMM to produce a summary report of the palletized portion of your mailing, broken down by pallet, bag, or piece ID. If you have not purchased Palletization Plus, this report is not available.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name PALSUMM is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on PPCRSM01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30-32 Finest Level of Detail to Define whether to include information at the specified PPCRSM01 Print level on your report: PLT Pallet BAG Bag/tray PID Piece IDs

blank Default is PID for multiple piece IDs, BAG otherwise.

34 New Page for Each Pallet Define whether to start a new report page for each PPCRSM01 new pallet: Y Yes, begin new a page. N No, do not begin a new page. blank Default is N.

36 Print Page and Cumulative Define whether to print the page and cumulative PPCRSM01 Totals totals on the report. Y Yes, print totals. N No, do not print totals. blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 287 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

40 Print Format Define the display of information on your report: PPCRSM01 I By intra-SCF R By rate

blank Default is I for Periodicals; R otherwise.

42 Reset Page Numbers and Define the resetting of page numbers and position PPCRSM01 Cumulative Totals totals: N No, do not reset. E Reset for each entry point. B Reset for each batch.

blank Default is N.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define a file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed) Note: If the information in any of the report's data column lines exceeds a 132-byte print area, the report ignores the value in this field. Instead, the information writes to a separate output file:

• Windows writes to: SET DD_MSRP256=%PBMSP%\data\%PBJOB%.256 • Unix/Linux writes to: DD_MSRP256="${PBMSP}/data/${PBJOB}.256"; export DD_MSRP256 • z/OS writes to: //MSRP256 DD SYSOUT=*,RECFM=FBA,LRECL=257

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 288 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• IBM® i - Writes to a separate and larger spool file, MSRP256 (instead of PRNTPRT), so the information is no longer truncated

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 289 Parameter Reference

REPORT PALTAGS

Optional: Use REPORT PALTAGS to generate the actual pallet tags required by the USPS to label the pallets of mail. Each report creates two copies of the pallet tags. If you have not purchased Palletization Plus, this report is not available.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name PALTAGS is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on PPCRPT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30 Print Character Define format of the large print lines: PPCRPT01 Y Use actual characters. N Do not use characters. Instead, construct characters using Xs and Os. C Use the Replacement Character defined on this parameter. X Build character from the "Replacement Character" field. blank Default is N.

32 Create Pallet Label Data Define whether to create a pallet label data file, tags, PPCRPT01 File or both: Y Create the pallet label data file. N Create pallet tags only; do not create the pallet label data file. B Create both the pallet tags and the pallet label data file.

blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 290 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

34-35 Replacement Character If you specified option C in the Print Character field, PPCRPT01 the first position in this field can contain any value except a space. If you specified X in the Print Character field, this field is limited to hexadecimal values: '00'-'FF'.

37 Number of Tags Per Pallet Define the number of tags printed per pallet. PPCRPT01 1-9 Prints 1-9 pallet tags blank Default is 2.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters n positions 60-67. As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in this field, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix:

• jobid.LAB is the Pallet Label File • jobid.PLT is the Pallet Tag

• z/OS - MSRPPLT DD for the pallet tags and MSRDPLT DD for the pallet tag file • IBM® i - MailStream Plus writes the output for this report to the following files (these output files cannot be changed):

• Pallet tags are written to the MSRPPLT spool file. • The MLLABjobid pallet tag file is written to the work library.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 291 Parameter Reference

REPORT PRESVFY

Use REPORT PRESVFY to generate the Presort Verification Report. The Presort Verification Report includes container destination information for each container, showing the tray, sack, or pallet label for that container. This report is especially helpful to mailers who use pre-ordered tray tags from the USPS rather than printing their own custom tags. If you repeatedly ship to a limited number of destinations, you can find this report useful because it defines the content of each tray and provides a matching tray label for production and mail preparation purposes. Note: The Presort Verification Report is not a USPS-required report. This report is a production/ mail shop report that is especially helpful for physical labeling and bundle-level details.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name PRESVFY is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on PPCRPT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in this field, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM®i - PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 292 Parameter Reference

REPORT RUNSTATS

Optional: Use REPORT RUNSTATS to generate the MailStream Plus Statistical Report. This report contains information broken down by entry point, batch code, piece ID, list code, and/or key code. The MSWKNRC file must be included in your job in order for REPORT RUNSTATS to be generated. Use the OPT FL parameter to generate the MSWKNRC file.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name RUNSTATS is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on PPCRPT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30 Produce Statistics by Entry Define whether MailStream Plus will produce entry UPCRST01 Point point-level statistics: Y Produce statistics by entry point. N Do not produce statistics by entry point.

blank Default is Y.

Note: Using ENT SQ to resequence the mailing's entry point output sequence does not affect the entry point order on the MailStream Plus Statistical Report (RUNSTATS).

32 Produce Statistics by Define whether MailStream Plus will produce batch UPCRST01 Batch Code code-level statistics: Y Produce statistics by batch code. N Do not produce statistics by batch code.

blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 293 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

34 Produce Statistics by Define whether MailStream Plus should produce UPCRST01 Piece ID piece ID-level statistics: Y Produce statistics by piece ID. N Do not produce statistics by piece ID.

blank Default is Y.

36 Produce Statistics by List Define whether MailStream Plus should produce UPCRST01 Code list code-level statistics: Y Produce statistics by list code. N Do not produce statistics by list code.

blank Default is Y.

For more information, see the L CODE.

38 Produce Statistics by Key Define whether MailStream Plus should produce UPCRST01 Code key code-level statistics: Y Produce statistics by key code. N Do not produce statistics by key code.

blank Default is N.

For more information, see the K CODE.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. As delivered, our scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed) Note: If the information in any of the report's data column lines exceeds a 132-byte print area, the report ignores the value

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 294 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

in position 60-67. Instead, the information writes to a separate output file:

• Windows writes to: SET DD_MSRP256=%PBMSP%\data\%PBJOB%.256 • Unix/Linux writes to: DD_MSRP256="${PBMSP}/data/${PBJOB}.256"; export DD_MSRP256 • z/OS writes to: //MSRP256 DD SYSOUT=*,RECFM=FBA,LRECL=257 • IBM® i writes to a separate and larger spool file called MSRP256 (instead of PRNTPRT) so the information is no longer truncated.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 295 Parameter Reference

REPORT SUMMARY

Optional: Use REPORT SUMMARY to generate a report summarizing all the information that appears on the USPS Postage Statements. Also see the REPORT USPSSTMT for additional information. Note: For Periodicals mailings, USPS regulations require MailStream Plus to round the total weight for each zone to the nearest whole pound on each Postage Statement. When requesting this report, selecting individual reports by Piece ID (position 30), Entry Point (position 34), or Presort Group (position 42) may cause the postage to be slightly off due to the rounding of the weights. The postage on the combined All Entry-Points, All Piece-IDs, and All Presort Groups will be correct. If you are batching mail (combining separate mailings in the same job), the postage is correct on each individual batch's statement. The combined All Batches statement may show the rounding difference.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name SUMMARY is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRSM00

17-28 Copies, Levels, Selection Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply Criteria

30 Print Summary for Each Define whether to print a summary for each piece ID: UPCRSM00 Piece ID Y Print piece ID summary. N Do not print piece ID summary.

blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE at the top of this parameter.

Note: At least one of the "Print Summary" fields must contain Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 296 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

32 Print Summary for Each Define whether to print a summary for each batch: UPCRSM00 Batch Y Print batch summary. N Do not print batch summary.

blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE at the top of this parameter.

34 Print Summary for Each Define whether to print a summary for each entry UPCRSM00 Entry Point point: Y Print entry point summary. N Do not print entry point summary.

blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE at the top of this parameter.

36 Print TOTAL Summary Define whether to print a TOTAL statement summary, UPCRSM00 including the total resource dollars amount: Y Print TOTAL summary and total resource dollars. N Do not print TOTAL summary or total resource dollars.

blank Default is Y.

38 Level of Calculation Define the level of calculation to print on the Summary UPCRSM00 Report: 0 Complete all calcualtions. 1 Omit postage totals. 2 Omit part totals. 3 Omit percent of advertising (Periodicals only). 5 Omit weight and weight-based (Periodicals only).

blank Default is 0.

Note: Each level of calculation causes the program to omit all lower levels of calculation. For example, you specify option 5 in this field,

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 297 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

weight and weight-based calculations, percent of advertising calculations, and postal total will be omitted from the Postage Statement.

42 Print Summary for Each Define whether MailStream Plus should print a UPCRSM00 Presort Group summary for each presort group: Y Print summary for each presort report. N Combine reporting of all presort groups.

blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE at the top of this parameter.

44 Print Line Items of Each Define whether MailStream Plus should print a UPCRSM00 Weight summary for line items of each weight in a multiple weight mailing: Y Print a summary for line items of each weight. N Combine all weights onto one set of line items. This summary total includes counts and postage, not rates.

blank Default is N.

46 Produce statements from Define the file to use to produce statements: UPCRSM00 this file Q From USPS Qualification Order file M From Mail Sequence Order file

blank Default is M.

48 Mail Class (for printing Define the Mail Class to print. Two or more REPORT UPCRSM00 statements for a different parameters are necessary: one for the ML TYP Class, class than ML TYP) and another for each of different class. If the mailing has Unqualified records that require a First-Class form, a second REPORT USPSSTMT parameter with a 1 posted in this field is required for the additional form. 1 First-Class

P or 2 Periodicals Class S or 3 USPS Marketing Mail blank Default is ML TYP class.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 298 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL use default names for the reports. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position 60-67, the report is written to MSRP256 for all platforms. You cannot change this file name on the IBM® i platform.

Note: This report prints to the MSRP256 report file unless the name is overridden in columns 60-67 (you cannot override the name for the IBM® i platform). If overridden, for platforms that require you to specify a file length when defining the file, you must define the length as 256.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 299 Parameter Reference

REPORT TRAYTAGS

Optional: Use REPORT TRAYTAGS to generate the tags required by the USPS for use with trayed mail. MailStream Plus also produces the tray tag data file if you define this parameter. Note: Barcoded tray tags are required under classification reform. MailStream Plus continues to produce the non-barcoded tags as well. If an alternate spacing character (A, B or C) is selected in the Tray Tag Line Spacing field, then Number of Vertical Tags per Page may not contain an odd number. The MSWKWK file is required for a North/South orientation.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name TRAYTAGS is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRBT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria Note: This field is ignored for BAGTAGS, TRAYTAGS, and CONTTAGS.

30-33 Tray Tag Line Spacing Define the number of lines the printer will space down UPCRBT01 before printing lines 1-4 of the tray tags. The positions are:

Col 30 = Line 1

Col 31 = Line 2

Col 32 = Line 3

Col 33 = Line 4 The following codes may also be used: A = Alternate 2 and 3 lines

B = Alternate 3 and 4 lines

C = Alternate 4 and 5 lines You may select only one of codes A, B, or C, and you may use that code only once. Defaults are: Line 1 = 6 Line 2 = 2

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 300 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Line 3 = A Line 4 = 5 Number of vertical tags per page = 4 Horizontal positions between tags = 33

35-36 Number of Vertical Tags Define the number of tags to print per row on one UPCRBT01 per Page page.

blank Default is 04. Note: If an alternate-spacing character is selected in the Tray Tag Line Spacing field (A, B, or C), this field must contain an even number.

38 Number of Horizontal Tags Define the number of tags (from 1 to 9) to print on UPCRBT01 per Page one page in a row.

blank Default is 4.

40-41 Horizontal Positions Define a value from 30 through 41 to define the UPCRBT01 between Tags number of positions from the beginning of one tag to the beginning of the next tag.

blank Default is 33.

43-44 Tag Orientation Define how to print tags on a page: UPCRBT01 NS North/South orientation: requires a DISK work file. For z/OS, assign a VSAM KSDS file, MSWKWK. EW East/West orientation blank Default is NS.

Note: The MSRDTRA file is output in the sequence selected here. To change the msrdtra sequence to East/West, sort on the msrdtra-sequence-number field in position 14. To change the sequence back to North/South, sort on the msrdtra-north-south field in position 242.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 301 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

46 Fourth Line Print/ Define whether to print or suppress the optional 4th UPCRBT01 Suppress line of the tag: P Print the fourth line. Unless defined differently in RP INF, MailStream Plus will print the default information which consists of container number, container type, number of pieces, weight of container (if a sack), size of container in inches (if a tray) S Suppress the fourth line.

blank Default is P.

48 Pages of Line-Up Tags to Enter a value from 0 through 9 to define the number UPCRBT01 Print of pages of alignment (blank) tags to print at the beginning of a job.

Default is 0.

50 Place the Container Type Define whether to place the container type on break UPCRBT01 on Break Records records: Y Place the container type on the break record.

N Do not place the container type on the break record.

blank Default is N.

60-67 Output Name Specify the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For all platforms except IBM® i, MailStream Plus writes the bag tag image file to the output value specified here, and not to the 352-byte flat file. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters. As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.tra for the Tray Tags file and *.rbt for the non-automated tray tags report

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 302 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• z/OS - MSRDTRA DD for the Tray Tags file and MSRPTAG DD for the non-automated tray tags report • IBM® i - MailStream Plus writes the output for this report to the following files:

• The MSTRAjobid fixed-length tray tag file is written to the work library. • The MVTRAjobid variable-length tray tag file is written to the work library. • The non-automated tray tags report is written to the MSRPTAG spool file.

72 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 303 Parameter Reference

REPORT USPSBNDL

Optional: Use REPORT USPSBNDL to print a report that provides an accounting of all bundles in a mailing and shows the USPS charges for Outside County processing. Note: This report is valid for Periodicals Mail only.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name USPSBNDL is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRBT01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM®i - PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 304 Parameter Reference

REPORT USPSCONT

Optional: Use REPORT USPSCONT to print a report that provides an accounting of all containers (sacks, trays, and pallets) and provides information to the USPS to show charges for Outside County processing. Note: This report is valid for Periodicals Mail only.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name USPSCONT is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRCO01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names that the reports go to. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position 60-67, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 305 Parameter Reference

REPORT USPSQUAL

Optional: Use REPORT USPSQUAL to generate the standardized documentation required by USPS for your sortation. Use the following INF parameters to place data in headings: • MLRNAM - Allows placement of a mailer name in heading. • AGTNAM - If MLRNAM is not present, MailStream Plus searches for this record. • MAILID - Allows placement of the Mailing Identification Number. For Periodicals mail: • PUBLNM - Allows placement of a publication name in heading. • PUBLNR - Allows placement of the publication identification number in heading. For use of these records, see the "Report Information Fields" in Chapter 2, as well as the BATINF, EP INF, RP INF, and PA INF parameter descriptions. Note: Per USPS requirements, the USPS Qualification Report contains only the qualified portion of the mailing. Unqualified (Single Piece rate mail) is not reported.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name USPSQUAL is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRQL00

17-28 Number of Copies Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply

30 Format Definition Define whether to generate report in USPS qualification UPCRQL00 order or mail sequence order: Q Generate report in qualification order. M Generate report in mail sequence order.

blank Default is Q.

32 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 306 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

34 Display Piece ID Define whether to display piece ID on the detail line: UPCRQL00 Y Display piece ID. N Do not display piece ID. blank For non-profit and Periodicals and Package Services with multiple piece IDs, default is Y. For all other mail, default is N.

36 Reserved

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters may be used in positions 60-67. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL have default names. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in this field, the report is written to the appropriate file name for your platform:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed) If the information in any of the report's data column lines exceeds a 132-byte print area, the report ignores the value defined in this field. Instead, the information writes to a separate output file:

• Windows writes to: SET DD_MSRP256=%PBMSP%\data\%PBJOB%.256 • Unix/Linux writes to: DD_MSRP256="${PBMSP}/data/${PBJOB}.256"; export DD_MSRP256 • z/OS writes to: //MSRP256 DD SYSOUT=*,RECFM=FBA,LRECL=257 • IBM® i - Separate and larger spool file, MSRP256 (instead of PRNTPRT), so the information is no longer truncated.

72 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 307 Parameter Reference

REPORT USPSSTMT

Optional: Use REPORT USPSSTMT to generate the USPS-required Postage Statements for all classes of mail.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, USPS regulations require MailStream Plus to round the total weight for each zone to the nearest whole pound on each Postage Statement. When requesting this report, selecting individual reports by Piece ID (position 30), Entry Point (position 34), or Presort Group (position 42) may cause the postage to be slightly off due to the rounding of the weights. The postage on the combined All Entry-Points, All Piece-IDs, and All Presort Groups will be correct. If you are doing batching (separate mailings in the same job), the postage is correct on the statement for each individual batch. The combined All Batches statement may show the rounding difference. To qualify for Automation discounts, First-Class mailers are required to use the xx INF MDLPMU to fill in the Move update method.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name USPSSTMT is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRSM00

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30 Print Statement of Mailing Define whether to print a Statement of Mailing for each UPCRSM00 for Each Piece ID piece ID: Y Yes, print this statement. N No, do not print this statement.

blank Default is Y.

Note: Piece ID and entry point statements are produced only when more than one piece ID or entry point has been specified in your mailing. For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE above.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 308 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Note: At least one of the "Print Summary" fields must contain Y.

32 Print Statement of Mailing Define whether to print a Statement of Mailing for each UPCRSM00 for Each Batch batch: Y Yes, print this statement. N No, do not print this statement.

blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE at the top of this parameter.

34 Print Statement of Mailing Define whether to print a Statement of Mailing for each UPCRSM00 for Each Entry Point entry point: Y Yes, print this statement. N No, do not print this statement.

blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE at the top of this parameter.

36 Print Total Summary Define whether to print a total summary statement: UPCRSM00 Statements Y Yes, print this statement. N No, do not print this statement.

blank Default is Y.

38 Level of Calculation Define the level of calculation to print on the statement: UPCRSM00 0 Complete all calculations. 1 Omit postage total. 2 Omit part totals. 3 Omit percent of advertising (Periodicals only). 5 Omit weight and weight-based (Periodicals only).

blank Default is 0.

Note: Each level of calculation causes the program to omit all lower levels of calculation. For

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 309 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

example, when "5" is specified in this field, weight and weight-based calculations, percent of advertising calculations, and postal total are omitted from the Postage Statement.

40 Print 3602-C Plant-Verified Define whether to print the USPS form 3602-C for UPCRSM00 Drop Ship Plant-Verified Drop Shipments (PVDS): Y Yes, print PVDS form; prints only for USPS Marketing Mail.

Note: You must also enter a Y in the both the "Print Statement of Mailing for Each Batch" and "Print Statement of Mailing for Each Entry Point" fields to activate this option.

N No, do not print the PVDS form.

blank Default is N.

42 Print Statement for Each Define whether MailStream Plus should print a UPCRSM00 Presort Group statement of mailing for each presort group (for example, carrier or automation): Y Yes, Print a statement for each presort group that qualifies. N Combine all presort groups into one statement.

blank Default is Y.

Note: For Periodicals mailings, please review the NOTE at the top of this parameter.

44 Print Line Item for Each Define whether a statement line item should print for UPCRSM00 Weight (First-Class only) each ounce weight in a multiple weight mailing: Y Yes; reprint line items for each ounce weight. N No; combine all ounce weights into one set of line items. This summary total includes counts and postage, not rates.

blank Default is N.

46 Produce statements from Define the file to use to produce statements: UPCRSM00 this file Q From USPS Qualification Order file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 310 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

M From Mail Sequence Order file (default).

48 Mail Class (for printing Define the Mail Class to print. Two or more REPORT UPCRSM00 statements for a different parameters are necessary: one for the ML TYP Class, class than ML TYP) and another for each of different class. If the mailing has unqualified records that require a First-Class form, a second REPORT USPSSTMT parameter with a 1 posted in this position is required for the additional form. 1 First-Class P or 2 Periodicals Mail S or 3 USPS Marketing Mail blank Default is ML TYP class.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. This report prints to the MSRPSTM report file unless the name is overridden in this field. If overridden, for platforms that require you to specify a file length when defining the file, you must define the length as 256. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters in positions 60-67. Note: As delivered, our Scripts and JCL use default names for the reports. If you choose to use this feature, it is your responsibility to define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in this field, the report is written to MSRPSTM for all platforms. For the IBM® i platform, you cannot change the name: MSRPSTM.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 311 Parameter Reference

REPORT ZONESUMM

Optional: Use REPORT ZONESUMM to generate a Zone Summary Report.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name ZONESUMM is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRZN01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30-32 Finest Level of Detail to Define whether you want information at the specified UPCRZN01 Print level on your report: 3DG 3-digit ZIP ZIP Code BAT Batch Code EPT Entry Point Code blank Default is 3DG.

34 Reserved

36 Print Page and Cumulative Define whether to print the page and cumulative totals UPCRZN01 Totals on the report: Y Print totals. N Do not print totals. blank Default is Y.

40 Reset Page Numbers and Define how page numbers and position totals should UPCRZN01 Cumulative Totals be reset: N Do not reset. E Reset for each entry point.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 312 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

B Reset for each batch. blank Default is N.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters. Note: As delivered, Scripts and JCL have default report file names. If you choose to use this feature, you must define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position in this field, the report is written to:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - MailStream Plus writes the output for this report to the PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 313 Parameter Reference

REPORT ZSDETAIL

Optional: Use REPORT ZSDETAIL to generate the ZIP Code Sequence Detail Report.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword REPORT is the only acceptable entry.

8-15 Report Name ZSDETAIL is the only acceptable entry. Select on UPCPRR11 Define on UPCRZS01

17-28 Copies, Reporting Levels Please see the REPORT parameter. Does not apply and Selection Criteria

30-32 Finest Level of Detail to Define whether you want information at the specified level UPCRZS01 Print on your report: CRT Carrier route EPT Entry Point Code BAT Batch Code 3DG Three-digit ZIP Code ZIP ZIP Code XRF Cross reference blank Default is XRF.

34 Print Page and Cumulative Define whether to print the page, and cumulative totals UPCRZS01 Totals on the report: Y Print totals. N Do not print totals. blank Default is Y.

38 Reset Page Numbers and Define how page numbers and position totals should be UPCRZS01 Cumulative Totals reset: N Do not reset.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 314 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

E Reset for each entry point. B Reset for each batch. blank Default is N.

60-67 Output Name Define the operating system-specific output Does not apply name/assignment for your reports. For z/OS, Windows, and Unix, define an external file name of up to 8 characters. Note: As delivered, Scripts and JCL have default report file names. If you choose to use this feature, you must define the output file in the Script or JCL as necessary. If you do not specify a value in position in this field, the report is written to:

• Windows, Unix - *.rpt • z/OS - MSRPRPT • IBM® i - MailStream Plus writes the output for this report to the PRNTRPT spool file (cannot be changed).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 315 Parameter Reference

RP INF

Optional: Use RP INF to supply text information that will appear on the printed reports and tags generated by MailStream Plus.

Note: If two or more xx INF parameters apply because they match the determining criteria, the priority order in which xx INF parameters are used is PA INF, BATINF, EP INF, and RP INF.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword RP INF is the only acceptable entry.

8-26 Reserved

28-33 Subkeyword Define the appropriate subkeyword. See Chapter Select on UPCPRI21 2 of this guide for more information on the and display on subkeywords used by RP INF. UPCPRI11

35-72 Information Data Define text information corresponding to the UPCPRI21 information type in the subkeyword field. You may type text here or use variables. See Chapter 2 of this guide for more information for a list of variable data for these positions. Note: If you are omitting components of a multi-part subkeyword, please insert blank spaces as place-holders in those components.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 316 Parameter Reference

RTYPES

Required to run the RTYPES utility. To do its job, the RTYPES parameter first invokes program MREX00 to place a key field on each header and each trailer record to help with re-sorting later in the process. The header records need to be sorted back into the order in which they were produced, because they were reordered by MailStream Plus processing. MRAT00 then matches up header and trailer records by their respective key fields, and copies other sort data from the header into the trailer records. Using the "limit feature" (positions 49-53 and 55) requires you to define a work file, MRNAWK. This feature significantly increases processing time. Complete these steps to run RTYPES: 1. Use program MREX00 to extract the header records from your input file. 2. Perform a pre-defined process (MailStream Plus). 3. Use program MRATS1 to sort the headers in the order of the trailers. 4. Use program MRAT00 to merge the headers and trailers and copy control information from the headers to their respective trailers.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword RTYPES is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Distinguishing Flag Position Define the starting position in the target area, to UPCRDEDT distinguish primary record segments from trailer record segments.

12-13 Distinguishing Flag Length Define length of the record segment that you to UPCRDEDT distinguish primary record segments from trailer record segments. Maximum is 30.

15-16 Distinguishing Algorithm Define one of the following codes to define the UPCRDEDT algorithm to distinguish primary record segments from trailer segments: CH Tells RTYPES that a change in the distinguishing flag defines a new logical record. EQ Tells RTYPES that any record with a distinguishing flag equal to the following constant defines a new logical record.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 317 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

NE Tells RTYPES with distinguishing marks not equal to the following constant defines the start of a new logical record.

18-47 Distinguishing Flag The field referenced by values EQ or NE in the UPCRDEDT Comparand Distinguishing Algorithm field. Otherwise, the field is ignored.

49-53 Limiting Number of May contain a maximum number of segments for UPCRDEDT Segments logical records to be processed normally. Logical records exceeding this value are processed according to the definition in the "Limit Exceeded Disposition" field. Example: If this field contains 00002, records with one header and one trailer are fine, but one header and two trailers exceed the limit.

55 Limit Exceeded Disposition If the "Limiting Number of Segments" field is not UPCRDEDT blank, this field must contain one of the following codes to define the handling for logical records exceeding that field value: X Drop the entire record. R Write the record to MREXOR, then drop from this mailing. Records going to the rejected records file will not have the appended data.

Note: We do not recommend using FILEDF MSSTOR to drop invalids ZIP Codes. RTYPES has no way to remove the original trailer records of these invalid ZIP Code records.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 318 Parameter Reference

RUNMSP

Use RUNMSP to regulate the four functions of MailStream Plus: Statistics, Presort, Posting, and Report generation. There are four fields in this parameter that allow you to turn these functions on or off as needed.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword RUNMSP is the only acceptable entry.

8 Run Statistics (ST) Define whether to run the Statistics (ST) function: UPCPSB01 Function Y Yes, run this function. N No, do not run this function. blank Default is Y.

10 Run Presort (PS) Function Define whether to run the Presort (PS) function: UPCPSB01 Y Yes, run this function. N No, do not run this function. blank Default is Y.

12 Run Posting (NA) Function Define whether to run the Posting (NA) function: UPCPSB01 Y Yes, run this function. N No, do not run this function. blank Default is Y.

14 Run Report (RP) Function Define whether to run the Report (RP) function: UPCPSB01 Y Yes, run this function. N No, do not run this function. blank Default is Y.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 319 Parameter Reference

S CODE

Optional: Use S CODE to define the location of the input seed name code. Ensure that each record's seed name code is unique within a key code. You may define one S CODE parameter per job. Each record selected by the S CODE parameter must have a non-blank key code. Please use K CODE to define the key code. See the L CODE and K CODE parameters for more information.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword S CODE is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Seed Name Location Define a value to define the input seed name location. UPCPNA11 Seed code fields containing binary zeroes or spaces are excluded from the seed name file. By default, the seed name file takes all records with seed codes, except those with blanks or binary zeroes.

12-13 Seed Name Code Define a value to define the input seed name code length UPCPNA11 Length (max length 22). The length of the Seed Name ID field in the Mail.dat *.snr file is 20 bytes. If a length larger than 20 bytes is specified here, the first 20 bytes will be used. This field allows up to 22 bytes because the data may also be used for the 22-byte Delivery Signature Confirmation ID field.

15-34 Seed Name Define values to use in the seed name test comparison. UPCPNA11 Comparison Values 36-55 If either of these values match the seed name code, the record is excluded from the seed name file.

How S CODE Works

The S CODE parameter points to the name/address file location of a seed name to be used by the Mail.dat *.snr file. It can be used to either exclude or include values from the output seed name file. If the S CODE value from the name/address record is equal to some value other than blank spaces or binary zeroes, it is included in the output seed name file. If you specify one or two comparative

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 320 Parameter Reference

values in positions 15-34 and 36-55, any S CODE that is equal to either of these values are treated as if they contain binary zeroes or spaces. In short, exclusion logic (comparison values not equal to or "NE") is implied. This is the reverse of some other Pitney Bowes Software product logic (Merge/Purge, for example), because it would be nearly impossible to define each seed name comparison value on parameters. Seed names must be unique for each record for tracking purposes. Mail.dat ignores the names that are excluded from the seed name file.

How Mail.dat Interprets and Uses Seed Names

Seed names can help a mailer troubleshoot delivery problems. Here's an example: Assume that you have a recipient that has complained because his magazine arrives late each month. The mailing list owner puts an S CODE parameter in her job to flag this customer's record. The seed name file tells the mail owner which bundle, bag, tray, and pallet the mailpiece is in, and the mailer can track down the delay by following the bag or tray.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 321 Parameter Reference

SCF PT

Optional: Use SCF PT to select SCFs as entry points without having to use the TB LKP parameter. This parameter includes: • SCF ID code • Entry Point ZIP Code • SCF constant • Current SCF(s) • Whether to apply various discount levels to one or all SCFs defined

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword SCF PT is the only acceptable entry.

8 Automatically Qualify All Define whether to qualify (check and validate) all Select on UPCPPD67 SCFs SCFs automatically: and display on UPCPPD65 Y Qualify all SCFs.

N Qualify only SCFs selected. blank Default is N. Note: If you specify Y in this field, you can define only one SCF PT parameter. If you specify N in this field, you can define one SCF PT parameter for each SCF, plus one default.

If you qualify all SCFs (Y in this field), you must add a TABLSZ B CODE to the ICP parameter file to increase the number of available batch code table entries to allow for each SCF. Currently, the number of SCFs is less than 500.

9 Include Offshore ZIP Define whether to Include offshore ZIP Codes in this UPCPPD67 Codes in this Entry Point entry point: Y Include offshore ZIP Codes. N Do not include offshore ZIP Codes. blank Default is Y.

10 Reserved

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 322 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

12-14 SCF ID Code Define the current SCFs. Specify a three-digit SCF UPCPPD67 code. When qualifying all SCFs, this is the default entry point code for ZIP Codes not found in the SCF table. The code here can either be an SCF code or any other code you wish to use. When not qualifying all SCFs, the SCF code is required, except that the default can be any code. Note: The 3-character SCF-ID is preceded with an S when posted to the record. Do not enter an S on the SCF PT parameter, but you will need to use the full 6-character code on all other parameters that use the entry point codes.

22-26 SCF Entry Point ZIP Code You MUST specify a ZIP Code in this field if you did UPCPPD67 not specify an L005 SCF ID code. If you do not specify a ZIP Code, then MailStream Plus uses the first valid ZIP Code found for the SCF. If you specify a ZIP Code, this becomes the entry point ZIP Code for the SCF. When qualifying all SCFs, the ZIP Code specified here only applies to the SCF ID Code you defined on this parameter. Note: If you defined a specific SCF ID code, no value is required here.

28-57 SCF Entry Point Constant This is an optional field. UPCPPD65 If this field is left blank, MailStream Plus fills in the field with the appropriate entry point information for each SCF, and the information will be used for the tray, bag, and/or pallet tags. If this field contains data, this data is only used when:

• The "Automatically Qualify All SCFs" field is N (or blank), or • If the "Automatically Qualify All SCFs" field is Y AND the SCF PT parameter is the default entry point. In this case, the data will be used for the default entry point.

Otherwise, review the FROM sub keyword to override the origin line information.

UPCPPD67 Note: If you specified Y in position 8 to automatically qualifying all SCFs, by default MailStream Plus places an N in positions 58 through 61. Also, any settings in positions 58 through

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 323 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

66 will apply to ALL the SCF entry points. To override this, define separate SCF PT parameters for the SCFs you are entering mail, and select the appropriate position 58-66 values for each one.

58 ADC Discount for this Define whether to attempt ADC discounts for this UPCPPD67 Entry Point entry point:

Y Attempt ADC discounts.

N Do not attempt ADC discounts.

blank Default is N.

59 DDU Discount for this SCF Define whether to attempt DDU discounts for this UPCPPD67 SCF:

Y Attempt DDU discounts.

N Do not attempt DDU discounts.

blank Default is N. DDU discounts, if selected, apply only to the ZIP Code specified in the SCF Entry Point ZIP Code field. If no ZIP Code is specified in that field, DDU discounts are based on the facility.

60 SCF Discount for this SCF Define whether to attempt SCF discounts for this UPCPPD67 SCF:

Y Attempt SCF discounts.

N Do not attempt SCF discounts.

blank Default is N.

61 NDC Discount for this SCF Define whether to attempt NDC discounts for this UPCPPD67 SCF:

Y Attempt NDC discounts.

X Attempt NDC discounts, applying them to mixed-level trays. Use option X with caution: in some instances this option splits mixed-level trays and impacts report results. N Do not attempt NDC discounts.

blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 324 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

62 In-County Discount for this Define whether to attempt In-County discounts for UPCPPD67 SCF this SCF:

Y Attempt in-county discounts. This rule applies per Batch for the > 50% rule and < 10,000 pieces. N Do not attempt in-county discounts.

X Give the in-county rate all the time (do not use the 50% rule when there are >10,000 pieces in the mailing). blank Default is Y.

63 Reserved

64 Entry Point Facility Type Define one of the following codes to define the entry UPCPPD67 point facility type:

A ASF B NDC C Origin SCF D DDU E Origin DDU H Transfer hub J Origin ADC K Origin NDC L Origin ASF N Non-determined (requires an INF DRPKEY/PLTKEY definition) O Origin (also DMU; requires an INF DRPKEY/PLTKEY definition) Q Origin AMF R ADC

S SCF

blank Default is S. Note: To ensure that MailStream Plus correctly determines the entry facility when specifying D (DDU) in this field, define an xx INF DRPKEY/PLTKEY parameter as well.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 325 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

65 Make no-minimum For this entry point, should no-minimum UPCPPD67 5-digit/scheme containers 5-digit/scheme containers be made for DDU entry for DDU entry USPS USPS Marketing Mail parcels? Marketing Mail parcels Y Make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. Option Y does NOT override N on any other entry point (XXX PT) parameters.

N Do not make no-minimum 5-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y. To enable this feature, you must define a "Y" or leave blank the "Small 5-Digit Indicator" field on the ALG PS parameter.

66 Make small origin Define whether to make small origin 3-digit/scheme UPCPPD67 3-digit/scheme containers containers for the current entry point: for this entry point Y Make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. Option Y does NOT override "N" in this field on any of the other entry point (XXX PT) parameters and does NOT make small origin containers for those entry points. N Do not make small origin 3-digit/scheme containers for this entry point. blank Default is Y. For Periodicals flats, this setting applies to Origin SCF containers instead of 3-digit/scheme containers. To enable this feature, you must define "Y" or leave blank the "Small 5-digit Indicator" field on the ALG PS parameter.

70 Use the Default SCF PT Specify whether to use the default SCF PT for ZIP UPCPPD67 for Matching SCF ZIP Codes that match the SCF ZIP Code defined for this Codes in Column 22-26 parameter:

Y Use the default SCF PT.

N Use the SCF that the ZIP Code goes to if defined. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 326 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

72 Default Indicator Specify whether this parameter defines the default UPCPPD67 indicator for the current mailing.

Y This parameter defines the default indicator for the current mailing. N This parameter does not define the default indicator for the current mailing. blank Default is N. Only one xxx PT parameter may have a Y in this position. If you are qualifying all SCFs, the value in the "SCF ID Code" field or "SCF Entry Point ZIP Code" field, whichever is specified, is the default entry point. If you have a Y in the "Automatically Qualify All SCFs" field, the settings in "Make...containers..." fields apply to ALL entry points.

SCF PT Features

The SCF PT parameter allows you to: • Define the default SCF PT parameter for a mailing • Define multiple SCF PT parameters for each SCF-based entry point • Define a single SCF PT parameter to define all SCFs as entry points • Define multiple entry SCF parameters for one mailing, allowing you to drop mailings at separate SCFs when this option benefits you.

Notes About Using SCF PT

• When choosing discounts such as DDU, SCF, and NDC, please verify that you meet the postal eligibility requirements as specified in the DMM. • Please note there is a maximum number of SCF PT parameters you can define for one MailStream Plus job: one for each SCF. See labeling list L005 in the DMM for a current list of SCFs. • You can have more than one type of XXX PT parameter in a single MailStream Plus job. However, if you use any combination of ADC PT, NDC PT and/or SCF PT parameters, you can only have one ENT PT parameter (and it must be marked as the default in position 72). • We suggest that you use separate entry SCFs when: • You calculate a savings by transporting your mailing to multiple SCFs. • You want all recipients to receive your mailing on the same day.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 327 Parameter Reference

• When you define an SCF PT parameter used with either a NDC PT or ADC PT parameter, MailStream Plus first attempts to match the input ZIP Code to an SCF. If MailStream Plus cannot make a ZIP/SCF match, it attempts to match to the NDC and ADC entry point. • For Marketing Mail letters, when also using NDC PT, EPROL will attempt to move AADC-qualified trays to the appropriate NDC (for NDC discounts), before rolling to the next entry point.

Notes About E CODE

When using the SCF PT parameter, the E CODE parameter should specify only one position for a length of six. Any other definition results in a parameter error.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 328 Parameter Reference

SCF SQ

Optional: Use SCF SQ to change the sortation sequences of SCF codes. There is no limit to how many SCF SQ parameters may be specified; from one to eight SCF sequences may be specified on each parameter. The SCF SQ parameter sequences SCFs within each individual entry point, it does not combine entry points to sequence all SCFs across one mailing.

For the SCF SQ parameter to function, the SCF sort sequence fields must be included in the sortation, either by using a pre-defined SRTFLD parameter that includes the fields, such as SRTFLD 0002, or by including 104, 204, and 304 sort fields in your SRTFLn parameters. Note: See the POSTPL, POSTBG, POSTBL, and SRTFLn listings for information on posting and sorting these SCF sequences.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword SCF SQ is the default entry. There is no limit to how many SCF SQ parameters may be specified. From 1 to 8 SCF sequences may be specified for each SCF SQ parameter.

8-10, 16-18, Original SCF Code The SCF Code may be any number from 001 to 999. UPCRDEDT 24-26, 32-34, SCF Codes may be specified in any order. 40-42, 48-50, 56-58, 64-66

12-14, 20-22, Sequence Number The sequence numbers may be any number from 1 to UPCRDEDT 28-30, 36-38, 999. 44-46, 52-54, Initial sequence numbers use their SCF codes. However, 60-62, 68-70 once sequence numbers change by using this parameter, none of the sequence numbers may relate to any SCF codes. For example: if the SCF 999 is changed to sequence number 1, then SCF 001 becomes sequence number 2, and so on. All of the sequence numbers for SCF codes 001 through 999 change from their initial settings in this example. Two or more SCF codes may have the same sequence number. The result is that they are sorted together as one SCF. But to do this you must specify each on this parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 329 Parameter Reference

SEQCHK

Optional: Use SEQCHK to perform sequence checking on your input name/address file, and to specify the action to take when a sequence error is found. You may define a sequence control field consisting of up to nine segments. Sequence checks occur after each read operation, before any MOVExx parameters, and after the EXITIN routine takes processing control (if defined).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword SEQCHK is the only acceptable entry.

8 Sequence Error Treatment Define how MailStream Plus handles any errors UPCPST70 encountered: B Bypass offending record. C Continue processing. E Terminate processing. I Ignore: continue processing; abandon sequence-checking.

10-12, 17-19, Sequence Field Segment Must contain the location of the field used to check the UPCPST70 24-26, 31-33, Locations sequence of the input Name/Address file. If necessary, 38-40, 45-47, these fields may be extended one position to the left. 52-54, 59-61, 66-68

13, 20, 27, Packed Sequence Field Must be blank or must contain a P to define that the UPCPST70 34, 41, 48, Indicator sequence field segment is in packed form, and should 55, 62, 69 be unpacked prior to use.

14-15, 21-22, Sequence Field Segment Define the lengths of each segment. The total of all field UPCPST70 28-29, 35-36, Lengths lengths may not exceed 99. 42-43, 49-50, 56-57, 63-64, 70-71

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 330 Parameter Reference

SERIAL

Optional: Use the SERIAL parameter to specify the starting mail sequence serial number. If you do not specify this parameter, MailStream Plus assumes a starting number of 000000001.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword SERIAL is the only acceptable entry.

8-16 Starting Mail Define the starting mail sequencing number. If you do UPCPST20 Sequencing Number not define a value, MailStream Plus assumes the default: 000000001.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 331 Parameter Reference

SFIMPB

Optional: Defines the input location of a 34-byte IM® package barcode and defines IM® package barcode fees for use with letters and flats. This definition will be placed in the Mail.dat® special barcode record (SFB).

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword SFIMPB is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 IM® package barcode Location of the 34-byte IM® package barcode to use for UPCPM343 Location letters and flats to claim special fees

12-13 Service Type ID 1 See the table of valid SFIMPB Service Type ID Codes UPCPM343 for options.

15-21 Service Fee for Service Format = 9999.99 UPCPM343 Type ID 1

23-24 Service Type ID 2 See the table of valid SFIMPB Service Type ID Codes UPCPM343 for options.

26-32 Service Fee for Service Format = 9999.99 UPCPM343 Type ID 2

34-35 Service Type ID 3 See the table of valid SFIMPB Service Type ID Codes UPCPM343 for options.

37-43 Service Fee for Service Format = 9999.99 UPCPM343 Type ID 3

45-46 Service Type ID 4 See the table of valid SFIMPB Service Type ID Codes UPCPM343 for options.

48-54 Service Fee for Service Format = 9999.99 UPCPM343 Type ID 4

56-57 Service Type ID 5 See the table of valid SFIMPB Service Type ID Codes UPCPM343 for options.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 332 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

59-65 Service Fee for Service Format = 9999.99 UPCPM343 Type ID 5

Table 9: SFIMPB Service Type ID Codes

Code Definition

A Reserved

B USPS® tracking

C Signature confirmation

D Certified Mail

DP Day-old Poultry (Live Animal)

E Insured

EB Insured (Bulk)

F Registered

G Return/Receipt/Merchandise

H Return Receipt (electronic)

HM Return Receipt (Form 3811)

I Restricted Delivery

J COD

K Certificate of Mailing

L Customs Surcharge

M Special Handling

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 333 Parameter Reference

Code Definition

NP Non-barcoded Parcel Fee

T Merchandise Return Service

U Certified with Return Receipt

V Registered with Return Receipt

X Parcel Air Lift

Y Day Certain Delivery

Z1 Adult Signature Required

Z2 Adult Signature Restricted

You can find the above service types in the Mail.dat® specification (SFR-1019).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 334 Parameter Reference

SRTFLD

Optional: Use SRTFLD to specify the sort key for the final sort of the name/address records and some MailStream Plus reports. The Presort function produces the data that makes up the sort key in the Detail Statistics records, re-checks the sort order, renumbers the pallets containers, and bundles, and assigns the final sort sequence number. If you do not specify SRTFLD, MailStream Plus assumes the default code, 0001.

You may specify either the SRTFLn parameter or the SRTFLD parameter - not both. Use these parameters to alter the mail sequence sortation, but not other required sort sequences. Using custom SRTFLn parameters can result in invalid presorts. Users must verify that the resulting presort meets USPS regulations.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword SRTFLD is the only acceptable entry.

8-11 Sort Code Value Define one of the following 4-digit codes that MailStream Plus will UPCRDEDT use to build a sort key. MailStream Plus bases sort keys upon the input data you provide: 0001 Use the USPS Marketing Mail sequence sortation. 0002 Include NDC and SCF sequence numbers. 0003 Do not include Rate Sequence Sort field. 0004 Do not place largest bundles and trays on the bottom of pallets. 0005 Do not include entry point. 0006 Do not include the pallet sequence level. 0007 Do not include the container sequence level. 0008 Do not include the bundle sequence level.

0009 Current USPS Qualification sequence. This is the Current USPS QUAL sequence as defined by PAVE™ and cannot be changed in any way.

1101 Similar to 0001, except pieces are reversed in the container to accommodate some insertion hardware that stacks pieces face-up. Includes NDC and SCF sequencing.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 335 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Specify this parameter, instead of the SRTFLn parameter, to define the order of the sort fields. If you do not specify a sort field, MailStream Plus assumes the default, 0001.

Sort Field Values and Examples

If a data field is not selected for a mail sequence sort, it is still present in the data area of the detail records.p

SRTFLD 0001

Sort Field Sort Values

Machine/USPS 039

Entry point code 001

Batch code 002

ZIP Code for entry destination 003

Presort grouping 004

Pallet sort fields 102 103 105 106 107 108 109

Destination discount separator 006

Zone separator 007

Invert thickness 008

Sort container type 009

Bag sort field 202 203 205 206 207 208 209

Bundle sort field 303 305 306 307 308 309

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 336 Parameter Reference

Sort Field Sort Values

Mailpiece ZIP Code 014

Carrier Route 016

WS/LOT Data 066

Specifying the above sort fields is the equivalent of defining the following:

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 102 103 105 106 107 108 109 006 007 008 SRTFL2 009 202 203 205 206 207 208 209 303 305 306 307 308 309 014 SRTFL3 016 066

SRTFLD 0002 SRTFLD 0002 includes NDC and SCF sequencing numbers in mail sequence sortation. Specifying SRTFLD 0002 is the same as defining the following:

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 014 016 066

SRTFLD 0003 SRTFLD 0003 excludes the Rate Sequence Sort field (pallet, container, or bundle) in the mail sequence sortation. Specifying SRTFLD 0003 is the same as defining the following:

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 101 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 006 007 SRTFL2 008 009 201 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 301 303 304 305 306 SRTFL3 307 308 309 014 016 066

SRTFLD 0004 SRTFLD 0004 prevents MailStream Plus from putting the largest bundles and trays on the bottom of pallets in the mail sequence sortation.

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 009 010 011 014 016 066

SRTFLD 0005 SRTFLD 0005 prevents MailStream Plus from including entry points in the mail sequence sortation.

SRTFL1 039 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 014 016 066

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 337 Parameter Reference

SRTFLD 0006 SRTFLD 0006 prevents MailStream Plus from including pallet sequence levels in the mail sequence sortation.

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 101 102 103 104 105 107 108 109 006 007 SRTFL2 008 009 010 011 014 016 066

SRTFLD 0007 SRTFLD 0007 prevents MailStream Plus from including container sequence levels in the mail sequence sortation.

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 201 202 203 204 205 SRTFL2 207 208 209 011 014 016 066

SRTFLD 0008 SRTFLD 0008 prevents MailStream Plus from including bundle sequence levels in the mail sequence sortation.

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 301 302 303 304 SRTFL2 305 307 308 309 014 016 066

SRTFLD 0009 SRTFLD 0009 is the current USPS qualification (QUAL) sequence as defined by PAVE and cannot be changed in any way.

SRTFLD 1101 SRTFLD 1101 sorting is similar to SRTFLD 0001, except that: • Pieces are reversed in the container (bag, tray, or bundles on pallets) to accommodate certain insertion machines. Pieces are stacked face-up. • NDC and SCF sequencing are enabled.

SRTFL1 039 001 002 003 004 102 103 105 106 107 108 109 006 007 008 SRTFL2 009 202 203 205 206 207 208 209 303 305 306 307 308 309 511 SRTFL3 014 016 066

SRTFLD and Your Sorting Equipment

The SRTFLD parameter provides a bridge between MailStream Plus and your sorting equipment. Based upon the sort key generated by the SRTFLD parameter, MailStream Plus produces the sort

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 338 Parameter Reference

fields - in order - required to produce the correct output in the appropriate sequence. Here are two methods for arranging sort fields: • Order the fields so that your residual mail is processed before presort and carrier route mail. • Order the fields so that like-sized trays are processed together. In either case, the SRTFLD parameter allows you to specify the correct order, ensuring that your tags, facing slips, and/or envelopes are oriented correctly for your sorting hardware. Note: In the SRTFLD xxxx layouts, 039 was added. If your job is not using the DuoSort™ Workshare Manager subcomponent, do not add 039 to your modified SRTFLx parameters.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 339 Parameter Reference

SRTFLn

Optional: Use SRTFLn to specify the sort key for the final sort of the name/address records and some MailStream Plus reports. The Presort function produces the data that makes up the sort key in the Detail Statistics records, re-checks the sort order, renumbers the pallets containers, and bundles, and assigns the final sort sequence number. If you do not specify SRTFLn or SRTFLD, MailStream Plus assumes the default: SRTFLD 0001. Note: You may specify either the SRTFLn parameter or the SRTFLD parameter, but not both parameters. Use these parameters to alter the mail sequence sortation, but not other required sort sequences. Using custom SRTFLn parameters can result in invalid presorts. Users must verify that the resulting presort meets USPS regulations.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-5 Parameter Keyword SRTFL is the only acceptable entry.

6 SRTFL Definition Number Must contain a digit, from 1-9, indicating the UPCRDEDT current SRTFL definition. Each SRTFL you define must have a greater definition number than the previous one.

8-10, 12-14, Sort Key Sort Fields Define the individual sort fields to include in the UPCRDEDT 16-18, 20-22, sort key. See SRTFLn Sort Key Codes: Detail 24-26, 28-30, Statistics Fields for valid key codes and how 32-34, 36-38, they relate to the Detail Statistics records fields. 40-42, 44-46, 48-50, 52-54, 56-58, 60-62, 64-66

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 340 Parameter Reference

SRTFLn Key Code-to-Sort Fields Reference

If a data field is not selected for a mail sequence sort, it remains in the data area of the detail records. The following table lists and describes the valid sort key codes and their corresponding Detail Statistics fields.

SRTFLn Sort Key Codes: Detail Statistics Fields The following table lists the valid MailStream Plus sort key codes and their corresponding Detail Statistics fields.

Code Field Name Code Field Name

001 Entry point 022 Pallet - underweight

002 Batch code 023 Sack under force

003 ZIP Code for entry destination 024 Foreign

004 Presort grouping (see 651-669) 025 Container type

005 Pallet sort field (see 101-109) 026 Trayed mail

006 Destination discount separator 027 Barcode prohibited

007 Zone separator (see 401-411) 028 Sort level discount

008 Invert thickness 029 Carrier discount

009 Sort container type (see 421-428) 030 ZIP + 4 discount

010 Bag sort field (see 201-209) 031 Zone discount

011 Bundle sort field (see 301-309) 032 Destination discount - local

012 Original Batch 033 Destination discount - city

013 Original entry point 034 Destination discount - NDC

014 Mailpiece ZIP Code 035 Destination discount - SCF

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 341 Parameter Reference

Code Field Name Code Field Name

015 Piece ID 036 Destination discount - DDU

016 Carrier route 037 Destination discount - None

017 Firm bundle number 038 Destination discount - ADC

018 Starting serial number 039 Machine/USPS sort (see also 431, 432)

019 Statement indicator 040 Carrier sub-group discount

020 Unique 3-digit 041 Piece rolled flag

021 Presort group 066 WS-LOT data; 511 Bundle, Reversed in Container

SRTFLn Sort Key Codes: Pallet, Bag, and Bundle Sort Fields

Pallet Bag Bundle Field Name

101 201 301 NDC sequence sort field

102 202 302 Rate sequence sort field (for example, Presort, Carrier Route)

103 203 303 Granularity sort field (see SRTFLn Sort Key Codes: Pallet-, Bag-, and Bundle-Level Sort Field Indicators)

104 204 304 SCF sequence

105 205 305 ZIP sequence sort field

106 206 306 Level of presort sort field (see Presort Levels).

107 207 307 ZIP Code sort field

108 208 308 Unique code sort level

109 209 309 Pallet, bag/tray, or bundle number sort level

310 Bundle destination carrier route.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 342 Parameter Reference

SRTFLn Sort Key Codes: Pallet-, Bag-, and Bundle-Level Sort Field Indicators

Pallet Bag Bundle Field Name

121 221 321 None/unknown

122 222 322 Single Carrier Route

123 223 323 Merged 5-digit Scheme (L001)

124 224 324 5-digit Scheme Carrier Routes (L001)

125 225 325 5-digit Scheme (L001, L606)

126 226 326 Merged 5-digit

127 227 327 5-digit Carrier Route

128 228 328 3-digit Carrier Route

129 229 329 5-digit Scheme (L007)

130 230 330 5-digit

131 231 331 5-digit Scheme (Automation)

132 232 332 5-digit FSS Scheme

133 233 333 FSS Facility

134 234 334 S3D

135 235 335 3-digit

136 236 336 3-digit Scheme

137 237 337 Merged 3-digit

139 239 339 SCF

140 240 240 AADC

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 343 Parameter Reference

Pallet Bag Bundle Field Name

141 241 341 ADC

142 242 342 ASF- CSA Level 1

143 243 343 NDC

145 245 345 Origin Mixed ADC

146 246 346 Mixed AADC - CSA Level 3

147 247 347 Mixed ADC - CSA Level 4

148 248 348 Mixed (Origin) NDC - CSA Level 5

149 249 349 Residual - CSA Last [Level]

SRTFLn Zone Separator Individual Indicators

Value Zone Separator Value Zone Separator

401 DDU 407 Zone 4

402 SCF 408 Zone 5

403 Local 409 Zone 6

404 Zone 1 410 Zone 7

405 Zone 2 411 Zone 8

406 Zone 3 412 Zone 9

SRTFLn Sort Container Individual Indicators

Value Indicator

421 Number 1 bag

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 344 Parameter Reference

Value Indicator

422 Number 2 bag

423 Number 3 bag

424 Number 7 bag

425 2-foot tray

426 1-foot tray

427 Flat tray

428 EMM tray

Machine Mail and USPS Mail Sort Keys

Value Indicator

431 USPS sorted mail

432 Machine sorted mail

SRTFLn Misc. Special Field Indicator

Value Indicator

511 Bundle sort field, reversed in container or on pallets This field is used in place of sort fields 011 and 301-309.

SRTFLn Presort Group Individual Indicators

Value Indicator

651 Commingled pallet pieces

652 Automation palletized pieces

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 345 Parameter Reference

Value Indicator

653 Machinable palletized pieces

654 Non-automation palletized pieces

655 Automation carrier palletized pieces

656 Enhanced carrier palletized pieces

657 Merged non-palletized pieces

658 Automation non-palletized pieces

659 Machinable non-palletized pieces

660 Non-automation non-palletized pieces

661 Automation-compatible carrier non-palletized pieces

662 Enhanced carrier non-palletized pieces

663 Unqualified single pieces

664 Invalid ZIP Code pieces

665 Machine sorted pieces with a Delivery Point Barcode

666 Machine sorted pieces without a Delivery Point Barcode

667 Carrier Route

668 Non-Machinable palletized pieces

669 Non-Machinable non-palletized pieces

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 346 Parameter Reference

SRVFEE

Optional: Use SRVFEE to specify a service fee for each extra service code. This parameter is required when defining the *.SFR file. Note: For more information on extra service codes, please see the USPS Publication 199 Intelligent Mail® Package Barcode (IM® pB) Implementation Guide.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-5 Parameter Keyword SRVFEE is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Extra Service Code 1 Define three numeric characters from 001 to 999 for extra UPCPM390 service code 1. The default value is spaces.

12-18 Service Fee for Extra Define an amount in the format 9999.99 for the fee for UPCPM390 Service Code 1 extra service code 1. The default value is zeroes.

20-22 Extra Service Code 2 Define three numeric characters from 001 to 999 for extra UPCPM390 service code 2. The default value is spaces.

24-30 Service Fee for Extra Define the fee for extra service code 2 in the format UPCPM390 Service Code 2 9999.99. The default value is zeroes.

32-34 Extra Service Code 3 Define three numeric characters from 001 to 999 for extra UPCPM390 service code 3. The default value is spaces.

36-42 Service Fee for Extra Define the fee for extra service code 3 in the format UPCPM390 Service Code 3 9999.99. The default value is zeroes.

44-46 Extra Service Code 4 Define three numeric characters from 001 to 999 for extra UPCPM390 service code 4. The default value is spaces.

48-54 Service Fee for Extra Define the fee for extra service code 4 in the format UPCPM390 Service Code 4 9999.99. The default value is zeroes.

56-58 Extra Service Code 5 Define three numeric characters from 001 to 999 for extra UPCPM390 service code 5. The default value is spaces.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 347 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

60-66 Service Fee for Extra Define the fee for extra service code 5 in the format UPCPM390 Service Code 5 9999.99. The default value is zeroes.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 348 Parameter Reference

SRVFRQ

Optional: Use SRVFRQ to define the posting frequency of the alternate service type ID for Intelligent Mail® barcodes. You may use this parameter to specify the criteria for using the alternate service type ID in the Intelligent Mail® barcode. Some sample posting options include every record, first or last record of a bundle or bag/tray, or every Nth record (5-digit select for Nth)

Note: When using the SRVFRQ parameter, you must also specify a POSTRC parameter with a location to post the Carrier Route Discount Indicator in your job. Positions 8-30 of this parameter cannot be used when doing basic serial number assignment or when you are using a predefined outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode (you have defined B in position 44 of the IMBOUT or you have defined P in position 11 of the IMBOUT parameter). Positions 31-55 of this parameter cannot be used when doing basic serial number assignment or when you are when you are using a predefined inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode (you have specified B in position 44 of the IMBOUT or you have specified P in position 11 of IMBINB parameter). The Service Type ID (STID) of single pieces rate mail are not assigned an alternate STID.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword SRVFRQ is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Alternate Outbound This field must define the alternate non-automation UPCPM314 Non-Automation Service Service Type ID to be used. This value will also be type ID for Service Type used for full service/basic Intelligent Mail® barcodes if IDs/Service Type for IM® positions 12 through 14 are blank. package Barcode Note: The USPS adds and changes Service Type ID codes regularly. Please check your current USPS documentation for a list of valid codes.

12-14 Alternate Outbound Full This field must be blank for IM® package barcodes and UPCPM314 Service Type ID not used Priority Mail™ using Intelligent Mail® barcodes. This for IM® package Barcode field may contain the Alternate Service Type ID used or Priority Mail using for full service/basic service eligible mailpieces. If these Intelligent Mail® barcode columns are blank, the default is the same Alternate Service Type ID used for the Non-Automation Service Type ID (positions 8-10). This field cannot be left blank if ALG PP position 10 is "F" or "Y".

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 349 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

Note: The USPS adds and changes new codes regularly, so please check your current USPS documentation for a list of valid codes.

16 Posting Frequency Option Define the posting frequency option for outbound UPCPM314 for Outbound Intelligent Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers: Mail® Barcode Numbers F First record (First/Last Extension for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

L Last record (First/Last Extension for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

N Every Nth record (Nth Record Extension for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

U User-defined character in name/address record (Position in Name/Address Record of User-Defined Character for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Number and Alternate Service Type ID Code Trigger for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

blank Do not use an alternate Service Type ID for outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers.

If you specify F or L, you must also define the following parameters:

• POSTEI - Post Entry Point Information • POSTBI - Post Batch Code Information • POSTLI - Post Pallet Number • POSTCI - Post Container Number • POSTPI - Post Bundle Number

18-22 Nth Record Extension for Define the nth record extension for the outbound UPCPM314 Outbound Intelligent Mail® Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. If Posting Frequency Barcode Numbers Option for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers = N, this position must contain a value from 2 through 99999.

24-26 Position in Name/Address Define the position in name and address record of the UPCPM314 Record of User-Defined user-defined character that triggers the use of the Character for Outbound alternate Service Type ID for outbound Intelligent Mail® Intelligent Mail® Barcode barcode numbers. Must not be blank when Posting Numbers Frequency Option for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers = U. If you specify a value for this position, you must also specify a value in position 28 to define the trigger character in your input file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 350 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

28 Alternate Service Type ID Define the unique character in your input file that UPCPM315 Trigger for Outbound triggers the use of the alternate Service Type ID code Intelligent Mail® Barcode for outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. This Numbers position must contain a value when Alternate Service Type ID Trigger for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers = U. If you specify a value for this position, you must also define a value for Position in Name/Address Record of User-Defined Character for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers to define the location of the trigger character in your input file.

30 First/Last Extension for If Posting Frequency Option for Outbound Intelligent UPCPM315 Outbound Intelligent Mail® Mail® Barcode Numbers = F or L, this position must Barcode Numbers contain one of the following extension codes: B Bag or tray P Bundle

31-36 Reserved

37-39 Alternate Service Type ID Define the three-digit alternate Service Type ID for UPCPM315 for Inbound Intelligent inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. Mail® Barcode Note: The USPS adds and changes new codes regularly, so please check your current USPS documentation for a list of valid codes. MailStream Plus does not validate the Service Type ID entered in this field.

41 Posting Frequency Option Define the posting frequency option for inbound UPCPM315 for Inbound Intelligent Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers: Mail® Barcode Numbers F First record (First/Last Extension for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

L Last record (First/Last Extension for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

N Every Nth record (Nth Record Extension for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

U User-defined character in name/address record (Position in Name/Address Record of User-Defined Character for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Number and Alternate Service Type ID Code Trigger for Outbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 351 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

blank Do not use an alternate Service Type ID for outbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers.

F First record (First/Last Extension for Inbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers)

• POSTEI - Post Entry Point Information • POSTBI - Post Batch Code Information • POSTLI - Post Pallet Number • POSTCI - Post Container Number • POSTPI - Post Bundle Number

43-47 Nth Record Extension for Define the nth record extension for the inbound UPCPM315 Inbound Intelligent Mail® Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. If the Posting Barcode Numbers Frequency Option for Inbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers field = N, this position must contain a value from 2 through 99999.

49-51 Position in Name/Address Define the position in name and address record of the UPCPM315 Record of User-Defined user-defined character that triggers the use of the Character for Inbound Alternate Service Type ID code for inbound Intelligent Intelligent Mail® Barcode Mail® barcode numbers. Must not be blank when you Numbers specify U for position 41. If you specify a value for this position, you must also specify a value in position 53 to define the trigger character in your input file.

53 Alternate Service Type ID Define the unique character in your input file that UPCPM315 Trigger for Inbound triggers the use of the Alternate Service Type ID code Intelligent Mail® Barcode for inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode numbers. This Numbers position must contain a value when Posting Frequency Option for Inbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers (position 41) contains U. If you specify a value for this position, you must also define a value in positions 49-51 to define the location of the trigger character in your input file.

55 First/Last Extension for If position 41 contains F or L, this position must contain UPCPM315 Inbound Intelligent Mail® one of the following extension codes: Barcode Numbers B Bag or tray P Bundle

This value must not be blank when Posting Frequency Option for Inbound Intelligent Mail® Barcode Numbers (position 41) is F or L.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 352 Parameter Reference

TABLSZ

Optional: Use TABLSZ to override the internal table sizes (batch code, entry point, piece attributes, list codes, or statements of mailing/summaries) with a table you specify. You must use this parameter if you plan to generate more than 200 batches or list codes. (We recommend that you allow the ENT PT and P ATTR records to default). This parameter also allows you to process and store internal calculation records on a disk file as they are used.

The default batch/list code table size used by MailStream Plus is calculated as the greater of either 200 or the actual number of batch/list codes present in the job. MailStream Plus counts the ENT PT and P ATTR parameters and automatically adjusts the table size for those two parameters. The TABLSZ parameter is rarely used, since MailStream Plus typically handles memory management. However, you must use the TABLSZ parameter if you are also using the B CODE and/or L CODE parameters to define the amount by which they exceed the default values.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword TABLSZ is the only acceptable entry. Does not apply

8-13 Subkeyword Define the keyword to define the table you wish to define: • B CODE - UPCPST60 • B CODE - Batch code table • CQT - UPCRMD01 • CQT - Mail.dat *.cqt (container quantity) merge table • DTRECS - • DTRECS - Number of Detail Records to table at one UPCRDEDT time in the Posting function. In the Posting function's • ENT PT - UPCPPD10 execution log, the table size is referred to as TLBLKS, • EP MIN - but you must define TABLSZ (DTRECS) to change automatically, via the table's size. import program • ENT PT - Entry Point table • EP ROL - • EP MIN - Entry Point Minimums table automatically, via • EP ROL - Entry Point Roll table import program • INF - BATINF, EP INF, and RP INF tables • INF - UPCPRI11 • L CODE - List Code table • L CODE - UPCPST20 • P ATTR - Piece Attributes table • P ATTR - UPCPPA11 • PQT - Mail.dat *.pqt (package quantity) merge table • PQT - UPCRMD01 • STMT - Statements of Mailing; and Mailing Statement • STMT - automatically, summary reports via import program • TLBLKS - Allows you to specify how many threaded • TLBLKS - list segment blocks to use for this presort. Default is UPCRDEDT 1,000 for the initial allocation, and 100 for subsequent allocations. NOTE: When using MailStream Plus to sort your input file into Walk-sequence/LOT order (X

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 353 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

in position 46 of the ZIP IN parameter), please note that the TABLSZ parameter with P ATTR as the subkeyword impacts a common table used by both the Piece ID and the Walk-sequence/LOT fields. In this case, you will probably need a TABLSZ P ATTR table several times larger than the number of P ATTR parameters in your job.

Except for the example above, we recommend that you do not use TABLSZ P ATTR to manually control the size of the P ATTR table, and instead let MailStream Plus control the table's size.

15-20 Initial Table Size Value indicating the size of your table: B CODE - UPCPST60

You cannot use this option if you specified the STMT • CQT - UPCRMD01 subkeyword. Maximums are also dependent upon • DTRECS - available memory. This field is ignored for the STMT UPCRDEDT subkeyword. • ENT PT - UPCPPD10 To allow for delivery stop information when doing a Line • EP MIN - of Travel or Walk-Sequence Carrier Route mailing, the automatically, via internal P ATTR table size in the MSPS00 step defaults import program to a minimum of 500 entries. • EP ROL - Note: All maximum values are dependent on the automatically, via available memory. import program • INF - UPCPRI11 • All Open Systems Platforms: • L CODE - UPCPST20 • P ATTR - UPCPPA11 • DTRECS - Maximum is 20000; default is 5000. • PQT - UPCRMD01 • z/OS, IBM i, Windows, and Unix: • TLBLKS - UPCRDEDT • B CODE - Maximum is 9390; default is the greater of 200 or the number of ENT PT parameters used. • CQT - Maximum is 9999; default is 3000. • ENT PT - Maximum is 9390; default is the number of ENT PT parameters used. • EP MIN - Maximum is 9999; default is the number of EP MIN parameters used. • EP ROL - Maximum is 9999; default is the number of EP ROL parameters used. • INF - Maximum is 9999; default is the number of BATINF, EP INF, and RP INF parameters used. • L CODE - Maximum is 9999; default is 200. All maximum values are dependent on the available memory. • P ATTR - Maximum is 30000; default is the number of P ATTR records used. • PQT - PQT Maximum is 45,000. Default is 3000, except IBM i, for which the default is 15000.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 354 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

• TLBLKS - Maximum depends on available memory. Default is 1000 for the initial allocation. • B CODE - Maximum is 9390; default is the greater of 200 or the number of ENT PT parameters used.

25 Disk File Define a code to define whether to store data in internal Does not apply memory or on a disk file. Note: You can only use this option with the STMT or TLBLKS subkeyword.

If you specified the STMT subkeyword: Y Use the disk file to store internal calculation records. N Do not use disk file. Use memory instead. blank Default is N.

If you specified the TLBLKS subkeyword: Y Store the internal calculation records to disk. N Do not store the internal calculation records to disk. Use memory instead. You may gain speed at the cost of higher memory use, a decision that we leave up to you. blank Default is Y.

Note: If you are using z/OS, and you select a disk option, you must pre-define a VSAM KSDS file for MSWKWK. This file is also used as a work file for some reports (for example, North/South bag and tray tags).

27-32 Table Size - Subsequent Define a value to define the size of additional table Does not apply Allocation allocations. Note: You can only use this option if you specified the TLBLKS subkeyword. The TLBLKS maximum depends upon available memory; the default is 100.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 355 Parameter Reference

TB LKP

Optional: The TB LKP parameter can be used to construct batch codes, entry point codes, list codes, and piece IDs, or to identify other types of information. This parameter defines: • Table numbers • Argument locations • Results locations Note: This parameter does not currently apply to the IBM® i platform.

The Table Lookup parameter specifies character strings ("Results") to be placed in the input name/address records, based on the presence in those records of other strings ("Arguments"). This parameter may be used to construct batch codes, entry point codes, list codes, and piece IDs. The Table Lookup operations defined by the parameters are performed after the ZIP Code has been located, and before batch code, entry point code, list code or piece ID extraction. Additionally, this parameter may be used to construct conditional statements to verify the existence of specific conditions, prior to processing the batch code. Each Table must be defined contiguously. For instance, if the first line in the TB LKP parameter specifies Table 2, then all Table 2 lines must follow before any TB LKP lines are processed with a different Table number. The default TB LKP line must be contiguous with the non-default TB LKP lines for the same table number. If there are no non-default lines for the same table number, then the default line acts like a MOVE parameter, moving the specified default value to the result location in all records. The first non-default line for each table number must contain the location and length of the argument and result fields. That portion of each argument and result values beyond the specified length must be blank in all parameters. The argument ranges specified for each table number may not overlap. You can have up to 999 TB LKP parameters in a single job.

Position Field Name Description

1-6 Parameter Keyword TB LKP is the only acceptable entry.

8 Table Number Define a value in the range 1-9, representing the table number to which this lookup definition applies. Note: Table lookups are executed by Table Number (1, 2, 3, and so on), and not in the order in which they are encountered in the parameter file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 356 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description

10-12 Argument Location Define the input record location for the argument. This field should only be specified for the first parameter of each TB LKP table.

14 Argument Length Define the value representing the length of the argument specified in the Argument Location. This field should only be specified for the first parameter of each TB LKP table.

16-18 Result Location Define the value representing the location of the resulting output. This field should only be specified for the first parameter of each TB LKP table.

20 Result Length Define the value representing the length of the Result value. This field should only be specified for the first parameter of each TB LKP table.

22-30 Low Argument Value Define the value representing the lowest value in the comparison argument range. Valid argument values are:

• 000000000 through 999999999 • A through ZZZZZZZZZ • blank: A high value does not apply.

Value should be left-justified.

32-40 High Argument Value Define the value representing the highest value in a comparison argument range. Value should be left-justified.

42-50 Result Value Define the value that will be placed in the output name/address record. Value should be left-justified.

Default Result Values

You may specify a default result (to apply to records whose arguments do not match any of the argument ranges provided) for each table number as follows: • Positions 10-14 must contain "NOHIT" • Positions 42-50 must contain the default result value If the default parameter is the first (or only) line for the specified table number, then positions 16-20 must specify the location and length of the result string. If there are also non-default lines following, then the first of these must still contain values in positions 16-20, and these values must be the same as those provided in the default line. If the default line follows the first non-default parameter (for the same table), then positions 16-20 may be blank. If positions 16-20 are not blank, then they must contain the same values as those provided on the first non-default line.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 357 Parameter Reference

The default TB LKP line must be contiguous with the non-default TB LKP lines for the same Table number.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 358 Parameter Reference

U CODE

Optional: Mail.dat standards require that each name/address record have a unique piece code to identify the record in the *.pdr Mail.dat file. Use the U CODE parameter to define the location of this code in the input Name/Address record. The unique piece code is written to the Piece Detail Record file (.pdr) and populates the PDR-1018. If you do not provide a U CODE location, MailStream Plus uses the 9-byte Control Sequence sort field.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword U CODE is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Unique Define the input record location of the piece code for Mail.dat. UPCPNA11 Piece Code

12-13 Length of Unique Piece Define the length of the piece code defined "Location of Unique Piece UPCPNA11 Code Code" field. The maximum length allowed is 22.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 359 Parameter Reference

UDATAI

Optional: Use UDATAI to identify the location of user-defined data in the input record for inbound mailpieces. The user-defined fields are not indexed. You can use these fields to store descriptive information, such as department name.

Note: The UDATAI parameter is only required if you are creating the Mail Piece file for MAIL360 Data Manager processing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword UDATAI is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Define the location of User-Defined Field 1 in the input record. UPCPM346 User-Defined Field 1

12-13 Length of User-Defined Define the length of User-Defined Field 1 in the input record. UPCPM346 Field 1 Note: The maximum length allowed is 64.

15-17 Location of Define the location of User-Defined Field 2 in the input record. UPCPM346 User-Defined Field 2

19-20 Length of User-Defined Define the length of User-Defined Field 2 in the input record. UPCPM346 Field 2 Note: The maximum length allowed is 64.

22-24 Location of Define the location of User-Defined Field 3 in the input record. UPCPM346 User-Defined Field 3

26-27 Length of User-Defined Define the length of User-Defined Field 3 in the input record. UPCPM346 Field 3 Note: The maximum length allowed is 64.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 360 Parameter Reference

UDATAS

Optional: Use the UDATAS parameter to identify the location of user-defined data in the input record for the mail piece set. The user-defined fields are not indexed. You can use these fields to store descriptive information, such as department name.

Note: The UDATAS parameter is only required if you are creating the Mail Piece file for MAIL360 Data Manager processing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword UDATAS is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Define the location of User-Defined Field 1 in the input record. UPCPM380 User-Defined Field 1

12-13 Length of User-Defined Define the length of User-Defined Field 1 in the input record. UPCPM380 Field 1 Note: The maximum length allowed is 64.

15-17 Location of Define the location of User-Defined Field 2 in the input record. UPCPM380 User-Defined Field 2

19-20 Length of User-Defined Define the length of User-Defined Field 2 in the input record. UPCPM380 Field 2 Note: The maximum length allowed is 64.

22-24 Location of Define the location of User-Defined Field 3 in the input record. UPCPM380 User-Defined Field 3

26-27 Length of User-Defined Define the length of User-Defined Field 3 in the input record. UPCPM380 Field 3 Note: The maximum length allowed is 64.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 361 Parameter Reference

UFTxx

Optional: Use the UFTxx parameter to define text to print at the bottom of your reports. MailStream Plus prints any footer you define at the bottom of every page of each report. You may specify up to four footer lines.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-3 Parameter Keyword UFT is the only acceptable entry.

4 Footer Line Number Define the Footer line number: 1, 2, 3, or 4. UPCPPX04

5 Footer Line Side Define the side of the footer line on which this text will appear: UPCPPX04 A Left side of the line B Right side of the line

7-72 Footer Text The text that will appear at the bottom of each report page. UPCPPX04

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 362 Parameter Reference

UHDxx

Optional: Use UHDxx to define any additional text will be printed at the top of every page of each report. MailStream Plus prints any heading you define at the top of every page of each report. You may define up to four header lines.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-3 Parameter Keyword UHD is the only acceptable entry.

4 Header Line Number Define the header line number: 1, 2, 3, or 4. UPCPPX04

5 Header Line Side Define the side of the header line on which this text will appear: UPCPPX04 A Left side of the line B Right side of the line

7-72 Header Text The text that will appear at the top of each report page. UPCPPX04

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 363 Parameter Reference

ZIP IN

Required. Use ZIP IN to define the location and format of the input ZIP Codes. If you are sorting your mail into Walk-Sequence order prior to MailStream Plus, you must sort only by the ZIP Code, Carrier Route, and Walk-Sequence fields. MailStream Plus will sort the batch and entry point fields as required.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Keyword ZIP IN is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Location of Input ZIP Must contain the location of the input ZIP Code. UPCPST10 Code

12 Format of Input ZIP Define a code to define the format of the input ZIP Code: UPCPST10 Code C ZIP Code is in display (character) form. P ZIP Code is in packed form (3 bytes). If the ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Code are together in a 5-byte field, specify byte 1. MailStream Plus ignores the sign position. F ZIP Code (5- or 9-digit) is floating within the ZIP Code field. The record location defined in the Location of Input ZIP Code field defines the right-most location of search field. B ZIP Code is a 3-byte binary number. If 5-digit ZIP Codes are stored in 4-byte field, use B and specify the location of the second byte in the Location of Input ZIP Code field. 9 9-digit ZIP Code is a 4-byte binary number.

14-16 Location of the Input ZIP Define the Input record location of the ZIP + 4 Code. Must be blank UPCPST10 + 4 Add-on if "Format of Input ZIP Code" contains 9; optional if "Format of Input ZIP Code" contains F. To qualify a mailpiece as Automation-compatible in Letters or Flats, both the ZIP + 4 Code and the Delivery Point Code (DPC) must be specified on this parameter (Input DPC format and Input ZIP + 4 Code add-on). If the DPC is not also specified, the name/address records are presorted as non-automation.

18 Format of Input ZIP + 4 Define the format of the input ZIP + 4 Code: UPCPST10 Add-on C ZIP + 4 Code is in display (character) form. P ZIP + 4 Code is in packed form (3 bytes). If the ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Code are together in a 5-byte field, specify

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 364 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

byte 3. MailStream Plus ignores the ZIP Code and the sign position. B ZIP + 4 Code is in a 2-byte binary field. blank No ZIP + 4 Codes are used.

20-22 Location of the Input Define the location of the input Carrier Route Code. MailStream Plus UPCPST10 Carrier Route Code assumes that this field is in 4-character alphanumeric format, with one of the following formats:

• Bnnn - Lock box Section • Cnnn - Carrier Route • Gnnn - General Delivery Unit • Hnnn - Highway Contract Number • Rnnn - Rural Route Number

24-26 Location of the Input Define the location in the name/address record, where a 5-digit ZIP UPCPST10 Extracted ZIP Code Code is stored. When the input ZIP Code is floating or packed, MailStream Plus requires that you place the ZIP Code in a fixed location for later sorting. MailStream Plus will then locate, convert, and store the ZIP Code in the specified location.

28 Check All 5 Digits of Define whether MailStream Plus will check all five digits of the ZIP UPCPST10 Input ZIP Code Code, to confirm that it is current. MailStream Plus cannot verify whether the ZIP Code is correct for the mailing address.

• Y - Yes, check all five digits. • N - No, check only the first three digits. • blank - Default is N.

30-32 Location of the Input UPCPST10 Note: If the Location and Format of Input ZIP + 4 Add-on fields are DPC empty, this field must also be blank.

This value defines the input record location of the Delivery Point Code (DPC) 2-digit add-on code. If you specify a value in this field, MailStream Plus treats the name/address records as if they have no ZIP + 4 Code nor DPC, unless both fields contain only numbers. Note: A Delivery Point Code (DPC) is required to qualify for automation presort rates for Letters and Flats. Mailpieces that do not contain a DPC, can only qualify for non-automation rates.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 365 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

34 Format of the Input DPC Define the format of the input Delivery Point Code: UPCPST10 C DPC is in display (character) form. P DPC is in packed form (2 bytes). The high-order digit and the sign digit are ignored, so the fifth position of a 6-byte, packed, 11-digit ZIP Code may be specified in the Location of the Input DPC field. B DPC is in a 1-byte binary field. blank No Default. If a DPC location is specified in the Location of the Input DPC field, you must specify the DPC format here.

Note: Positions 36-46 are valid only if position Location of the Input Carrier Route Code is defined. Regarding positions 36-38, 40-42, and 44: The value P in position 44 can allow records to be processed as ECR even if the Walk-Sequence/Line-Of-Travel is invalid or missing in the records, or if the data locations have been specified incorrectly in positions 36-38 and/or 40-42.

36-38 Walk-Sequence or If the Location of Line-of-Travel Sort Code is blank, this field defines UPCPST10 Line-of-Travel Location the input location of the 5-byte Walk Sequence number. If the Location of Line-of-Travel Sort Code field is not blank, this field defines the input location of the 4-byte Line of Travel number. Note: For WS/LOT processing options, Review the description of the Out of Sequence Processing Code.

40-42 Location of Define the location in the input file where Line-of-Travel Sort Code Line-of-Travel Sort Code was written to define the (A) Ascending or (D) Descending order.

44 Carrier Route Define how to handle WS/LOT sequencing: UPCPST10 Disposition when Walk Note: This definition is valid only if positions Walk Sequence or Seq/Line of Travel is Line of Travel Codes are specified. Blank P Process records that have Carrier Route Codes and no Walk-Sequence/Line-of-Travel information; qualify pieces as Enhanced Carrier Route (ECR) if possible. C Ignore the Carrier Route information on this record if the WS/LOT information is blank or is an unmatched address WS/LOT code containing all zeros. I Ignore the Carrier Route information on this record if the WS/LOT information is blank. blank Default is C.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 366 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

46 Out of Sequence Define the way that MailStream Plus should handle processing when UPCPST10 Processing Code the batch, entry point, ZIP Code, Carrier Route, or Walk-Sequence/Line-of-Travel Code are not in the proper sequence: 0 Do no sequence checking to ensure that the file is in Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequencing. 2 Issue an informational message if the file is not sorted into Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequence before sending to the Statistics function for processing. Processing continues, but MailStream Plus suppresses additional out of sequence messages. 4 Issue a warning message if the file is not sorted into Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequence before sending to the Statistics function for processing. Processing continues, but MailStream Plus suppresses additional out of sequence messages. 8 Issue a fatal error message if the file is not sorted into Walk- or Line-of-Travel sequence before sending to the Statistics function for processing. Processing stops immediately. X Enables processing when the input name/address file is not pre-ordered by Batch, Entry-Point, ZIP, Carrier, and Walk Sequence/Line-of-Travel, or if the job contains multiple P ATTR definitions. Enabling this function will require additional Presort Statistics and Detail Statistics Records, as well as an increase the processing time. blank Default is: • X - When Walk-Sequence or Line-of-Travel Location definition is not blank • 2 - When Walk-Sequence or Line-of-Travel Location is blank

Note: An X is required only when doing a Line of Travel or Walk Sequence mailing, and one or more of the following conditions are true:

• You have not sorted your list into LOT or WS order prior to running MailStream Plus. • You have more than one piece ID in your job. • You are performing Firm Bundling. • You are posting the LOT information into the Optional Endorsement line with POSTLB "Use Standard OEL or "Optional Processing of the OEL for Periodicals and USPS Marketing Mail Sortations" field.

56-58 Location of County Define the location of the input County Code used to determine UPCPST10 Code in-county presort discount rates. MailStream Plus assumes that this field is in 3-digit numeric format.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 367 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

60 Validate Carrier Route Validate that the input Carrier Route code exists in the input ZIP Code. UPCPST10 MailStream Plus cannot verify the Carrier Route code or ZIP Code are correct for the mailing address. Y Validate the input Carrier Route code. If MailStream Plus cannot validate the Carrier Route code, the Carrier Route code appears as blank spaces in the working record, but the original Carrier Route code remains in the input file. N Do not validate the input Carrier Route code. blank Default is N.

Pre-sequencing Your File - LOT or Walk-Sequence

• Line of Travel (including eLOT) - Your Line of Travel job must be sorted by these fields, in this order: • 5-digit ZIP Code (ascending order) • Carrier Route Identification (CRID) number (ascending order) • eLOT number (ascending order) • Low ZIP + 4 Code to high ZIP + 4 Code (ascending order) • Delivery Point Code (ascending or descending order, depending upon the ascending/descending indicator)

• Walk-Sequence - Your walk-sequence job must be sorted in this order: • ZIP Code • Carrier Route • Walk-Sequence Note: Per USPS regulations, records with missing (blank) or invalid (0000) LOT information are to be sorted to the end of the CRRT.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 368 Parameter Reference

ZIPINB

Optional: Use ZIPINB to define the location and format of inbound ZIP Codes for the inbound Intelligent Mail® barcode ZIP Code. This parameter is also used by MAIL360 processing.

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

1-6 Parameter Keyword ZIPINB is the only acceptable entry.

8-10 Inbound ZIP Code Define the location of the Inbound ZIP Code in the name and address UPCPM342 Location record.

12 ZIP Code Type Specify a code to define the inbound ZIP Code type: UPCPM342 C ZIP Code is in display (character) format (5 bytes). P ZIP Code is in packed format in a 3-byte field or, optionally, a 5-byte field with ZIP + 4 Code. F ZIP Code (5- or 9-digit) is the final element in a "floating" field. The right most position is specified by column 8-12. The floating ZIP Code may also optionally contain a dash between ZIP Code and ZIP + 4 Code. B ZIP Code is a 3-byte binary number. If the ZIP Code is in a 4-byte binary number, just specify the second byte of the field. 9 9-digit ZIP Code is in a 4-byte binary field.

14-16 Inbound ZIP + 4 Add-On Define the location of the inbound ZIP + 4 add-on. May contain the UPCPM342 Location location of the ZIP + 4 add-on code in the input name and address record. Must be blank if the ZIP Code type defined on this parameter is "9", This field is optional if the ZIP Code type defined on this parameter is "F".

18 Inbound ZIP + 4 Add-On Specify a code to define the inbound ZIP + 4 add-on type: UPCPM342 Type C Display (character) format (5 bytes). P Packed format in a 3-byte field. B Binary number. If the ZIP Code is in a 4-byte binary number, just specify the second byte of the field.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 369 Parameter Reference

Position Field Name Description IBM i Screen

30-32 Inbound Delivery Point Define the location of the inbound Delivery Point Code 2-digit add-on. UPCPM342 Code (DPC) Add-On If there is no ZIP + 4 add-on definition, this field must be blank. Location

34 Inbound Delivery Point Specify a code to define the inbound Delivery Point Code (DPC) UPCPM342 Code (DPC) Add-on add-on type: Type C Display (character) format (5 bytes). P Packed format in a 3-byte field. B Binary number. If the ZIP Code is in a 4-byte binary number, just specify the second byte of the field.

36-46 Universal Inbound ZIP Define an inbound ZIP Code to use for all records. If this field contains UPCPM342 Code a value, the ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 Code, and DPC definition fields must be blank. When using this field, the inbound ZIP Code must be 5 or 11 bytes long. In those cases, a nine-byte value is not acceptable.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 370 2 - Report Reference

In this section

Report Information 372 Report Information Fields 372 Information Variables 407 Report Reference

Report Information

This chapter provides information to use with the PA INF,RP INF, EP INF, and BATINF parameters

Report Information Fields

The following table describes and identifies the length of the different types of information (or sub keywords) that can be used in the report information (RP INF), entry point information (EP INF), and batch information (BATINF) records. In the following table: • Sub keywords are optional unless noted. • Unless the PA INF column is checked, sub keywords can be used only on the BATINF, EP INF, and RP INF parameters. • Any subkeyword that writes to a Mail.dat file shows the designated field code assignment provided by the current Mail.dat Idealliance database standards. • If you are omitting components of a multi-part subkeyword, please insert blank spaces as placeholders in those components.

Table 10: MailStream Plus Report Information Fields

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

ACSCOD 8 Address Correction Service Code. ✓ ✓ ✓ Used in the creation of the Pitney Bowes Inkjet File.

AGTAD1 30 Mailing Agent address line 1. ✓ ✓ ✓

AGTAD2 30 Mailing Agent address line 2. ✓ ✓ ✓

AGTAD3 30 Mailing Agent address line 3. ✓ ✓ ✓

AGTNAM 30 Mailing Agent name. ✓ ✓ ✓

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 372 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

AGTTEL 14 Mailing Agent telephone number ✓ ✓ ✓

APB 7 CPT-1152 Advertising Percent Basis. ✓ ✓ Optional. Must be numeric. Maximum value is 9999.99. Left justify with no leading zeros. Default is zero. For Periodicals Class. This subkeyword is only allowed on the PA INF parameter.

BGLIN4 38 CSM-1157 Bag/Tray tag line 4. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat user line 1 for bags and trays.

BGLIN5 38 CSM-1158 Bag/Tray tag line 5. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat user line 2 for bags and trays.

CDAUTO 10 SEG-1129 Automation Coded Date. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Oldest 3553 coded date for automation of all lists used. If the information data is left blank or contains *SYSDATE, the system date is used. Use of the Mail.dat non-date "00010101" may jeopardize rate eligibility.

CDCARR 10 SEG-1130 Carrier Coded Date. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ The oldest 3553 coded date for carrier of all lists used. If the information data is left blank or contains *SYSDATE, the system date is used. Use of the Mail.dat non-date 00010101 may jeopardize rate eligibility.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 373 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

CFMAIL 19 S = CSM-1141 CONFIRM/ASN. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ M = Used for CONFIRM program. This is a PQT-1111; three-part subkeyword, with one space SEG-1133 between each component, in the following format: SSSSSSSS T = SEG-1132 MMMMMMMM T. 8 bytes, 1 through 8 - .CSM-1141 - SSSSSSSS 8 bytes, 10 through 17 - .PQT-1111/.SEG-1133 - MMMMMMMM 1 byte, 19 - .SEG-1132 -T S Based on T:SSSSSSSS (length 8) is the Sequential Shipment ID. Placed in the barcode field of the Mail.dat file defined by the EMD barcode type selection below. M None: MMMMMMMM (length 8) is the Mailing ID. This data is placed in the CONFIRM file. The data is not placed in any Mail.dat file. T See text. T (length 1) is the EMD Barcode type. Optional. The EMD type selected here determines the barcode placement as follows:

• M - Whole mailing. The barcode is placed in .seg. • S - By shipment. The barcode is placed in .csm. • P - By bundle. The barcode is placed in .pqt.

blank No barcode placed.

CRIDCU 12 SEG-1185 Defines the CRID of the individual ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ responsible for maintaining container unit uniqueness; populates container unit uniqueness CRID in the segment (.SEG) record

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 374 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

CRIDHU 12 SEG-1184 Populates the handling unit uniqueness ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CRID in the segment (*.SEG) record

CRIDMU 12 MPU-1130 Identifies the CRID of the individual ✓ ✓ ✓ responsible for complying with USPS move update requirements; populates the move update requirements CRID in the mailpiece unit (.MPU) record

CRIDPU 12 MPU-1131 Identifies the CRID of the individual ✓ ✓ ✓ responsible for maintaining mailpiece IM® barcode uniqueness; populates the mailpiece IM® barcode uniqueness CRID in the mail piece unit (.MPU) record

CSAID 10 CSM-1187 Customer Service Agreement ID. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Optional. Default is blank.

DELOPT 1 SSF File Delivery Option Indicator ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ See USPS Publication 199 for valid values.

DFWHID 20 DFWORKS DFWorks® host sort ID ✓

DFWMUD 25 DFWORKS DFWorks® user-defined manifest ✓

DRPKEY 9 CSM-1167 USPS Facility Drop Site Key. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Note: When a DRPKEY subkeyword is present that applies to the entry point, MailStream Plus uses the supplied data in preference to attempting to look up the appropriate entry facility for the container. When palletizing, if a DRPKEY subkeyword is present, but no PLTKEY subkeyword is present, then the DRPKEY information is used for both containers and pallets.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 375 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

EDCODE 12 MPU-1101 Edition code for Periodicals Mail. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ See the Mail.dat field definitions for MPU-1101 for the suggested convention. Defaults to the P ATTR code.

FEDAGC 5 MPA-1114 Federal agency cost code ✓ ✓ ✓

FROM 30 CSM-1156 "From Line" information. The hierarchy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ of the From/Origin line information is: 1) Use the XX INF FROM if one is present. 2) Use the value from the XXX PT parameter, if applicable. 3) Use the City/State file (Long city name/state).

FRTBIL 10 CSM-1130 Freight bill number. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

FSLIN4 38 Facing slips line 4. ✓ ✓ ✓

IDCDTO 21 CSM-1199 Overrides the Informed Delivery ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Campaign Start and End Date at the container level. Format is SSSSSSSSSS EEEEEEEEEE (space between the two elements), where: S = Start Date format YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY E = End Date format YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY

IDCSLK 8 Links the Informed Delivery Split ID to ✓ a mailpiece. Format is: SSSSSSSS S = Split ID

IMBMLR 6 or 9 CPT-1148 USPS-assigned Mailer ID for IM®b. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ For mailpiece Intelligent Mail® barcode. Must be numeric. Default is PA INF for CPT-1148. NOTE: IMBMLR is used for the IMb/IMpb Mailer ID.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 376 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

ISSDAT 14 CPT-1141 Issue date. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Required only if sending files to PostalOne!. Must be in YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY format. Default is blank.

LOGMID 9 SSF File Logistics Mailer ID ✓ ✓ ✓ Must be 6 or 9 characters long.

M3DATE 10 CSM-1184 Mailing date used in MAIL360 ✓ ✓ ✓ mailpiece file. Valid formats are YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. RP INF is required when creating the MAIL360 mailpiece file (IMBCTL position 28 = M). This date is also used for: Postage statement mailing date (CSM-1184) For determination of fees and incentives PostalOne! requires this date or the date specified using the MDMFDD subkeyword. Note: If the information data is left blank, or contains *SYSDATE, the system date is used.

M3JOBD 30 MAIL360 Job Description used in ✓ ✓ ✓ MAIL360 mailpiece file. RP INF is required when creating the MAIL360 Mailpiece file (IMBCTL position 28 = M)

M3JOBN 30 MAIL360 Job Name. ✓ ✓ ✓ RP INF is required when creating the MAIL360 Mailpiece file (IMBCTL

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 377 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

position 28 = M). EP INF and BATINF may also be used.

M3OWNI 30 MAIL360 Owner ID. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ The RP INF definition is used for the Job level Mail Owner ID information in the MAIL360 mail piece file. The BATINF, EP INF, and PA INF definitions are used for the Piece level Mail Owner ID in the MAIL360 mailpiece file.

MAILID 15 Mailing ID code. ✓ ✓ ✓ Allows placement of the mailing identification number. Used in Qualification report headers.

MAILPO 30 Post office of mailing. ✓ ✓ ✓

MAILZP 10 ZIP Code of mailing. ✓ ✓ ✓

MDBPSA 1 SEG-1151 Bypass Seamless Acceptance? ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Y Yes, bypass Seamless Acceptance. blank No, do not bypass Seamless acceptance default Default is Blank.

MDEIND 1 CSM-1186 eInduction Indicator - Define the ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ presence of the Mail.dat eInduction Indicator: Y Yes, the Mail.dat® eInduction indicator is present. N No, the Mail.dat® eInduction indicator is not present. blank Default is N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 378 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDFEID 20 CCR-1002 Mail Fee IDs. ✓ ✓ Identifies the fees claimed. You can find a list of the valid two-byte fee codes in the Mail.dat and PostalOne! specifications. MailStream Plus processes the list of fee codes and uses the first active fee code encountered. That fee is claimed on generated postage statements. To assign fees, you must also define XX INF M3DATE.

MDIAMO 12 CPT-1149 Mail.dat customer registration ID ✓ ✓ MPA-1122 (CRID). Optional. Identifies the mail owner of the component. Must be numeric. The default is blank. This subkeyword is only allowed on the PA INF parameter. Do not use this parameter to enter the DUNS or FAST scheduler ID.

MDIAMP 12 MPA-1124 Mail.dat® mail preparer customer ✓ ✓ registration ID (CRID). Identifies the printer/manufacturer of the mail. Must be numeric. The default is blank. Optional. Do not use this parameter record to enter the DUNS number.

MDICID 20 CCR-1002 Mail.dat Incentive ID. ✓ ✓ Identifies the incentives claimed. You can find a list of the valid two-byte incentive codes in the Mail.dat and PostalOne! specifications. MailStream Plus processes the list of incentive codes and uses the first active incentive code encountered. That incentive is claimed on generated postage statements.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 379 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

To assign incentives, you must also define XX INF M3DATE.

MDINFX 20 HDR-1182 Private Information Exchange. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ SEG-1182 Reserved for the exchange of private information between sender and catcher.

MDLP5S 23 List Processor 5-digit scheme update ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ date. REQUIRED for Mail.dat under certain conditions: 5-digit Scheme information definitions: 5-digit scheme update date, LOT database date, and LOT forward/reverse code. If this field is not used, the field will not be populated. This is a three-part subkeyword, with one space between each component, in the following format: SSSSSSSSSS LLLLLLLLLL R 10 bytes, 1 - 10, SSSSSSSSSS 10 bytes, 12 - 21, .SEG-1116 - LLLLLLLLLL 1 byte, 23, .SEG-1122 - R

10 Scheme update date. Note: We discourage the use of this field.

Format: SSSSSSSSSS Can be defined as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. This date exists in the Postal Reference File. We recommend that you leave this field blank.

10 L = SEG-1116 LOT Database Date. Format: LLLLLLLLLL

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 380 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

Can be defined as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. The default is the Mail.dat non-date "00010101". The use of the Mail.dat non-date "00010101" may jeopardize rate eligibility.

MDLP5S 1 R = SEG-1122 Line of Travel forward or reverse code. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Format: R F Forward sort order (.SEG file) R Reverse sort order (.SEG file)

Used when the input file is in reverse sequence and MailStream Plus does not sort the Line-of-Travel/Walk-Sequence information (ZIP IN position 46=X). MailStream Plus automatically puts an R in the .SEG file when using SRTFLD 1101 or SRTFLn sort field 511 to reverse the output sequence of the records.

MDLPAT 1 CPT-1138 Mail.dat Periodical advertising ✓ ✓ percentage treatment. B Ad % not counted S Carries own Ad Percentage N Not applicable default Default is blank.

MDLPCI 23 List Processor container ID seq. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Defines container information: This is a three-part subkeyword, with one space between each component, in the following format: UUUUUUUU AAAAAAAAAAAA T 8 bytes, 1 - 8, .CSM-1123 - UUUUUUUU

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 381 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

12 bytes, 10 - 21, .CSM-1148 - AAAAAAAAAAAA 1 byte, 23, .SEG-1139 - T

8 CSM-1123 Mail.dat Unique Container ID. Format: UUUUUUUU This is the beginning pallet ID sequence. Each additional pallet increments by 1. This is not a postal requirement. It is for proprietary tracking systems.

12 CSM-1148 Alternate method defining preparation. Format: AAAAAAAAAAAA This is either a customer support ruling or an exception letter. The default is blank.

1 SEG-1139 Mail.dat Mailing Agreement Type. Format: T A Alternate Mailing System B Optional Procedure D Value Added

E Combined Mail F Combined and Value Added

G Manifest Mailing Itemized

H Manifest Mailing Batch

default Default is a blank space.

MDLPCN 30 HDR-1106 List Processor contact name. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for Mail.dat.

MDLPCO 30 HDR-1104 List Processor company name. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for Mail.dat.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 382 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDLPCP 2 MPU-1116 Mail.dat List Processor co-palletizing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ WSR-1015 code. Default is "01".

MDLPCT 14 HDR-1107 Mail.dat List Processor contact phone. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for Mail.dat; Alphanumeric

MDLPEM 30 HDR-1157 List Processor E-mail (1-30). ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for Mail.dat. List Processor e-mail address (first 30 characters). See MDLPE2 (below) for the optional last 30 characters.

MDLPE2 30 HDR-1157 List Processor E-mail (31-60). ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ The list processor e-mail address (last 30 characters). See MDLPEM (above) for the first 30 characters.

MDLPJI 25 HDR-1102 REQUIRED for PostalOne! Mail.dat ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ list processor's job ID.

MDLPJN 30 HDR-1103 REQUIRED for Mail.dat: Mail.dat job ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ name

MDLPMU 12 Move Update Date and Method. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for PostalOne! This is a two-part subkeyword, with one space between each component, in the following format: DDDDDDDDDD M 10 bytes, 1 - 10, .SEG-1134 - DDDDDDDDDD 1 byte, 12 , .SEG-1147/.PDR-1127 - M

10 SEG-1134 Mail.dat Move update date. Format: DDDDDDDDDD

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 383 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

The default is blank. Cannot be all zeros. Can be defined as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. If the information data is left blank, or contains *SYSDATE, the system date is used.

1 SEG-1147 Move update method for Postage ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PDR-1127 Statements and/or Mail.dat files. Format: M Required for PostalOne!. It is also required for some other classes/types of mailings to define the Move Update method on the Postage Statement. Please check the USPS Domestic Mail Manual for the current requirements. The value specified must be numeric. blank None 0 None 1 ACS 2 NCOALink 4 Mailer Move Update Process (99% Rule) (This selection checks the "Alternative Method" box on the Postage Statements.) 5 Ancillary Service Endorsements 6 Multiple 7 Simplified / Occupant / Exceptional Address 8 OneCode ACS 9 n/a Alternative Address Format blank Default is blank.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 384 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDLPPC 4 HDR-1105 Mail.dat® User License Code. ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for Mail.dat and PostalOne! (Previously called the provider code) Idealliance® assigns this code. If left blank:

• Only the Mail.dat .CSM file is produced. • All other required Mail.dat parameters are no longer required. • The verify PostalOne!® option is turned off.

MDLPPR 21 Additional Permit Information ✓ ✓ ✓ This three-part subkeyword, with one space between each component, has this format: NNNNNNNN T AAAAAAAAAA 8 bytes, 1 - 8, .MPA-1107 - NNNNNNNN 1 byte, 10, .MPA-1108 - T 10 bytes, 12 - 21, .MPA-1115 - AAAAAAAAAA

8 MPA-1107 Mail owner's permit reference number. Format is: NNNNNNNN (length 8)

1 MPA-1108 Permit type. Format: T S Stamp

M Meter P Permit G Government - federal H Government meter V Virtual

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 385 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

10 MPA-1115 Nonprofit authorization. Format: AAAAAAAAAA

MDLPPS 4 PDR-1124 Mail.dat production Machine ID. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ This sub keyword has the format: MMMM

MDLPPT 30 CPT-1147 Publication Title. ✓ ✓ MPA-1117 Default is blank.

MDLPUH 30 HDR-1152 List Processor text header. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat user option. Default is blank.

MDLPUS 20 SEG-1126 List Processor segment text. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat user option. Default is blank.

MDLPVN 12 Mail.dat Periodicals volume and issue ✓ ✓ numbers. This two-part subkeyword, with one space between each component, has the format: VVVVV IIIIII 5 bytes, 1 - 5, *.CPT -1139 - VVVVV 6 bytes, 7 - 12, *.CPT-1140 - IIIIII Note: Both the volume and issue number must be present, or this field is blank.

5 CPT-1139 Mail.dat Periodicals Volume Number. Format: VVVVV Default is blank.

6 CPT-1140 Mail.dat Periodicals Issue Number. Format: IIIIII

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 386 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

Default is blank.

MDMAID 10 CSM-1179 Actual induction date of mailing. ✓ ✓ ✓ Format: DDDDDDDDDD Can be specified as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. The default is a blank space.

MDMAIT 5 CSM-1180 Actual induction Time. ✓ ✓ ✓ Format: HH:MM, including the colon. 5-bytes, position 12 through 16, *.CSM-1180 - TTTTT The default is a blank space.

MDMFC2 10 MPA-1110 Mail Facility Customer Reference ID ✓ ✓ (CAPS) reference, part 2. This and the MDMFCR subkeyword make the 40-character reference number.

MDMFCR 30 MPA-1110 Mail Facility Customer Reference ID ✓ ✓ (CAPS) reference, part 1. This and the MDMFC2 subkeyword make the 40-character reference number.

MDMFCF 25 USPS Confirmation Services for Priority ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail, USPS Marketing Mail Parcels, and Package Services. This four-part subkeyword, with one space between each component, has the format: T I SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS CCCCC 1 byte, 1, .SNR -1104 - T 1 byte, 3, .PDR-1119/.SEG-1120 - I 15 bytes, 5 - 19, .SEG -1121 - SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 387 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

5 bytes, 21 - 25, .CSM-1141/.MPU-1122/.SEG-1133 - CCCCC

1 SNR-1104 Confirm/seed type: Format: T R Traditional Seed C Standard Confirm B R + C S Smart Confirm

1 PDR-1119 Mail.dat Confirm indicator. SEG-1120 Format: I S Add static confirm to the .seg file. Otherwise, the static confirm is ignored. The .pdr confirm fields are not populated. P Populate .pdr with the Confirm ID and add to the .snr seed name ID. Set the S_CODE to the Confirm ID. N Populate the .snr seed name ID with the Confirm ID. Set S_CODE to the Confirm ID. Do not populate the .pdr fields. R Add the Confirm ID to the .snr seed name ID. Do not populate .pdr field. Set S_CODE to the Confirm ID.

MDMFCF 15 SEG-1121 Static confirm. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Format: SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS Must be numeric. Add leading zeros if needed.

5 CSM-1141 Confirm subscriber ID. MPU-1122 Format: CCCCC SEG-1133

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 388 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

Must be numeric. Add leading zeros if needed.

MDMFDD 30 Actual Ship Date. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat container information. This is a five-part sub keyword that has the format SSSSSSSSSS C M PPPPPPPPP TTTTT, with one space between each component.

• 10 bytes, positions 1-10, *.CSM -1113 - SSSSSSSSSS • 1 byte, position 12, *.CSM-1124 - C • 1 byte, position 14, *.SEG -1141 - M • 9 bytes, positions 16-24, *.SEG-1142 - PPPPPPPPP • 5 bytes, positions 26-30, *.CSM-1164 - TTTTT

10 CSM-1113 Mail.dat actual container ship date; CSM-1184 REQUIRED for PostalOne! Format: SSSSSSSSSS Can be specified as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. The default is spaces. The M3DATE is the preferred place to put the CSM-1184 mailing date.

1 CSM-1124 Container status. Format: C R Ready to pay

X Paid

C Cancel

D Delete

P Preliminary postage statement

T Transportation Information Update

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 389 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

A Ready to accept blank Not closed

MDMFDD 1 SEG-1141 Periodicals Mail Container charge ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ method. Format: M O No publications in mailing. 1 Charge all to a third party. 2 Charge all to the P ATTR code defined below. 3 or Default: Proportion charges blank to each piece (default)

9 SEG-1142 Container charge P ATTR code. Format: PPPPPPPPP Periodicals only. There is no default. Used with option 2 above.

5 CSM-1164 Actual container ship time. Format: TTTTT Formatted as HH:MM with the colon. Default is blanks.

MDMFDP 15 MPA-1113 Mail.dat Permit Holder DUNS Number ✓ ✓ ✓ (also Permit Dun & Bradstreet number.) Default is blank. Use 9 or 15 bytes to represent an actual DUNS number. Use 8 or 9 bytes to represent a USPS-assigned CRID (Customer Registration ID).

MDMFDT 15 CSM-1142 Mail.dat Transportation agent's Dun & ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Bradstreet number. Default is blank. Do not use this parameter to enter the CRID.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 390 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDMFED 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Scheduled Induction End Date and Time. Format: DDDDDDDDDD TTTTT

10 CSM-1117 Mail.dat scheduled induction end date. Format: DDDDDDDDDD The default is a blank space.

5 CSM-1118 Mail.dat scheduled induction end time. Format: TTTTT Format as HH:MM with the colon.

MDMFEP 17 Mailing facility entry point information. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ This three-part subkeyword with the format: PPPPPPF TTTTTTTTT

• 6 bytes, 1 - 6, .CSM -1105 - PPPPPP • 1 byte, 7, .CSM-1106 - F • 9 bytes, 9 - 17, .CSM-1168 - TTTTTTTTT

This definition overrides the ENT PT parameter definition.

6 CSM-1105 Mail.dat postal entry ZIP Code. Format: PPPPPP

1 CSM-1106 Mail.dat facility type. Format: F. Not available in Periodicals.

9 CSM-1168 Mail.dat physical entry ZIP + 4 Code. Format: TTTTTTTTT This field is used only if MailStream Plus cannot determine the entry ZIP + 4 Code.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 391 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDMFFI 22 This is a two-part subkeyword, with one ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ space between the FAST Content ID and the FAST Scheduler ID, respectively. This subkeyword has the following format: CCCCCCCCC SSSSSSSSSSSS

• 9 bytes, 1 - 9, CSM-1162 - CCCCCCCCC • 12 bytes, 11 - 22, CSM-1163 - SSSSSSSSSSSS

9 CSM-1162 Mail.dat FAST Content ID. Format: CCCCCCCCC Default is space.

12 CSM-1163 Mail.dat FAST Scheduler ID. Format: SSSSSSSSSSSS - Must be numeric. Default is space.

MDMFFR 3 CPT-1142 Mail.dat mailing frequency (number of ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ times mailed each year). Must be numeric. Left- or right-justify.

MDMFID 27 Mail.dat internal mailing facility dates. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ This is a three-part subkeyword, with one space between components, with the format: IIIIIIIIII PPPPPPPPPP TTTTT

• 10 bytes, 1 - 10, .CSM -1119 - IIIIIIIIII • 10 bytes, 12 - 21, .CSM-1177 - PPPPPPPPPP • 5 bytes, 23 - 27, .CSM-1178 - TTTTT

10 CSM-1119 Mail.dat Mailing facility internal date. Format: IIIIIIIIII

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 392 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

Can be specified as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. Default is space.

10 CSM-1177 Mail.dat container scheduled pick up date. Format: PPPPPPPPPP Can be specified as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. Default is blank spaces.

5 CSM-1178 Mail.dat container scheduled pick up time. Format: TTTTT Format is HH:MM with the colon. Default is space.

MDMFIF 30 ICR-1101 Mail.dat inkjet container tape name. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Default is .

MDMFIT 6 ICR-1102 Mail.dat inkjet container tape ID. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Default is .

MDMFJI 8 CPT-1001 Mail.dat Mailing facility job ID. ✓ ✓ CQT-1001 A random unique job ID is generated if left blank. Numeric job IDs are CSM-1001 right-justified and zero-filled by HDR-1001 MailStream Plus when posted into the Mail.dat files. HDR-1153 ICR-1001 MCR-1001 MPA-1001 MPU-1001 PDR-1001 PQT-1001 SEG-1001 SNR-1001

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 393 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

WSR-1001

MDMFPD 8 Mail Facility pre-denominated postage. ✓ ✓ ✓ This two-part subkeyword, with one space between components. Format: CCCCCC M

• 6 bytes, positions 1 - 6, *.MPU-1124 - CCCCCC • 1 byte, position 8, *.MPA-1103/*.MPA-1111/*.MPU-1125 - M

6 MPU-1124 Mail.dat pre-denominated amount. Format: CCCCCC We recommend using the 9999.9 cents format (for example, 0012.3 = $0.123).

1 MPA-1103 Mail.dat metered method. ✓ ✓ MPA-1111 Format: M MPU-1125 You cannot use different metering methods in the same mailing. These options are available if the ALG PP parameter defines metered mail: blank Defaults to the payment method defined by the ALG PP parameter position 8. C Correct postage metered. The pre-denominated amount is ignored. L Lowest postage metered. The pre-denominated amount is optional. It is used if specified. Leave it blank for the lowest postage rate to be used as the affixed rate. M Neither correct or lowest metered. The pre-denominated amount is required.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 394 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

These options are available if the ALG PP parameter defines Permit Imprint: G Government (using permit) T Periodicals pending (using permit) P Permit

MDMFPO 3 Mail Facility payment option. ✓ ✓ ✓ This two-part subkeyword, with one space between components, has the format: P I

• 1 byte, 1, .MPA -1109 - P • 1 byte, 3, .MPU-1127 - I

1 MPA-1109 Mail.dat payment option. REQUIRED for PostalOne! Format: P C CPP (Periodicals mail only) D Debit V PVDS O Other T Caps B Billing

1 MPU-1127 Mail.dat bulk insurance: Format: I Y Yes N No O Other

MDMFPU 1 CSM-1171 USPS Pick Up. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for PostalOne!

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 395 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

If not using with PostalOne!, this field is optional. Mail.dat USPS Pick Up. Determines the start the clock for service performance measurement. Y Yes,

N No, USPS did not pick up. Blank None (default) Y Yes, USPS picked up. N No, USPS did not pick up. blank Default - none

MDMFPZ 9 MPA-1106 Mail.dat Mail Facility permit ZIP and ✓ ✓ ✓ ZIP + 4 Codes. Required for PostalOne! Must be numeric.

MDMFRN 15 CSM-1112 Mail.dat facility reservation number. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Format: RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR The default is a space.

MDMFSD 26 Mail.dat scheduled dates. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ This four-part subkeyword, with no spaces between components, has the format: IIIIIIIIIIRDDDDDDDDDDTTTTT

• 10 bytes, 1 - 10, .CSM -1115 - IIIIIIIIII • 1 byte, 11, .CSM-1116 - R • 10 bytes, 12 - 21, .CSM-1117 - DDDDDDDDDD • 5 bytes, 22 - 26, .CSM-1118 - TTTTT

Can be specified as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY.

10 CSM-1115 Mail.dat Scheduled in-home date. Format: IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 396 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

The default is a blank space.

1 CSM-1116 Mail.dat delivery date range. Format: R Must be numeric.

10 CSM-1117 Mail.dat® scheduled induction start date. Format: DDDDDDDDDD The default is a blank space.

5 CSM-1118 Mail.dat scheduled induction start time. Format: TTTTT Format as HH:MM with the colon.

MDMFSP 1 CQT-1112 Required by PostalOne!® ✓ ✓ - Mail.dat Service Participation Indicator or Service Level Indicator. B Basic Option F Full Service Option P PostNet O Other blank None, default

MDMFSS 8 CSM-1172 Mail.dat Scheduled Ship Date. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Format: YYYYMMDD

MDMFST 5 CSM-1173 Mail.dat Scheduled Ship Time. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Format: HH:MM HH:MM where HH=Hours, MM=Minutes, with a ":" separator.

MDMFTI 10 CSM-1175 CSA Trip ID. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat CSA Trip ID

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 397 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDMFTN 12 Truck number and stop designator. This ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ two-part subkeyword, with no space between the components, has the format: TTTTTTTTTTSS

• 10 bytes, 1 - 10, *.CSM -1110 - TTTTTTTTTT • 2 bytes, 11 and 12, *.CSM-1111 - SS

10 CSM-1110 Mail.dat truck number. Format: TTTTTTTTTT

2 CSM-1111 Mail.dat stop designator. Format: SS

MDMFVF 30 SEG-1118 Verifying Facility. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for PostalOne! If not using with PostalOne!, this field is optional. Mail.dat Verifying Facility Name.

MDMFVZ 30 Verifying Facility ZIP + 4 Code. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ This three-part subkeyword, with no space between the dates, has the format: ZZZZZZZZZ PPPPPPPPPPWWWWWWWWWW 9 bytes, 1-9, *.SEG-1119 - ZZZZZZZZZ 10 bytes, 11-20, *.SEG-1137 - PPPPPPPPPP 10 bytes, 21-30, *.SEG-1138 - WWWWWWWWWW

9 SEG-1119 Mail.dat Verifying Facility ZIP + 4 Code, REQUIRED for PostalOne! Format: ZZZZZZZZZ

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 398 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

ZIP Code of Post Office where postage statement will be finalized (the associated BMEU, not the DMU). Can specify a 5-digit ZIP Code or 9-digit ZIP Code.

10 SEG-1137 Mail.dat Requested Presort Verification Completion Date. Format: PPPPPPPPPP Can be specified as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. Default is blank.

10 SEG-1138 Mail.dat Requested Piece Weight Verification Completion Date. Format: WWWWWWWWWW Can be specified as YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. Default is blank.

MDMFWS 2 Piece weight source and status. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ This is a two-part subkeyword with the format ST, with no spaces between components.

• 1 byte, position 1, .CPT-1103/.MPU-1104 - S • 1 byte, position 2, .CPT-1104/.MPU-1105 - T

1 CPT-1103 Mail.dat piece weight source. MPU-1104 REQUIRED for PostalOne! Format: S A Agent C Calculated P Postal (clerk) L Logical (implied from rate) blank Default is blank.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 399 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

1 CPT-1104 Piece weight source and status. MPU-1105 Format: T N None provided P Pending F Final M Manifest weight as function of rate interval (not actual) blank Default is P.

MDMIBA 9 PDR-1126 Mail.dat Mailer ID of Barcode ✓ ✓ ✓ Applicator. Optional. If present, MailStream Plus uses the MDMIBA subkeyword to populate PDR-1126.

MDMIMO 6 or 9 CPT-1148 Mail.dat Mail Owner ID. Optional. ✓ ✓ MPA-1121 The default for CPT-1148 is PA INF IMBMLR, if present.

MDMIMP 9 MPA-1123 Mail.dat Mail Preparer ID. ✓ ✓ Optional. The default is IMBCNT for trays and IMBPLT for pallets.

MDMLCT 20 CCR-1002 Mail.dat® Content of Mail. ✓ ✓ Identifies unique products within the mailing. This is a list of two-byte content codes. You can find the list of valid codes in the Mail.dat specifications.

MDMSCI 12 CSM-1197 eInduction CRID for Mis-shipped ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Containers. Provides the CRID for an entity linked to a mis-shipped container for invoicing purposes. For More information on eInduction, see the USPS® eInduction Guide for Mailers.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 400 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDMSSH 1 CSM-1188 Accept or reject mis-shipments: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Y Accept mis-shipments. N Do not accept mis-shipments. blank Default is N.

MDPCAT 1 HDR-1154 Mail Presentation Category - Optional: ✓ ✓ Mail.dat® mail presentation category. M MLOCR N Single piece P Conventional presort C Consolidated internal co-palletizing with MLOCR and conventional presort E Consolidated external co-palletizing with MLOCR and conventional presort blank Default is P.

Available only for the RP INF parameter. Mail.dat® processing generates a warning if one of the values above is not found.

MDPMT# 20 MPA-1127 Mail.dat® payment account number. ✓ ✓ ✓ The payment account number is different from the permit number and is initially used in addition to the permit number. In the future, this field may replace the Permit Information.

MDPMZA 9 MPA-1106 Mail.dat® Additional Postage Permit ZIP ✓ ✓ ✓ Code. Used when PMTPMA permit number is used (additional postage for metered or precanceled stamps).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 401 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MDSOCI 12 SEG-1140 eDoc Originator CRID of Segment. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ If not specified, this field defaults to the specified MDSPCI value.

MDSPCI 12 HDR-1183 Primary eDoc Sender CRID ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for PostalOne! Identifies the eDoc submitter (may be different from the mail preparer, mail owner, mail transporter, and scheduler roles). Only available for the RP INF parameter. Mail.dat processing generates an error if this CRID is not specified.

MDZAP 1 HDR-1162 Mail.dat ZAP (Zone Analysis ✓ ✓ Program) option. Format: Z Optional; Must be numeric if specified. Default is 1.

MLRAD1 30 Mail Owner address line 1 ✓ ✓ Address line 1 associated to the Mail Owner CRID provided on MDIAMO.

MLRAD2 30 Mail Owner address line 2 ✓ ✓ Address line 2 associated to the Mail Owner CRID provided on MDIAMO.

MLRAD3 30 Mailer address line 3 ✓ ✓ Address line 3 associated to the Mail Owner CRID provided on MDIAMO.

MLRNAM 30 Mail owner name ✓ ✓ This should be the name associated to the Mail Owner CRID provided on MDIAMO.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 402 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

MLRTEL 14 Mailer telephone number ✓ ✓

MTRSR# 20 SSF Serial number for the meter used, as ✓ ✓ indicated within the SSF file

MSSEQ# 10 Mailing statement sequence number ✓ ✓ ✓

MUSIMB 1 PDR-1132 Indicates whether the mailer ID of the ✓ ✓ ✓ IM® barcode defines the move update PBC-1119 supplier

MXDST 30 CSM-1152 Destination line for mixed-state/ADC. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mixed state/ADC destination line.

PLLIN1 38 CSM-1158 Pallet tag line 1. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat user line 2 for pallets

PLLIN2 38 Pallet tag line 2 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLIN3 38 Pallet tag line 3 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLIN4 38 Pallet tag line 4 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLIN5 38 Pallet tag line 5 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLIN6 38 Pallet tag line 6 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLIN7 38 Pallet tag line 7 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLIN8 38 Pallet tag line 8 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLIN9 38 Pallet tag line 9 ✓ ✓ ✓

PLLINB 38 CSM-1157 Print pallet tag line in large print. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Mail.dat user line 1 for pallets.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 403 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

PLTKEY 9 CSM-1167 USPS Pallet facility drop site key. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ When a PLTKEY subkeyword is present that applies to the entry point, MailStream Plus uses the supplied data in preference to attempting to look up the appropriate entry facility for the pallet. If a PLTKEY subkeyword is present, but no DRPKEY subkeyword is present, then the PLTKEY information is used for both containers and pallets.

PMTAD1 30 Permit holder address 1 ✓ ✓

PMTAD2 30 Permit holder address 2 ✓ ✓

PMTAD3 30 Permit holder address 3 ✓ ✓

PMTNAM 30 Permit holder name ✓ ✓

PMTPM# 8 MPA-1103 Permit number or meter license ✓ ✓ ✓ number. REQUIRED for PostalOne! for all classes and Periodicals Pending except Periodicals. Not available for Periodicals except for Periodicals Pending. Numeric format. This field must be left-justified (with no zero-padding).

PMTPMA 8 MPA-1103 Additional Postage Permit. ✓ ✓ ✓ This field must be left-justified with no zero-padding. You must also define an RP INF/PA INF MDPMZA when using PMTPMA.

PMTTEL 14 Permit holder telephone number. ✓ ✓

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 404 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

PUBLNM 30 CPT-1101 Publication name (or description). ✓ ✓ MPU-1102 The default for the .MPU description is blank. The default for the .CPT description is the P ATTR code and a short description.

PUBLNR 9 MPA-1102 USPS Publication number. ✓ ✓ REQUIRED for PostalOne! for Periodicals Mail, only. Must be numeric. Default is blank. This field must be left-justified (with no zero-padding.) For Periodicals Pending, the publication number is ignored. Use the PMTPM# permit number instead.

PUBNAM 30 MPA-1101 Publisher name. ✓ ✓ ✓

PUBTEL 14 Permit Holder's or Publisher's ✓ ✓ ✓ telephone number

RPDATE 14 Date for USPS forms. ✓ ✓ ✓ If this information is blank, or contains *SYSDATE, the system date is used.

RPTTXT 30 Report text ✓ ✓ ✓

SADSAM 10 SEG-1150 Simplified Address Delivery Statistics ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ File or Alternate Method Date. Fills in the Simplified Address Date field in the Mailing section of the 3602 and 3541.

SDCARR 10 SEG-1131 Carrier Sequenced Date. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ The oldest 3553 sequenced date for carrier of all lists used.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 405 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

The default is WSDATE, or if the information data is left blank, or if the field contains *SYSDATE, the system date is used. Using the Mail.dat non-date 00010101 may jeopardize rate eligibility.

SIGNAM 30 Signatory's name ✓ ✓ ✓

SIGTEL 14 Signatory's telephone number ✓ ✓ ✓

SNDEM1 30 SSF File Sender e-mail Address (Part 1), ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ SNDEM2 appended without spaces.

SNDEM2 30 SSF File Sender e-mail Address (Part 2) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Appended to SNDEM1 without spaces.

SNDNM1 30 SSF File Sender Name (Part 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ SNDNM2 appended without spaces.

SNDNM2 18 SSF File Sender Name (Part 2) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Appended to SNDNM1 without spaces.

SNDSM1 30 SSF File Sender SMS/Text Address (Part 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ SNDSM2 appended without spaces.

SNDSM2 30 SSF File Sender SMS/Text Address (Part 2) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Appended to SNDSM1 without spaces.

TRKLEN 2 Truck Length. ✓ ✓ ✓ Length, in feet, of the truck used by the mailer.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 406 Report Reference

Sub Length Mail.dat file Description Applies to: keyword extension - and field PA EP RP BAT MAIL code, if any INF INF INF INF .DAT

TRNMID 9 SSF File Transmitter's Mailer ID. ✓ ✓ ✓ Must be 6 or 9 bytes long.

UNANO 10 Mail Owner USPS Nonprofit Auth. No. ✓ Used to populate the Mail Owner's Nonprofit Authorization Number on the Postage Statements

VALART 8 SSF File Value of Article. ✓ Price formatted field 99999.99 includes decimal.

WSDATE 14 SEG-1131 Walk-sequence update date. ✓ ✓ ✓ WSR-1104 Required for Mail.dat if walk-sequencing your mailing. The format is YYYYMMDD, MM/DD/YYYY, or MM/DD/YY. The default is a blank space.

Information Variables

Note: These variables can only be used with BGLIN4, FSLIN4, PLLIN1-PLLIN9, and PLLINB, the user information (fourth) line of the bag tags, facing slips, and pallet tags.

Information variables allow you to include entry point, batch code, bundle number, or any other type of information that may change within one mailing on your reports. The following table describes the different types of information variables that can be used in the report information, entry point information, and batch information records.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 407 Report Reference

Table 11: Information Variables

Information Variable Description

&#BG Number of bags/trays

&#BL Number of bundles

&#CP Number of copies

&#PC Number of pieces

&BAG Bag/tray number

&BAT Batch code

&BB# Intelligent Mail® Tray Label barcode number (formerly the 24-digit EDL barcode number).

&BDL Bundle number

&BR# Bar code number

&BSQ Beginning sequence number

&CON Container type/size

&DDC Delivery count database date

&DDI Destination information database date

&DMC Mixed city database date

&DMP Route map database date

&DPS Postage statements database date

&DSQ Sequencing reference database date

&DZD ZIP Code database date

&DZM Zone map database date

&EPT Entry point

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 408 Report Reference

Information Variable Description

&ESQ Ending sequence number

&ICS Intelligent Mail® barcode bag/tray serial number. See the discussion of the IMBCNT parameter.

&IPS Intelligent Mail® barcode pallet serial number. See the discussion of the IMBPLT parameter.

&PLT Pallet number

&THK Thickness

&TPT Tray Preparation Indicator. To turn on this variable, use the ALG PS parameter.

&VOL Volume

&WGT Weight

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 409 3 - Resolving Errors

In this section

Parameter Errors 411 Error Code Information 412 Error/Warning Messages 424 Resolving Errors

Parameter Errors

When MailStream Plus detects an error in your parameters, your job will be terminated (ABEND, or condition code that does not equal 0). Your Job Log may show that the job ran normally, but you will notice that the run time is significantly less than one minute. To determine the error(s) that MailStream Plus has detected, follow the steps below: 1. Look at the output reports file, and review the Parameter Listing Report. 2. Look at the line directly below the parameter with the error. Directly below that line, MailStream Plus prints pound signs (#) beneath the columns containing the error. 3. Scroll to the right, past column 80 in the report, and look for an error message printed in the file. 4. Scroll back to the left to columns 1-80. For example, if the ML TYP parameter is supposed to look like this:

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+...7 ML TYP 1 L

But we inadvertently typed:

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7 ML TYP 1 X

In the Parameter Listing Report, MailStream Plus would print *1002 Invalid Value ML TYP in Position(s) 10* (column 80 on the line that contains the ML TYP parameter). You would see a pound sign under column 10:

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7 ML TYP 1 X #

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 411 Resolving Errors

Error Code Information

MailStream Plus error messages are generated from an internal table that assigns an error code and severity level, as well as providing a text description of the error. The severity levels associated with the error codes are:

Table 12: Error Code Severity Levels

Severity Level Description

1 This is an informational message only. MailStream Plus ignores this data.

2 This is an informational message only.

4 Program continues to execute, although this condition may cause unanticipated results.

8 This is a fatal error. The program abends.

The following tables contain some of the error messages you may encounter. Note: You may see error conditions other than those listed in this chapter. In the event that you receive an undocumented error message, please call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950. Be sure to have the exact error message text to help Customer Support in researching your error.

Table 13: Error Code Information

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

0002 2 Card not currently implemented No action is required.

0004 4

0005 1 Field Ignored MailStream Plus is ignoring the flagged field, either because it was made invalid by other parameter settings, because it no longer exists on the current parameter, or it is not needed at this time. No action is needed.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 412 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

0006 1 Parameter Ignored MailStream Plus is ignoring the flagged parameter, either because it was made invalid by other parameters/parameter settings, or because it is not necessary at this point in the process. No action is needed.

0008 8 TLALLO 01 List Area Overflow Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at XXXXXX 99 Write Error XXXXXX 99 1-800-367-6950. Read Error No Destination Record XXXXXX 99 Logic Error XXXXXX 99 Sequence Error (Prv or Cur) No RPMP Record Locate Batch xxxxxx Locate List Code xxxxxx xxxxxx Table Overflow xxxxxx List Table Overflow 4002 - Not exactly 1 BDL

xxxxxx 99 Sequence Error xxxxxx Check sorted fields and rerun job.

xxxxxx 99 Synchronization Error Check sorted fields and name/address field locations xxxxxx and rerun job.

DTRECS Table exceeded causing Increase the size of the DTRECS table using the TABLSZ Synchronization error: parameter with the DTRECS sub keyword. NMATNA 01 Synchronization Error

EOJ forced by Seq Error Check sorted fields and rerun job.

Invalid Character in Mailer ID at Can be caused by specifying a Mailer ID length of 6 when Record# [number] the first byte is 9, or specifying a length of 9 when the first byte is 0-8. May also be caused by a non-numeric character in the Mailer ID data.

Default entry point required when Make one of your entry point a default entry point. using EP ROL

Make one of your entry point a default entry point. Default entry point required when EP MIN based on tier

0009 4 Data Length for [item] is Invalid Please refer to Chapter 1 of this guide for the current parameter layout. Determine whether you have specified the correct length for the flagged item.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 413 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

0010 8 Parameter Conflicts with Others MailStream Plus has determined that the flagged parameter contradicts another parameter you defined. Please see the description for this parameter in Chapter 1 of this guide for warnings about possible parameter conflicts.

0011 8 Cannot have Multi ENT PT when If you are using SCF PT, NDC PT or ADC PT using SCF PT parameters, then you can only have one ENT PT parameter (and it must be the one and only default entry point).

0012 8 Length Incorrect for SCF PT/ADC Make sure that the E CODE length is exactly 6 bytes PT/NDC PT long.

0013 8 MSP abended due to licensing, see Check the previous message "The product you have above requested xx is not licensed." The text xx may show MU for MailStream Plus, PP for Palletization Plus, MRP for Manifest Reporting Plus, or PSM for DuoSort. If you believe you should be licensed for that application/option you can run the License Management report to check the license file. Please see the License Management Guide for instructions on running the report on your platform. The most common reasons for this error are: Not having installed your company's license file for the application/option in question, and the 45-day temporary license has expired. Requesting an option, such as Palletization Plus, that you are not licensed to use. The licensing files for options, such as Palletization Plus, are separate files that must be loaded in addition to the license for the basic MailStream Plus.

0015 8 Pos. xx in conflict with pos. xx Check the parameter listing and verify data in the conflicting positions.

1001 8 Parameter repeated xxxxx Look at parameter listing and remove duplicate parameters. If the error is "Parameter Repeated SRTFLn", then check the sequence of the n values. SRTFLn value for n's must be in increasing sequence in your parameter file.

1002 8 Invalid value in position(s) nnn Look at parameter listing, make corrections to parameter. This error may also occur when the value being selected

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 414 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

in the indicated parameter/position is not allowed based on other parameter settings in the mailing. Please review the layout of the flagged parameter for defaults and valid job definitions.

1003 8 Numeric value error in position(s) nnn Look at parameter listing, make corrections to parameter. (invalid input) out of range

1004 8 Req field missing Look at parameter listing, enter required information in field on parameter.

1005 8 Field must be blank Look at parameter listing, remove information from field on parameter.

1006 8 Invalid data Invalid data — no counts Look at parameter listing, verify data on parameter.

1007 8 Maximum parameters exceeded Look at parameter listing, remove extra parameters.

1008 8 Selected range is invalid Look at parameter listing, verify data on parameter.

1009 8 Data length for xxx is invalid Look at parameter listing, verify data on parameter.

1010 8 Blank parameter encountered Look at parameter listing, supply data for parameter.

1011 8 Required parameter omitted Look at parameter listing, supply required parameter.

1014 8 Value Repeated Search the parameter listing. Find and remove the repeated information. The MSRPRPT output report should indicate parameters with errors.

1015 8 Range repeated Look at parameter listing, removed repeated information.

1016 8 Range overlap Look at parameter listing, correct overlapping information.

1017 8 No report selected Include REPORT parameter(s).

1018 8 Parameter contains invalid request You specified an option that is invalid on the flagged parameter. Please refer to the parameter layout in Chapter 1 of this guide of this guide for valid options.

1019 8 At least one print group must be Y You must have a "Y" in at least one of the following positions: 32, 34, and 36 of the REPORT USPSSTMT and/or REPORT SUMMARY parameters.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 415 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

1020 8 Date format wrong, Use YYYYMMDD You must specify a 4-digit year, two-digit month, and two-digit day.

1021 8 Source and Dest must be different Your script contains parameters that define source and destination in the same location. These locations must be different. Check your parameter.

1022 8 Dest is prior source Your parameters define source and destination in the same location. These locations must be different. Check - or - your parameter. EP MIN Dest is prior source 18 - 26 When manual EP MINs are added to the job, they are processed in the order they are in the parameter list. You cannot move mail *into* an entry point that has already previously had an EP MIN to move mail *out of* it. An EP MIN's Destination was already a prior EP MIN's source. For example, the job cannot have an EP MIN moving mail from an NDC to the default entry point, and later have an EP MIN moving mail from an SCF *into* that NDC. You would want to have those EP MINs in the reverse order- first SCF to NDC, then NDC to Default.

1023 8 Default repeated You specified more than one default parameter where only one is required. Verify that all parameters are unique. Also, check the parameters that have a "Y" in column 72.

1026 8 Invalid subkeyword specified You specified an invalid subkeyword: 1026: xx INF Invalid Sub-Keyword xxxxxx The "xx" value indicates the type of INF subkeyword (RP, PA, EP, or BAT). The "xxxxxx" value indicates the subkeyword. The message indicates that the INF type selected cannot be used with the specified subkeyword. Please review "Report Information Fields" for information on the INF type(s) that can be used with each subkeyword.

1027 8 There are three possible reasons for The incentive, fee, or content selected is not active for this error code: the class of mail being processed, or Is not valid at this time within any USPS program, or Is not supported by Incentive not valid for class of mail. MailStream Plus. This error could also be the result of a Fee not valid for class of mail. typo/lowercase error. Content not valid for class of mail.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 416 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

1030 8 Unmatched PA INF (name) - P This error causes MailStream Plus to abend after ATTR/Link not found parameter verification.

1031 2 Duplicate PA INF (name) - Duplicate This is an informational message only and will allow data ignored MailStream to continue on if no other errors are found.

1046 8 Ride-along wgt > 3.3 oz (.20625 lbs) The weight of the ride-along mailpiece exceeds the 3.3 for- XXXXXXXXX ounce maximum for the mailpiece (xxxxxxxxx). Correct your definition on the P ATTR parameter and re-submit your job.

1047 8 Ride-along wgt > wgt of host - The weight of the ride-along mailpiece exceeds that for XXXXXXXXX the host mailpiece (xxxxxxxxx). Correct your definition on the P ATTR parameter and re-submit your job.

1050 8 Piece-ID not found and no default Specify a default Piece-ID in col. 72 of P ATTR parameter specified or add the necessary P ATTR parameter.

1055 8 Entry point not found and no default You must define at least one ENT PT parameter for your job and you must include a parameter for each entry point you use. Or, you must designate one of the ENT PT definitions as the default.

1099 8 Unknown parameter Look at the parameter listing and correct the parameter information.

1500 8 SRTFLn Overflow More than 300 bytes of sort key information has been specified. Simplify the sort key, looking for redundant fields that may be removed.

1510 8 SRTFL disp error Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

1520 8 SRTFL len error Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

2028 8 Must select at least 1 value for group Correct your report parameter so that some selection criteria are specified.

2029 4 Common REPORT selection(s) pos The definitions in columns 20-27 are not needed for this 20 thru 27 ignored parameter and are ignored by MailStream Plus. No action needed.

2030 8 Cannot Define both BG FRC Fields The force amount cannot be set by both thickness and 39-44 and 45-50 by percent of BG MAX. Use only one field.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 417 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

2040 8 ADC PT and NDC PT are not You cannot define both NDC PT and ADC PT for the permitted in the same job same job. Review your parameter listing and remove the xxx PT parameter that does not apply.

3001 8 Out of sequence xxxx Prev xxxx Check sorted fields. current

3002 8 Too many encountered xxxx Check parameters and remove redundant information. Note: The error message Too Many Encountered Batches can also result from the number of entry points in your job, whether from manually entered or internally generated ENT PT parameters. If you receive this error message, you may need to increase the Batch Code table size to be as large as the number of entry points times the number of batches.

If the Error message is Too Many PID/WS-LOT CODES Encountered, then you need to increase the P ATTR table by adding (or increasing) a TABLSZ P ATTR parameter.

3745 8 No free entries found on MIKEY list Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4100 2 ZIP + 4 presort only available for Correct parameter information on ML TYP records. letter or flat-sized mail

4101 8 Batch anomaly in PRCWST: found Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at while experiencing xxxx 1-800-367-6950.

4102 2 ALG BC Parm set to xxxx report Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at warning and resume ZIP + 4 mailing 1-800-367-6950.

4103 8 Unexpected end of file for wst input Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4104 8 Insufficient split modification in xxxxx Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4105 8 ALG BC parm set to abend; presort Correct ZIP + 4 location on ZIP IN record. aborted

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 418 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

4106 4 Barcode presort not available for Correct parameter information on ALG BC and ML TYP Bundle Services mail records.

4107 4 ZIP + 4 presort abandoned - pieces Correct piece weight information on P ATTR record. are too heavy

4108 4 ZIP + 4 presort abandoned - not Verify ZIP + 4 location on ZIP IN parameter. enough ZIP + 4 coded records

4109 4 ZIP + 4 presort abandoned -non-std Verify information on P ATTR parameters. pieces encountered

4110 4 ZIP + 4 presort abandoned - pieces Correct piece thickness information on P ATTR record. are too thick

4111 4 Subprogram name not found in call Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at list 1-800-367-6950.

4112 2 ALG BC Parm set to continue as Processing cannot continue as specified. Parameter was non-ZIP + 4 mailing overridden, and processing continues.

4300 8 More carrier copies requested than Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at exist 1-800-367-6950.

4301 8 More presort copies requested than Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at exist 1-800-367-6950.

4302 8 More residual copies requested than Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at exist 1-800-367-6950.

4303 8 PSGENTRY lists do not match for bdl Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at subtraction 1-800-367-6950.

4304 8 Bundle-group present in final bag Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4305 8 Ladder pointer search exceeded max Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at in MAXLP 1-800-367-6950.

4306 8 Non-null destination not found in Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at ladder step-up search 1-800-367-6950.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 419 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

4307 8 EOZIP detected other than single Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at bundle in bag 1-800-367-6950.

4308 8 EOCRT detected other than single Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at bundle in bag 1-800-367-6950.

4309 8 No bundles obtained for final bag Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4310 8 More than one bdl in bag in EOBAG Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4311 8 No bundles obtained for bag in Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at MKABAG 1-800-367-6950.

4312 8 Get a bundle failed in BDLBAG Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4313 8 Original bag not empty in BDLBAG Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4314 8 Bag has not been accounted for in Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at ACCBAG 1-800-367-6950.

4315 8 Bag level error in ACCBLV Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4316 8 Unknown level encountered in Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at INTRHL 1-800-367-6950.

4317 8 Unknown level encountered in Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at LDRINI 1-800-367-6950.

4318 8 EO3DG detected other than single Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at bundle in bag 1-800-367-6950.

4319 8 TLFNSG ( ) is not equal to TLFNSX Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at ( ) 1-800-367-6950.

4320 8 TLFNSG ( ) is equal to TLFNSX ( ) Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 420 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

4321 8 Bag level error in ACCBDL Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4322 8 Abend requested Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4323 8 PALBAS is not empty Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4324 8 BDLBAS is not empty Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4325 8 Program error at EOBAT Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4326 8 TLBLKS anomaly detected after Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at return from WSTREC processes 1-800-367-6950.

4327 8 SORT Failed - verify sort-work area Check sort-work area. large enough

4328 2 Carrier Optimization Applied Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950.

4329 2 Insufficient Carrier dis-qualification in Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at xxxx 1-800-367-6950.

5001 8 SERIAL start value resulted in Make the value on the SERIAL parameter lower so that sequence number overflow all pieces can be numbered.

6001 8 Invalid RECORD TYPE ?? Invalid Ensure that the items from the name/address indicator Start Date ???????? Invalid End are correctly formatted and referenced. Date ???????? Invalid URL from NA Record ? Invalid URL template code ?

6002 8 Campaign code must not be blank Ensure that the campaign code, campaign ID, split ID, Campaign ID must not be blank Split and URLs are not blank. ID must not be blank URL Split ID must not be blank URL Value must not be blank

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 421 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

6003 8 Duplicate Campaign Record Ensure that the record name, campaign title, split record, Duplicate Campaign Title Duplicate campaign code within the campaign, and URL record Split Record Duplicate Campaign are unique. Code within Campaign Duplicate URL Record

6004 8 Mismatch between URL link to and There is a conflict between the URL link to and the URL URL from NA Record from the name/address record. Check the URLs you are specifying for your Informed Delivery campaign; correct as needed. This option is valid only when Link to is P.

6007 Required IDCURL parameter not This message is generated by Informed Delivery defined for URL Campaign validation. This error occurs if MailStream Plus cannot locate a URL needed for Informed Delivery. Ensure that your job includes an IDCURL parameter with the correct URL type. Ensure that the URL is specified correctly, matching the actual URL name.

7001 8 Required file [filename] not found Add the required FILEDF parameter.

7002 2 MSWKCM file not found so it was not Determine the reason the file was not found. Perhaps loaded the file had been deleted and the Statistics function was not run in the current job, so MSWKCM was not generated.

8001 2 No records selected Possible causes for this message include: None of the input records were included in the mailing. Check the input file and selection criteria on the HEADER and FILEDF parameters. No presorted pieces were selected to be included in the report. Check the values in positions 20-28 for the selected report. (See the REPORT parameter for further information on each position.) There were no pieces to report on the selected report. For example: You select REPORT CRRTWALK but no pieces qualified for Carrier Route. You selected REPORT MANIFEST but MailStream Plus does not support manifest reporting for the class of mail being processed.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 422 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

8002 2 No Reports Selected No action is required. You are receiving a message that says that the job has no output reports selected to be generated.

8005 8 Name/Address Forward count not = Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at copies in Presort Stats 1-800-367-6950.

8017 8 Name/address file could not be This typically occurs when there is a JCL or script opened problem pointing to the input name/address file. Please check your script and specify the correct path/location/name of the input file.

8050 8 Only one alternate spacing is allowed Correct the REPORT parameter. See Chapter 1 of this guide.

8051 8 If VOLUME is not entered, then MailStream Plus requires length, height, and width to HEIGHT and LENGTH are required calculate volume. Please review the P ATTR layout in Chapter 1 of this guide.

8052 8 Conflicting NDC discount Correct the field specified for the flagged parameter. See Chapter 1 of this guide for parameter layouts.

8053 8 MSC File error requested: xxxx Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at returned: xxxx 1-800-367-6950.

8054 8 Value must be even if alternate Correct the REPORT parameter. See Chapter 1 of this spacing is used guide.

8055 8 Either NDC discount invalid for this Verify that ENT PT is valid for NDC discounts and that class/type of mail, or entry 3-digit xxx NDC discounts are valid for this class and type of mail. invalid for NDC rate This error can occur when using SCF PT parameter, but asking for NDC discount.

8058 8 Invalid DRPKEY [name] for Entry Verify that the DRPKEY or PLTKEY is valid for the entry Point [entry point] point specified in the message. This error occurs when adding keys to the ENT PT (entry point) table. Invalid PLTKEY [name] for Entry Point [entry point]

8060 UPA file selection not valid for The *.UPA file is not valid for the current mailing. "UPA" Class/Type of Mail stands for "Un-Coded Parcel Address Record," and is valid for parcels, only.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 423 Resolving Errors

Error Severity Text Description To Fix It... Code Level

8061 Mail.dat Parameter conflict This error is the result of one or more of the following conditions:

• You cannot select both the *.PDR and *.PBC files. • You must select the *.PDR file for *.SFR, *.UPA, or *.SFB file creation. • You must select the *.PDR or *.PBC file to use the *.EPD file. • You must select the *.SFR file to use the *.SFB file.

8062 Precanceled stamps not valid for Precanceled stamps are no longer valid for Parcel Select Parcel Select Lightweight Lightweight mail. Ensure that you have not specified option C in position 8 of the ALG PP parameter.

Error/Warning Messages

MailStream Plus verifies certain mailing-related settings in the job setup. Some settings may cause MailStream Plus to issue an abend message or a warning message. With the exception of non-MailStream Plus generated error messages, these messages may be found below "Interpretation of Presort Parameters," and "Informed Delivery" in the output report or in the execution log. The messages in the following table are arranged in alphabetical order to assist in speedy lookup and provide additional information regarding each message.

Table 14: Error/Warning Messages

Message Description

*** ERROR *** Campaign ???????? MailStream Plus could not create the campaign because of missing split or URL not created records. Ensure that you have defined the required records for your campaign.

*** ERROR *** Campaign ???????? MailStream Plus could not create the named campaign because of missing split not created due to no Split Records records. Ensure that you have defined the requred split records for your campaign.

*** ERROR *** Informed Delivery MailStream Plus could not find any completed campaigns defined within the Campaign not created due to no Informed Delivery campaign file. Ensure that you have defined the required Campaign Records records for your campaign.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 424 Resolving Errors

Message Description

*** ERROR *** Informed Delivery MailStream Plus could not create an Informed Delivery campaign, although requested but no campaign defined specified, because no campaign was defined. Ensure that you have defined the required records for your campaign.

*** ERROR *** Invalid Informed Delivery MailStream Plus could not locate the Informed Delivery campaign split you Split ???????? - P ATTR ???????? specified. Check your file and parameter definitions, including P ATTR and PA INF.

*** ERROR *** Split ???????? not MailStream Plus could not create the campaign split because of missing URL created for Campaign ???????? due records. Ensure that you have defined the required records for your campaign. to no URL Records

*** ERROR *** Split record ???????? MailStream Plus could not find a campaign record associated with the split not used record. Ensure that you have defined the required records for your campaign.

*** ERROR *** URL record ?????????? MailStream Plus could not find the split record associated with the URL record. not used Ensure that you have defined the required records for your campaign.

*** ERROR *** Split ????????? for A URL A and URL B are required for ID campaign validation. Campaign ????????? invalid due to missing required URL

*** WARNING *** The PRF is about to This warning will be issued when you have fewer than 10 days before the postal EXPIRE you have n days left reference file (PRF) will expire. The date in parentheses is the expiration date (MM/DD/YYYY) of the PRF.

3-digit carrier not permitted with flats In the type of mailing you are doing, you are not allowed to make a 3-digit carrier (ALG LV) route container. Check the ML TYP (Mail Type) and/or ALG LV parameters.

34 Disk Full The destination Disk is Full. This can also happen on z/OS when requesting an output file for which no DD has been defined in the JCL.

3DG (PS) bdls < QA may be created 3-digit bundles may be created for less than the qualifying amount. Because of piece thicknesses, bundles may be created that have less than the specified number of pieces. This is allowed and is correct under the DMM regulations.

5DG (PS) bdls < QA may be created 5 digit bundles may be created for less than the qualifying amount. Because of piece thicknesses, bundles may be created that have less than the specified number of pieces. This is allowed and is correct under the DMM regulations.

A mailpiece weight is under the limit for The specified weight for one or more P ATTR parameters is under the minimum this class of mail allowed (for example, USPS Marketing Mail Parcels with weights under 2 oz.).

ALG CR Enh CR (col 14) not valid You cannot select to get the Enhanced Carrier Route discount (position 14 of without LOT or W/S (col 12) the ALG CR parameter) if you have not indicated that your mailing is in either Line of Travel or Walk-Sequence order (position 12 of the ALG CR parameter).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 425 Resolving Errors

Message Description

ALG CR highest-level CR tray invalid The highest level Carrier Route tray in the job is not valid for First-Class mailings. for 1st Class Check the ALG LV parameters.

ALG CR Optimize set to N because ALG CR (Algorithm Carrier Route) optimization (ALG CR position 10) has been ENH CR or Automation is off set to on. However, the mailing does not have both ECR and Automation turned on indicating there is no optimization to do. This has resulted in optimization being turned off internally.

ALG LV must not attempt bags AND You cannot select to use both bags and trays in the same mailing. trays (cols 14-16)

ALG LV must not attempt bags AND This means you are attempting commingling with automation and non-automation trays when commingling mail pieces in the same mailing, and have set ALG LV parameters so some presort groups go into sacks, and some go into trays. For example, putting auto flats into trays, but non-auto flats into sacks. You need to turn off commingling using ALG AU position 10.

ALG PL BDLs on pallets invalid for ML The current job has an ALG PL parameter with a P in position 8 to request TYP values bundles on pallets. However, bundles on pallets are not allowed for the type of mailpieces defined (letters, for example). Please check the ALG PL parameter, position 8, and the ML TYP parameter, position 10, and correct as necessary.

ALG PL bdls on pallets invalid for ML The current job has an ALG PL parameter with a P in position 8 to request TYP values bundles on pallets. However, bundles on pallets are not allowed for the type of mailpieces defined (letters, for example). Please check the ALG PL parameter position 8, and the ML TYP parameter position 10, and correct as necessary.

ALG PL highest-level pallet invalid for The highest-level pallet specified in the job is invalid for First-Class mailings. 1st Class Check the PL LVL (Palletization Level) parameters, position 8-10.

ALG PS highest-level PS tray invalid The highest level tray in the job is not valid for First-Class mailings. Check the for 1st Class ALG LV parameters.

ASF Pallets turned off due to NDC MailStream Plus does not allow ASF pallets to be made when the parent level Pallets being turned off NDC pallet is turned off. MailStream Plus has turned off the ASF pallets affected.

At least one enhcr sub type must be set When processing ECR letters, one of the sub-classes must be set to Y. Check to Y the ALG CR parameter, positions 18, 19, 20, and 22.

Auto Flats & NonMach Per PCS not MailStream Plus does not support automation flats and non-machinable pieces allowed in the same mailing in the same mailing. Please check the P ATTR parameters, position 66. This means that MailStream Plus cannot do a Periodicals ("Per") flats mailing that has both Auto Flats (P ATTR position 66=Y), and NonMach flats (P ATTR position 66=F), pieces in the mailing.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 426 Resolving Errors

Message Description

Bdls < QA may be created due to BL Because of mail piece thickness, bundles may be created that have less than MAX thickness the specified minimum number of pieces. This may be permitted under DMM regulations.

Bdls < QA may be created due to BL Because of mail piece thickness and weight, bundles may be created that have MAX weight less than the specified minimum number of pieces. This may be permitted under DMM regulations.

Bdls < QA may be created due to PB Because of mail piece thickness and weight, bundles may be created that have MAX weight less than the specified minimum number of pieces. This may be permitted under DMM regulations.

Bdls on Pallets not allowed for IRREGs The DMM reference given specifies that Flats and Irregular Parcels that weigh > 10 lbs. 10 pounds or over cannot be bundled and go onto pallets.

BG MAX thickness < max piece The MAXIMUM container thickness is less than the thickness of one of more of thickness the pieces in the mailing. Therefore even one of the pieces could not be placed into the container, because it would exceed the thickness allowed. Please verify the piece(s) thickness dimensions given (P ATTR), and the BG MAX parameter.

BG MAX thickness <= BG FRC The specified (or default) MAXIMUM thickness for a container is less than or equal to the specified (or default) FORCE thickness for the container. MailStream Plus requires that the maximum thickness be greater than the force thickness.

BG MAX thickness <= BL MAX The MAXIMUM bag thickness is less than or equal to the bundle max thickness. thickness MailStream Plus requires that the Container maximum thickness be greater than the Bundle maximum thickness. Otherwise, bundles could be created that will not go into a container.

BG MAX volume < max piece volume The MAXIMUM container volume is less than the volume of one of more of the pieces in the mailing. Therefore even one of the pieces could not be placed into a bag, because it will not physically fit per the BG MAX parameter. Please verify the piece(s) dimensions given (P ATTR), and the BG MAX parameter.

BG MAX volume <= BG FRC The specified (or default) MAXIMUM volume for a container is less than or equal to the specified (or default) FORCE volume for the container. MailStream Plus requires that the maximum volume be greater than the force volume.

BG MAX volume <= BL MAX volume The MAXIMUM bag volume is less than or equal to the bundle maximum volume. MailStream Plus requires that the Container maximum volume be greater than the Bundle maximum volume. Otherwise, bundles could be created that will not go into a container.

BG MAX weight < max piece weight The MAXIMUM container weight is less than the weight of one or more of the pieces in the mailing. Therefore you cannot allow even one of the pieces to be placed into a bag, because the resulting bag would be heavier than the container

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 427 Resolving Errors

Message Description

maximum for the job. Please verify the piece(s) weights given, and the BG MAX parameter.

BG MAX weight <= BG FRC The specified (or default) MAXIMUM weight for a container is less than or equal to the specified (or default) FORCE weight for the container. MailStream Plus requires that the maximum weight be greater than the force weight.

BG MAX weight <= BL MAX weight The MAXIMUM bag weight is less than or equal to the bundle weight. MailStream Plus requires that the Container maximum weight be greater than the Bundle maximum weight, otherwise, bundles could be created that will not go into a container.

BL MAX thickness < max piece Bundle MAXIMUM thickness is less than piece thickness. Bundle maximum thickness thickness is less than the thickness of one or more of the pieces. MailStream Plus requires that the Bundle maximum thickness be equal to or greater than the thickness of individual piece(s). Otherwise, pieces will not go into a bundle. Check the BL MAX, PB MAX, and P ATTR parameters.

BL MAX volume < max piece volume Bundle MAXIMUM volume is less than the volume of one or more of the pieces. MailStream Plus requires that the Bundle maximum volume be greater than or equal to the volume of individual piece(s). Otherwise, pieces cannot go into a bundle. Check the BL MAX, PB MAX, and P ATTR parameters.

BL MAX weight < max piece weight Bundle MAXIMUM weight is less than the weight of one or more of the pieces. MailStream Plus requires that the bundle maximum weight be greater than or equal to the weight of individual piece(s). Otherwise, pieces cannot go into a bundle. Check the BL MAX, PB MAX, and P ATTR parameters.

Both Auto and Non-Auto must be put If Co-bundling and palletizing, both the auto and non-auto portions of the mailing on pallets must be palletized. Check the ALG PL and ML TYP parameters.

Cannot assign INBOUND Mailer ID as This message occurs when the IMBINB parameter contains "S" in position 12 Same no OUTBOUND IMB created at (read the Mailer ID the same as the IMBOUT); however, for some reason, the record xxxxxxxxx (could be any record Intelligent Mail® barcode was not created for the outbound value. When the number) IMBINB parameter tries to use the same Mailer ID as the IMBOUT parameter, no value exists to be read. To correct this, change the value "S" in position 12 of the IMBINB to "R" or "I".

Cannot have both Auto and Manual IMB On the IMBCTL parameter, the "Serial Number Assignment Mode" field option serial number for the Shipping Services file serial number is generated by one method (Auto or Manual), while on the IMBOUT parameter, the "Serial Number Assignment" field for the IM® package Barcode serial number is generated by another method. Both parameter's settings must generate the serial number using the same method.

Cards and Letters not allowed in same You cannot mail postcards and letters in the same MailStream Plus automation Auto run job. ALG BC position 8 should be set to N.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 428 Resolving Errors

Message Description

Carrier (16) invalid for Periodicals Current USPS regulations require that Periodical Carrier Route mail be in unless LOT or Walk Seq Line-Of-Travel or Walk-Sequence order. MailStream Plus does not allow you to turn on ALG CR position 16 unless position 12 is L or W.

Carrier (column 16) invalid for Mail Position 16 of the ALG CR parameter is not valid for First-Class or USPS Class and/or Type Marketing Mail or certain mail types in Package Services.

Co-bundle sort invalid for Mail Class Co-bundling is not allowed for the Mail Class or Mailpiece type. Check the ML and/or Type TYP parameter position 14 and 16, and the ALG BL parameter position 12.

Co-bundled Bags on pallets not valid To perform a co-bundled-bags-on-pallets presort, commingling must be turned when not Co-palleting on in position 10 of the ALG AU parameter.

Co-bundled sort w/o CR performed due This message may occur under certain circumstances when merged bundle to 5DGS and co-bundled presorting and L007 5-digit scheme level are both on (the default). Per USPS regulations, mailings with merged bundles utilizing 5-digit scheme (L007) bundle preparation must use the preparation instructions in DMM section "Merging Bundles of Flats Using the City State Product". This message is only indicating that MailStream Plus has performed this type of sort without Carrier Route.

Co-bundling not valid Check ML TYP position 14 and 16, and ALG BL position 12 to ensure that you have specified the correct options.

Co-bundling not valid when not You cannot co-bundle mailpieces to go on pallets if commingling is turned off Co-Palleting [commingling] Pallets via the ALG AU parameter.

Confirm/ASN is invalid due to error(s) Check previous message(s) in the execution log to determine the cause of the as reported Confirm/ASN being invalid.

Containers < FORCE may occur due Because of the mailpiece's volume, weight, thickness, and/or the maximum to piece size or parameters number of pieces that have been specified for a bundle or sack, MailStream Plus may not be able to physically fit the container FORCE amount of mail into a single container. The default destination FORCE amount for flats in sacks, for example, is the USPS minimums of 125 pieces or 15 pounds of mail. Since overflow containers have been turned off in this job either by the MailStream Plus defaults or manually on an ALG LV parameter, this could result in MailStream Plus creating a destination sack or sacks that do not have the required destination minimums in it. We recommend leaving ALG LV position 20 blank so the default will be used. For a mailing in sacks you can use ALG LV position 14 and 16 to set MailStream Plus to use a larger container. The default containers used for each class/type of mailing can be found specified on the ALG LV parameter positions 14 and 16.

Copalletization [commingling] invalid Copalletization (commingling) is not allowed for the type of mailing being for Class and/or Type Turned off prepared. ALG AU position 10 controls commingling. To turn off commingling, specify "N" in ALG AU position 10.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 429 Resolving Errors

Message Description

CP FRC trays < CP MIN trays Commingled pallet force number of trays is less than the commingled pallet minimum number of trays. The number of trays to force a commingled pallet at must be equal to or greater than the minimum number of trays allowed on a commingled pallet.

CP FRC volume < CP MIN volume MailStream Plus requires that the volume to FORCE a commingled pallet be equal to or greater than the commingled pallet minimum volume.

CP FRC weight < CP MIN weight The weight to force a commingled pallet must be equal to or greater than the minimum weight allowed on a commingled pallet.

CP MAX trays not 2 times FORCE MailStream Plus requires that the MAXIMUM number of trays that can go on a commingled pallet be at least 2 times the FORCE number of trays. In a situation where there are more trays to a pallet destination than will fit onto a single commingled pallet, MailStream Plus needs to be able to split the trays onto two pallets, and still have each pallet have at least the FORCE number of trays on it.

CP MAX volume not 2 times FORCE MailStream Plus requires that the MAXIMUM volume that can go on a commingled pallet be at least 2 times the FORCE volume. In a situation where there is more volume to a pallet destination than will fit onto a single pallet, MailStream Plus needs to be able to split the mail onto two pallets, and still have each pallet have at least the FORCE volume on it.

CP MAX weight not 2 times FORCE MailStream Plus requires that the MAXIMUM volume that can go on a commingled pallet be at least 2 times the FORCE weight. In a situation where there is more weight to a pallet destination than will fit onto a single pallet, MailStream Plus needs to be able to split the mail onto two pallets, and still have each pallet have at least the FORCE weight on it.

CPT-1139/1140:MDLPVN Both Volume/Issue Number must be present; or both must be blank.

CR bdls < QA may be created Carrier Route bundles less than the Qualifying Amount may be created. Because of piece thicknesses, bundles may be created that have less than the specified number of pieces. This is allowed and is correct under the DMM regulations.

DMM Auto-Compatible ECR turned off This message is for information purposes only. Carrier Route mail must be - non-compatible mailing prepared under certain DMM rules. In this mailing, all of the pieces qualify for one preparation, so other preparations are turned off. For more information see the ALG CR parameter, positions 18-22.

DMM general ECR turned off because This message is for information purposes only. Carrier Route mail must be Auto-Compatible ECR is on prepared under certain DMM rules. In this mailing, all of the pieces qualify for one preparation, so other preparations are turned off. For more information, see the ALG CR parameter, positions 18-22.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 430 Resolving Errors

Message Description

DMMxxxxxx merged pallet sort not valid The palletization option set on ML TYP position 16 is not allowed for the mail for type of piece piece type defined by ML TYP position 10.

DMMxxxxxx sortation not valid for The sortation you have selected is not valid for the Mail Class or mailpiece type selected mail class/type defined in position 8 and 10 of the ML TYP parameter. This could occur because of a conflict between the ML TYP position 8-10 and ML TYP positions 14-16, or by a conflict between the ML TYP position 8-10 and another parameter(s) in the mail job setup.

Does not match the Software version This message displays in the execution log and begins with the database version, as in "R07.9M00 Does not match the Software version". This message defines that the version of the database being used does not match the version of the MailStream Plus software. The software version can be found at the top of the report. To resolve this error message, load and use a database version that matches the software version.

Enhanced Carrier invalid for Mail Class The type of mailing that you are doing per the ML TYP parameter does not allow and/or Type for Enhanced Carrier Route presort.

Entry Point code not found. Check your An entry point code found during the Report step does not match entry points posting positions in the mailing. Please check the job's POSTxx parameter positions to ensure that they are not in conflict. Specifically, verify that no other POSTxx parameter is overwriting any part of the 9-bytes posted by the POSTEI parameter, positions 12-14.

EP MIN with destination of xxxxxxxxx The destination entry point ID on a EP MIN parameter(s) is not found. Check is invalid EP MIN parameters position 18-26 and XXX PT parameters position 12-20. (XXX PT = ENT PT, NDC PT, SCF PT, and ADC PT).

EP MIN with source of xxxxxxxxx The source entry point on a EP MIN parameter does not match one of the ENT Ignored PT parameters entry point ID's, so has been ignored. Check EP MIN positions 8-16, and XXX PT parameter position 12-20. (XXX PT = ENT PT, NDC PT, SCF PT, and ADC PT).

EP ROL invalid for Mail Class and/or EP ROL has been specified, but is not supported for the defined class of mail. Type Check the ML TYP parameters positions 8 and 10, and the EP ROL parameter information to find what Mail Classes are supported with the EP ROL parameters.

ERROR ENNNN when calling Note that "ENNNN" represents the MAIL360 generated error code. Please refer MAIL360..... to your MAIL360 documentation for the most up-to-date and detailed information on MAIL360 generated error messages.

File not selected for MDMFCF Confirm This error occurs when the MDMFCF Confirm Indicator field does not agree with selection the REPORT MAILDAT file selected. To resolve this error:

• Determine the file set with the Confirm Indicator. • Verify that the REPORT MAILDAT parameter is set to turn on that file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 431 Resolving Errors

Message Description

FILE=MSRPALP FUNCT=OPEN EXT This message occurs when using positions 60-67 on any REPORT parameter FILE NM=xxxxxxxx to choose an alternative REPORT output file without defining a DD statement for the output file. The xxxxxxxx represents the contents of the REPORT parameter in positions 60-67. To resolve this error, define a DD or SET DD statement for the new output file name.

Finding Mailer ID-nnnnnn Serial String "nnnnnn" in the error message is the actual Mailer ID number. This error Number Check IMBSER occurs when generating the Shipping Services File when there is no IMBSER to match the Mailer ID on the TRNMID subkeyword.

Finding Mailer ID-xxx Check your This message occurs when a Mailer ID is checked and identified as invalid. The Posting positions value "xxx" is replaced with the bad data from the job processing. This message can result from one or both of the following conditions:

• Data fields are being posted on top of other data fields. Verify the:

• POSTxx parameter posting locations and lengths • Intelligent Mail® barcode 31-byte number • 65-byte TADF posting locations

• The length of the output Name/Address file is not correct for the data being posted. Verify that the length specified by FILEDF MSNAON is defined correctly (or that an ADDLBF parameter is being used to add buffer space).

Flats in letter trays not allowed for Piece This message can occur when attempting to put auto flats into tray containers. ID x due to Thickness/Wgt ratio Based on the default or manually-input settings for QU AMT and BG MAX, the piece attributes for the Piece ID specified will not allow the required minimum number of pieces or minimum weight to physically fit into the tray containers used. Please refer to the P ATTR, QU AMT and BG MAX parameters

FSM1000 AND AFSM100 PCS not MailStream Plus does not support FSM1000 and AFSM100 pieces in the same allowed in the same mailing mailing.

G1IMBXRF Environment variable not This error primarily occurs on Windows platforms, when the job is set to produce set the Mail Piece File, but there is no G1IMBXRF environment variable set to define the output file. The IMBCTL parameter's position 28 would be set to X or M to select to generate the Mail Piece File. The only purpose of generating this file is for uploading to the Pitney Bowes Software MAIL360 Data Manager™ application. If Mail360 Data Manager is not being used by your business, then you do not need to generate the Mail Piece file. Removing the selection will resolve the error. If you require the Mail Piece File, add the variable using one of these methods:

• Add it to the System Variables list using Start > Settings > Control Panel > System >Advanced tab > Environment Variables. • Alternatively, if MailStream Plus is only used in batch mode, you can add the variable to the jobname.bat file using something SET G1IMBXRF=D:\mailpiecefile.txt

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 432 Resolving Errors

Message Description

G1PIOMGR: BUFFER AREA This error typically occurs during report-writing. To correct this error, reduce the EXCEEDED blocksizes specified on one or more of the following parameters:

• FILEDF MSSTON • FILEDF MSNAIN • FILEDF MSNAON

There is no rule for calculating the correct size to avoid the error. You might need to try reducing the blocksizes by 10%-50% or more until the job no longer generates this error.

IMBINB ignored due to settings on The IMBCTL parameter does not show that Intelligent Mail® barcode inbound IMBCTL processing is selected, so the IMBINB parameter is ignored.

IMBOUT ignored due to settings on The IMBCTL parameter does not show that Intelligent Mail® barcode outbound IMBCTL processing is selected, so the IMBOUT parameter is ignored.

IMBSER ignored; IMBOUT parameter The IMBSER parameter (serial number assignment) is ignored if there is no omitted IMBOUT parameter defined.

IMBSER ignored; IMBOUT serial The IMBSER parameter is ignored when position 20 of the IMBOUT parameter number assignment not Manual (serial number assignment) does not contain "M" for "Manual."

Invalid combination of rate foot notes This error results from an invalid combination of rate footnotes for Priority Mail. in Priority Mail Verify the P ATTR values specified in position 61.

Invalid IMB created This is most often caused when the Intelligent Mail® barcode parameters are set to use an existing 31-byte Intelligent Mail® barcode in your name/address records and the field contains invalid information.

Invalid IMB The value "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" represents the bad 31-byte xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx No Intelligent Mail® barcode number in the record. The value "nnnnnnnnn" represents TADF Created at record nnnnnnnnn the record number of the record in the output file. This error shows that the 31-byte Intelligent Mail® barcode number is invalid. The Intelligent Mail® barcode number can be invalid due to one or both of the following conditions: A preassigned Intelligent Mail® barcode number passed in on the Name/Address record is invalid. Please check the value in the input records. A preassigned Intelligent Mail® barcode number or one that is generated by MailStream Plus becomes invalid because other data is being posted into the Intelligent Mail® barcode number field. Please check locations and lengths for all POSTxx parameters.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 433 Resolving Errors

Message Description

Invalid Mailer ID xxxxxxxxx at record The value "xxxxxxxxx" shows the bad Mailer ID. The value "yyyyyyyyy" indicates number yyyyyyyyy the number of the output Name/Address records that include the invalid Mailer ID. The Mailer ID can be invalid due to:

• Specifying a Mailer ID length of 6 when the first byte of the Mailer ID is a 9 • A length of 9 when the first byte is 0-8 • A non-numeric character in the Mailer ID data field.

Generally, this occurs when the IMBOUT or IMBINB parameter is set to obtain the Mailer ID from the Name/Address records but the Mailer ID is invalid.

Invalid Service Type xxx at record This error occurs when the value R is specified in position 30 of the IMBOUT number yyyyyyyyy and/or IMBINB parameters. The value "R" in position 30 indicates that the IMB Service Type ID is to be found in the name/address records at the location specified in positions 32-34 of the parameter. The value "xxx" is the actual invalid text that is found in a name/address record. The error occurs when "xxx" is not a 3-digit number. The value "yyyyyyyyy" indicates the output record number that contains the bad data. To correct this, verify that:

• Position 30 is set correctly • There is a number in the name/address record location specified in positions 32-34

LN & HT missing for max bundle To correctly calculate the allowed maximum bundle thickness, enter the mailpiece thickness calc. Using 5 pcs length and height on all P ATTR parameters.

Machinable sort invalid for Mail Class Machinable presort is invalid for the mail class/type specified. Check the ML and/or Type TYP parameter positions 8 and 10, or the ALG BC parameter position 26.

Mail Induction Date is out of Range for MailStream Plus generates this warning when the mail induction date specified the PRF due via INF MDMFSD is either less than the start date or greater than the end date of any USPS Data in the PRF. Please verify the specified mail induction date specified by INF MDMFSD.

Mail.dat is invalid due to error(s) as This may be an error or a warning, depending on position 46 of the REPORT reported. MAILDAT parameter or whether PostalOne! is selected. Check previous message(s) in the execution log to determine the cause of the Mail.dat being invalid. Then re-submit the job.

Mailer ID Serial num mismatch The text indicated by the x's is the Mailer ID and Serial Number information. The xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx at record number text indicated by the n's is the output record number in which the error occurred. nnnnnnnnn This error message indicates that the total length of the Mailer ID field plus the Serial Number field does not equal the 15-byte length required for the Intelligent Mail® barcode. Review the IMBOUT parameter (and IMBINB, if used) to determine how the two fields are being defined in the job, and verify the specified lengths.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 434 Resolving Errors

Message Description

MDMFPD 'T' Periodicals Pending and MDMFPD payment method value "T" requires an XX INF PMTPM# parameter PMTPM# blank that defines the permit number.

Merging bundles using City/State not The palletization option set on ML TYP position 16 is not allowed for the mail valid for type of piece piece type defined by ML TYP position 10 and/or the P ATTR position 66 value.

Missing MDLPPC user license code, Because the job does not have a RP INF MDLPPC to input the Mail.dat license only producing csm file code, only the Mail.dat *.CSM file will be populated. On Windows and UNIX/Linux, the other Mail.dat files will be automatically deleted because they are empty. On the IBM® i and z/OS platforms, the other files will remain, but will be empty.

Mixed P ATTR rate types not permitted Mixed P ATTR rate types are not valid for Priority Mail. Correct the P ATTR for Priority Mail parameter settings and resubmit.

ML TYP mail type invalid for class of The mailpiece type defined (position 10 of the ML TYP parameter) is not allowed mail in the Mail Class defined (position 8 of the ML TYP parameter).

MSWKNRC has been manually turned The MSWKNRC work file may be required to correctly create some Reports in off but may be required certain conditions, for example REPORT RUNSTATS. We recommend not using the OPT FL parameter to manually turn the MSWKNRC file off unless you are doing so for a specific reason.

MSXXVP00 Ended abnormally. MSXXVP00 is the Verify Parameters program. This message in the execution Processing terminated. log shows that there are error(s) in the job parameters or the job is missing required parameters. There may be additional messages preceding the error message in the XLG execution log and/or messages in the output RPT report file. The parameters are listed at the beginning of the report file.

• There may be # signs indicating invalid values underneath the failing parameter, with additional information to the right, beginning in column 81. • There may be messages at the end of the parameters list regarding missing required parameters.

MXC (PS) bdls < QA may be created Mixed City Bundles may be created for less than the qualifying amount. Because of piece thicknesses, bundles may be created that have less than the specified number of pieces. This is allowed and is correct under the DMM regulations.

No destination ADC for class, set to 'N', At least one of the XXX PT parameters in the mailing has been selected for an ENT PT = xxxxxxxxx ADC discount. ADC discounts are not available for the class of mail in this mailing. Check any XXX PT parameters and/or the ML TYP parameter. (XXX PT = ENT PT, NDC PT, SCF PT, and ADC PT).

No NDC for mail class, set to 'N', ENT At least one of the XXX PT parameters in the mailing has been selected for an PT = xxxxxxxxx NDC discount. NDC discounts are not available for the class of mail in this mailing. Check any XXX PT parameters and/or the ML TYP parameter. (XXX PT = ENT PT, NDC PT, SCF PT, and ADC PT).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 435 Resolving Errors

Message Description

One or more .csm IMB upper/lower are This error occurs when one of the following conditions exist: blank • An IMBOUT parameter created the Intelligent Mail® barcodes; however, an OPT FL parameter prevented the Intelligent Mail® barcodes from being written to the .nrc file for use in Mail.dat. To resolve this error, remove the OPT FL parameter from your parameter file/definition. • The MSNAON Name/Address output file record length is too short to contain all the information being posted by MailStream Plus. • The posting parameter's locations in the Name/Address file may be causing data to be written on top of each other.

One or more bundle number errors This can occur when POSTxx parameters are writing data over each other. For detected in name record file example POSTPI and another POSTxx parameter. Verify that all POSTxx parameters in the job are posting data to unique locations.

One or more cqt/csm copy count errors One or more of these messages in the execution log indicates that the Mail.dat detected. files are invalid because count errors were detected. Contact Technical Support for assistance: 1-800-367-6950. One or more cqt/csm piece count errors detected. One or more cqt/pqt copy count errors detected. One or more cqt/pqt piece count errors detected.

One or more CSM-1167 locale keys Refer to the error message "One or more required *.csm Actual Postal Codes blank, LOCY00000 used. are blank," on the next row of this table, for a description of this error message.

One or more detail statistics mismatch This message indicates that the Mail.dat files are invalid because a conflict was errors detected in name record file detected in the data being used to create the files. The most common reasons are:

• One or more of the job's required POSTxx parameters are posting on top of each other. • The job has required POSTxx values set to post to locations past the end of the output name/address file.

Check the posting locations and lengths of the POSTxx parameters in the job, and the length of the FILEDF MSNAON parameter. For further assistance, please contact Technical Support: 1-800-367-6950.

One or more IMB serial numbers Externally assigned Intelligent Mail® barcode codes are not numeric. Or, the invalid, ignored. IMBOUT parameter is pointing to the wrong place in the name/address record. Determine the problem and correct it.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 436 Resolving Errors

Message Description

One or more key code errors detected This message occurs when the job includes a REPORT MAILDAT parameter in name record file AND there are seed records found using the S CODE parameter, but: The job is missing the K CODE parameter, or the K CODE parameter is pointing to a blank field in the name/address records. If there is no K CODE parameter present, MailStream Plus uses an L CODE parameter (if present) instead.

One or more MDMFPD warnings, This message occurs if the ALG PP payment method parameter (or default posted but please check value) does not agree with the payment method indicated on the XX INF MDMFPD subkeyword. To resolve the warning, ensure that the two parameter settings are in agreement.

One or more not enough records errors One cause of this error is when the NRC file (Name Record Control file) is detected in name record file required, but has been manually turned off with an OPT FL parameter. To resolve this error, remove the OPT FL parameter from the job, or change OPT FL position 8 to a Y. This can also be caused by the FILEDF MSNAON record length not being long enough for all of the information posted by the POSTxx parameters. Or, if using ADDLBF to provide an additional NA buffer, the total of the FILEDF MSNAON and the ADDLBF buffer must be large enough to accommodate all posted information. To resolve this error, ensure that the length for the FILEDF MSNAON is large enough for all of the posted data. Or, if using an ADDLBF parameter, ensure that the combined MSNAON and ADDLBF lengths are adequate.

One or more permit number additional There is invalid data on the PA INF or RP INF parameter with the subkeyword postage errors detected PMTPMA. Check for non-numeric characters.

One or more permit number errors There is invalid data on the PA INF or RP INF parameter with the subkeyword detected PMTPM#. Check for non-numeric characters.

One or more PostalOne required .csm Indicates that the job requires an IMBCNT parameter and/or an IMBPLT IM Barcodes are blank parameter (if palletizing the mail).

One or more PostalOne required One or more of the CQT-1112 service level indicators required by PostalOne! CQT-1112 service Level Indicators are is blank. blank To resolve this error, add a RP INF MDMFSP parameter.

One or more rates appear obsolete, Regulations have caused one or more rates to become obsolete. Check postage check postage. amounts for abnormally large values. Change presort settings to not presort to obsolete rates. Upgrade to the latest version of MailStream Plus.

One or more required .csm Actual One or both of these messages may appear. The Locale Key and/or Postal Postal Codes are blank. Code fields are blank in the Mail.dat .csm file because MailStream Plus was

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 437 Resolving Errors

Message Description

One or more CSM-1167 locale keys unable to determine the specific entry facility for one or more container(s) of blank, LOCY00000 used. mail. To populate the field(s) with the appropriate information, MailStream Plus requires more information. To resolve the error, try the first suggestion. If that suggestion does not resolve the error, try the subsequent suggestions:

• If you are entering the mail at an SCF, ADC, ASF, or NDC, put a facility type of S, R, A, or B in column 64 of the ENT PT parameter. • If you are eligible for an ADC, SCF, ASF, or NDC drop ship discount, request the discount in columns 58, 60, or 61 of the ENT PT parameter. • Select a NDC PT, SCF PT, or ADC PT parameter instead of the ENT PT parameter. • Check XX INF RPDATE or HEADER positions 8-17. Verify that the date is a correct and recent date. MailStream Plus checks this date against the Mail Direction file data to make sure the date is in a valid date range for the locale codes being used. • Add an INF DRPKEY or INF PLTKEY parameter to the RP INF, EP INF, or BATINF parameter(s). • Add an INF MDMFEP parameter to the RP INF, EP INF, or BATINF parameter(s). This is only used to populate the Postal Code field (CSM-1168) when MailStream Plus is unable to determine the drop site ZIP Code.

One or more RMR-1005 URLs exceeds Ensure that the URL does not exceed 250 characters; correct as needed. 250 characters

One or more RMR-1008 Template This message is generated during Mail.dat RMR file generation. Ensure that Codes are invalid the template code contains the letters A through Z.

One or more URLs within NA record Ensure that the URLs are all defined in the NA record. were blank

One or more USPS publication number This message occurs when using PUBLNR when the Mail Class is not errors detected Periodicals.

One or more xxxxxx errors detected, The value "xxxxxx" indicates the specific subkeyword on the xx INF (BATINF, and not posted EP INF, or RP INF) parameter. This message indicates that the data was incorrect and was not posted. Please review the subkeyword specified, and verify the positions and values defined for the parameter.

One or more xxxxxx warnings, posted The value "xxxxxx" indicates the specific subkeyword on the xx INF (BATINF, but please check EP INF, or RP INF) parameter. This message indicates that the data appears incorrect, but was posted. Please review the subkeyword specified, and verify the positions and values defined for the parameter.

Option invalid for Mail Class and/or ALG LV position 20=F: Prepare overflow trays with rate preservation is only Type - ALG LV position 20 allowed for First-Class automation letters, USPS Marketing Mail automation letters, and USPS Marketing Mail Machinable letters. If you are not preparing one of these types of mailpieces/mail classes, you may not use option F in ALG

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 438 Resolving Errors

Message Description

LV position 20. If you are preparing one of these types of mail/mail class combinations, please check the ML TYP, ALG BC, ZIP IN, ALG LV (position 24), and P ATTR parameters to verify that the correct options are selected.

Option invalid for Mail Class and/or ALG LV position 22 set to "Y" is not valid for the class and type of mail. Type - ALG LV position 22

Option invalid for palletization type - There is a conflict between the palletization that has been selected and the type option disabled: ML TYP column 16 of presort. The information following the colon may differ from the message at left. In the case of ML TYP column 16, it means that you requested to sort a palletized bags mailing, which is not allowed.

Out of DMM limit for Auto Flats P ATTR The value "xxxxxxxxx" indicates the actual Piece ID. P ATTR position 66 has a set to F; PID=xxxxxxxxx Y to indicate that the flat mail piece meets the DMM requirements. But one or more of the dimensions or weight on the indicated P ATTR parameter does not meet those limits so position 66 was changed to an F.

Out of DMM limit for auto, P ATTR(66) The value "xxxxxxxxx" indicates the actual Piece ID. P ATTR position 66 has a set to N; PID=xxxxxxxxx Y to indicate that the mail piece is physically automation-compatible. However, one or more dimensions of the mail piece do not meet the USPS regulations for automation-compatible mail. The Automation indicator has been changed to N. If the piece should qualify as automation, please check the dimensions on the P ATTR parameter.

Outbound STID not Found nnn at STID is the Service Type ID. The actual STID number found is the value 'nnn'. record number xxxxxxxxx The output record number that the error occurred on is the value "xxxxxxxxx". This error occurs when the STID value is not correct. Please verify that the STID value is correct for the Class of Mail, Mail Type, and Presort Type indicated on the ML TYP parameter positions 8-12.

P ATTR over weight limit for this class The weight specified on one or more the P ATTR parameters indicates that the of mail xxxxxxxxx mailpieces are over the USPS maximum weight limits for this class of mail. Check the P ATTR parameters positions 24-28 and 70, and the ML TYP parameter positions 8 and 10.

P ATTR rate type not permitted for ML The type of mail piece indicated on the P ATTR (Piece Attribute) parameter is TYP class not permitted in the class or type of mail indicated on the ML TYP (Mail Type) parameter. Check the P ATTR parameter position 60, and the ML TYP parameter position 8 and 10.

Pallet level invalid for Mail Class and/or A pallet level was turned on using the PL LVL parameter that is invalid for the Type Mail Class and/or Mail Type for this job.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 439 Resolving Errors

Message Description

Palletization not selected.DMMxxx You have selected a palletization option presort, but palletization is not turned sortation ignored. on. MailStream Plus ignored the optional DMM sortation that was indicated. Check the ALG PL parameter, and also the ML TYP parameter positions 14 and 16.

Parcel Reverse presort invalid-option This error occurs when attempting to create a reverse presort with Parcels when disabled due to bundles on Pallets putting bundles on Pallets. You cannot create a reverse presort with Parcels when putting bundles on pallets.

PB MAX weight < max piece weight The maximum bundle weight defined on the PB MAX parameter is less than the weight of single mail pieces in the mailing. This prohibits any mail pieces from being bundled correctly. Check the P ATTR parameters weights, and the PB MAX parameters in positions 12-16.

Piece dim exceeded for Priority Cubic The value "xxxxxxxxx" indicates the actual Piece ID. The specified mailpiece rates PID xxxxxxxxx dimensions exceed the allowed dimensions for Priority Mail Cubic rates. For Priority Mail Cubic rates, all dimensions used to calculate the values entered in the P ATTR parameter in positions 30-34, 36-40, and 42-46 should be rounded down to the nearest 1/4 inch. No single dimension is allowed to exceed 18 inches.

Piece IMB (IMBCTL) invalid for Mail Intelligent Mail® barcode processing is not permitted for the type of mailing being Class and/or Type processed. Please see the USPS regulations for what Classes/Mailpiece types are allowed.

PL FRC trays < PL MIN trays Pallet force number of trays is less than the pallet minimum number of trays. The number of trays to force a pallet at must be equal to or greater than the minimum number of trays allowed on a pallet.

PL FRC volume < PL MIN volume Pallet force volume is less than the pallet minimum volume. The volume to force a pallet at must be equal to or greater than the minimum volume allowed on a pallet.

PL FRC weight < PL MIN weight Pallet force weight is less than Pallet minimum weight. The weight to force a pallet at must be equal to or greater than the minimum weight allowed on a pallet.

PL MAX trays not 2 times FORCE MailStream Plus requires that the MAXIMUM number of trays that can go on a pallet be at least 2 times the FORCE number of trays. In a situation where there are more trays to a pallet destination than will fit onto a single pallet, MailStream Plus needs to be able to split the trays onto two pallets, and still have each pallet have at least the FORCE number of trays on it.

PL MAX volume not 2 times FORCE Pallet max volume is not 2 times the Pallet force amount. MailStream Plus requires that the MAXIMUM volume that can go on a pallet be at least 2 times the FORCE volume. In a situation where there is more volume to a pallet destination than will fit onto a single pallet, MailStream Plus needs to be able

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 440 Resolving Errors

Message Description

to split the volume onto two pallets, and still have each pallet have at least the FORCE volume on it.

PL MAX weight not 2 times FORCE Pallet Max weight is not 2 times the Pallet force weight. MailStream Plus requires that the MAXIMUM weight that can go on a pallet be at least 2 times the FORCE weight. In a situation where there is more weight to a pallet destination than will fit onto a single pallet, MailStream Plus needs to be able to split the weight onto two pallets, and still have each pallet have at least the FORCE weight on it.

Postal Reference file has Expired This error occurs when the current system date is greater than any end date of USPS DATA used in the Postal Reference file. Please install a current Postal Reference file.

POSTLB Optional OEL processing not The Optional OEL has been specified to be posted, but does not apply to the valid for class/type class/type of mailing in this job. Check the POSTLB parameter position 24 and/or the ML TYP parameter positions 8 and 10.

Presort Verification Date is out of MailStream Plus generates a warning when the presort verification date specified Range for the PRF due to Value of INF via INF MDMFVZ is either less than the start date or greater than the end date MDMFVZ of any USPS Data in the PRF. Please verify the presort verification date specified by INF MDMFVZ.

Reverse presort invalid with DMMxxx Reverse presort cannot be done under the DMM regulations for the class/type set Reverse presort off or presort in the mailing. Reverse Presort was set to off in MailStream Plus. Check the ML TYP parameter positions 14-16, and the ALG PL parameter positions 24 and 26.

RS bdls < force may be created Residual bundles may be created less that the force amount. Because of piece thicknesses, bundles may be created that have less than the specified number of pieces. This is allowed and is correct under the DMM regulations.

RS bdls < force may be created due to Because of mail piece thickness, bundles may be created that have less than BL MAX thickness the specified minimum number of pieces. This may be permitted under DMM regulations.

RS bdls < force may be created due to Because of mail piece thickness and weight, bundles may be created that have BL MAX weight less than the specified minimum number of pieces. This may be permitted under DMM regulations.

RS bdls < force may be created due to Because of mail piece thickness and weight, bundles may be created that have PB MAX weight less than the specified minimum number of pieces. This may be permitted under DMM regulations.

Sort of Invalid ZIPs unavailable for Mail The message occurs when ALG PS position 18 is set to a Y to process Invalid Class and/or Type ZIP Codes as single piece mail; however, the option is not supported for the class of mail being processed. Please refer to ALG PS position 18 for the supported classes of mail for this option.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 441 Resolving Errors

Message Description

SRVFRQ invalid with Preassigned The current job contains an IMBINB and/or IMBOUT parameter in which position INBOUND IMB; SRVFRQ ignored 11 indicates that the name/address input records already contain a pre-assigned Intelligent Mail® barcode. In this case the SRVFRQ parameter cannot be used SRVFRQ invalid with Preassigned to change the Inbound or Outbound Service Type IDs. MailStream Plus uses OUTBOUND IMB; SRVFRQ ignored the pre-assigned Intelligent Mail® barcode value and ignores the SRVFRQ parameter.

The PRF Mail Induction Date Validation The optional Mail Induction Date is provided by using the xx INF MDMFSD not done due to Missing INF MDMFSD parameter. Depending on the option selected in CONTRL position 54, MailStream Plus will either generate a warning (the default) message, or will abend with an error, if the date is not provided.

TLBLKS capacity exceeded This error is caused by a Carrier Route job with a large number of input records. The DTRECS table limit was exceeded. Add this parameter: TABLSZ DTRECS nnnnnn Replace the default table size, represented by "nnnnnn," with 004000. Depending upon the file being presorted, this may need to be increased. Maximum is 20000.

TLBLKS remain in use The number at the beginning of the error represents the number of TLBLKS remaining. Call Pitney Bowes Software Technical Support at 1-800-367-6950, or e-mail [email protected].

TR MAX thickness < max piece The MAXIMUM thickness allowed for a container is less than the thickness of thickness one or more pieces in the mailing. Therefore the piece(s) would not be able to be placed into a container. Check the P ATTR parameter (Piece Attributes) or the BG MAX parameter.

TR MAX thickness <= BL MAX The MAXIMUM thickness allowed for a container is less than or equal to the thickness MAXIMUM thickness allowed for a bundle. The maximum thickness for a container must be larger than the maximum thickness for a bundle, so that a bundle can go into the container.

TR MAX volume < max piece volume The MAXIMUM volume allowed for a container is less than the volume of one or more pieces in the mailing. Therefore the piece(s) would not be able to be placed into a container. Check the P ATTR parameter (Piece Attributes) or the BG MAX parameter.

TR MAX volume <= BL MAX volume The MAXIMUM volume allowed for a container is less than or equal to the MAXIMUM volume allowed for a bundle. The maximum volume for a container must be larger than the maximum volume for a bundle, so that a bundle can go into the container.

TR MAX weight < max piece weight The MAXIMUM weight allowed for a container is less than the weight of one or more pieces in the mailing. Therefore the piece(s) would not be able to be placed into a container. Check the P ATTR parameter (Piece Attributes) or the BG MAX parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 442 Resolving Errors

Message Description

TR MAX weight <= BL MAX weight The MAXIMUM weight allowed for a container is less than or equal to the MAXIMUM weight allowed for a bundle. The maximum weight for a container must be larger than the maximum weight for a bundle, so that a bundle can go into the container.

Walk sequence error: DCzzzzzcccc This message can occur when processing a Walk-Sequence Carrier Route (CRRT) mailing and requesting Mail.dat files. The value "zzzzzcccc" indicates the ZIP Code and Carrier Route. The ZIP Code and/or Carrier Route specified do not exist in the USPS Delivery Stop Table. MailStream Plus was unable to verify eligibility for Saturation rates. The pieces for these Carrier Routes are assigned High-Density or Basic Carrier Route rates as appropriate.

Wgt/Thk > auto, CHANGING P MailStream Plus checks piece thicknesses and weights to verify that they meet ATTR(66) to 'N', PID = xxxxxxxxx the USPS requirements to qualify as an automation mailpiece. Based on the P ATTR parameter(s), one or more pieces in your mailing exceed the allowable weight or thickness for automation, and therefore that P ATTR(s) position 66 has been changed to be non-automation. Check the P ATTR parameters, positions 24-28, 30-34, and 66, if you believe the pieces should be qualified for automation.

When Co-bundling Both Auto and If Co-bundling and palletizing, both the auto and non-auto portions of the mailing Non-Auto must be palletized must be palletized. Check the ALG PL and ML TYP parameters.

Windows: G1PIOMGR: Filename Note: This is not a MailStream Plus error. MSSTIN incurred an I/O error - Operation: O Status: 2 This message indicates that the input file named by the DD for MSSTIN was z/OS - MSSTIN - DATA SET NOT not found. Please verify and correct the path and file name, and verify that the FOUND file exists.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 443 4 - MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

In this section

MSDR00 - Standard Presort Engine Script 445 MSDRWF - Command Line Executable Presort Engine 448 MSDRAPI - Application Programmers' Interface 451 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

MSDR00 - Standard Presort Engine Script

Script MSDR00 runs postal presorts without having to create separate/custom scripts for each job. It also allows Pitney Bowes technology platforms, such as Spectrum or EngageOne, to call and run the postal presort function. The script runs on Windows (MSDR00.BAT) UNIX/Linux systems (msdr00). Note: This script can be activated within the Pitney Bowes Spectrum solution by using Run Program > Activate within a Process Flow. See Spectrum Documentation for more information on working with this feature.

Input Script Arguments

You must supply script arguments in the order they are shown here. Processing requires these arguments to be in specific positions. There are four argument combinations, with all combinations starting with the same four arguments.

Combination 1: 5 Combination 2: 6 Combination 3: 7 Combination 4: 8 Combination 5: 9 Arguments Arguments Arguments Arguments Arguments

1) Job Name 1) Job Name 1) Job Name 1) Job Name 1) Job Name

2) Parameter File (Full 2) Parameter File (Full 2) Parameter File (Full 2) Parameter File (Full 2) Parameter File (Full Path and Name) Path and Name) Path and Name) Path and Name) Path and Name)

3) Input File (Full Path 3) Input File (Full Path 3) Input File (Full Path 3) Input File (Full Path 3) Input File (Full Path and Name) and Name) and Name) and Name) and Name)

4) Output File (full path 4) Output File (full 4) Output File (full path 4) Output File (full path 4) Output File (full and name) - To set the path and name) - To and name) - To set the and name) - To set the path and name) - To output file to the default set the output file to output file to the default output file to the default set the output file to - Job the default - Job - Job - Job the default - Job Folder\Job Folder\Job Folder\Job Folder\Job Folder\Job Name\Job Name\Job Name\Job Name\Job Name\Job Name.out - set this Name.out - set this Name.out - set this Name.out - set this Name.out - set this argument to "Default" argument to "Default" argument to "Default" argument to "Default" argument to "Default"

5) Root folder for job 5) Root folder for job 5) Root folder for job 5) Root folder for job 5) Root folder for job output - To set the root output - To set the root output - To set the root output - To set the root output - To set the job folder to the default job folder to the job folder to the default job folder to the default root job folder to the default -%PBMSPDOCS%\Data -%PBMSPDOCS%\Data default

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 445 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

Combination 1: 5 Combination 2: 6 Combination 3: 7 Combination 4: 8 Combination 5: 9 Arguments Arguments Arguments Arguments Arguments

-%PBMSPDOCS%\Data -%PBMSPDOCS%\Data - set this argument to - set this argument to -%PBMSPDOCS%\Data - set this argument to - set this argument to "Default" "Default" - set this argument to "Default" "Default" "Default"

6) Bank Input File (Full 6) Mail.dat License 6) Mail.dat License 6) Bank Input File Path and Name) Code Code (Full Path and Name)

7) Mail.dat File Set ID 7)Mail.dat File Set ID 7) Mail.dat License Code

8) Mail.dat Informed 8) Mail.dat File Set ID Delivery Campaign File (Full Path and File Name)

9) Mail.dat Informed Delivery Campaign File (Full Path and File Name)

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 446 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

Sample Calls

Your product bin folder contains a working script that shows all combinations and their arguments. Be sure to substitute the italicized items below with your details.

Windows

Combination 1, 5 Arguments:

MSDR00.BAT "jobname" "path\parameter_file" "path\input_file" "path\output_file" "path\job_root_folder or Default"

Combination 2, 6 Arguments:

MSDR00.BAT "jobname" "path\parameter_file" "path\input_file" "path\output_file" "path\job_root_folder or Default" "path\bank_file"

Combination 3, 7 Arguments:

MSDR00.BAT "jobname" "path\parameter_file" "path\input_file" "path\output_file" "path\job_root_folder or Default""path\bank_file" "path\md_license_code"

Combination 4, 8 Arguments:

MSDR00.BAT "jobname" "path\parameter_file" "path\input_file" "path\output_file" "path\job_root_folder or Default" "path\md_license_code" "path\md_fileset_id" "path\InformedDeliveryCampaign_file"

Combination 5, 9 Arguments:

MSDR00.BAT "jobname" "path\parameter_file" "path\input_file" "path\output_file" "path\job_root_folder or Default""path\bank_file" "path\md_license_code" "path\md_fileset_id" "path\InformedDeliveryCampaign_file"

UNIX/Linux

Combination 1, 5 Arguments:

msdr00 jobname /path/parameter_file /path/input_file /path/output_file /path/job_root_folder or Default

Combination 2, 6 Arguments:

msdr00 jobname /path/parameter_file /path/input_file /path/output_file /path/job_root_folder or Default /path/bank_file

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 447 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

Combination 3, 7 Arguments:

msdr00 jobname /path/parameter_file /path/input_file /path/output_file /path/job_root_folder or Default /path/bank_file /path/md_license_code

Combination 4, 8 Arguments:

msdr00 jobname /path/parameter_file /path/input_file /path/output_file /path/job_root_folder or Default /path/md_license_code path/md_fileset_id /path/InformedDeliveryCampaign_file

Combination 5, 9 Arguments:

msdr00 jobname /path/parameter_file /path/input_file /path/output_file /path/job_root_folder or Default/path/bank_file /path/md_license_code path/md_fileset_id /path/InformedDeliveryCampaign_file

Return Codes

MSDR00.BAT/msdr00 processing return codes are generated from an internal table that assigns an error code and severity level, and writes a detailed description of the error to STDOUT. The return codes are:

Return Code Value Description

0 Successful completion

any other value MailStream Plus job ended with error

MSDRWF - Command Line Executable Presort Engine

The executable interface allows you to perform postal presorts from a command line. It also allows Pitney Bowes technology platforms, such as Spectrum or EngageOne, to call and run the postal presort function. The command line Interface supports calls from Windows, UNIX, and Linux systems. Note: On Windows, you must add the location of the runtime library to the path before executing the MSDRWF.exe program. The runtime library is located in directory %PBMSP%\rts.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 448 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

Input Command Line Arguments

Argument Description Maximum Required or Length Optional

-jJobname Job name 8 bytes Required

-mMail.dat_Lic_Code Mail.dat® license code/file set ID 8 bytes Optional

-iInput_file Input file used for this job none Required

-bBank_file Mailpiece "reserve" file used, if necessary, to none Optional qualify for certain presort preparation discounts; mailpieces can be added to the current job as needed

-pParameter_File File containing processing controls and commands none Required for the current job

-oOutput_File File to contain all successful processing results none Optional

-cReject_File File to contain all incorrect processing results; This none Optional directory is created automatically.

-wOutput_Work_Directory Output work directory; If none is defined, none Optional MailStream Plus uses the data area. This directory is created automatically.

-tTemp_Directory Temporary directory; if none is defined, MailStream none Optional Plus uses the Output Work Directory

-dOutput_Mail.Dat_Dir Mail.dat output directory; if none is specified, none Optional MailStream Plus uses the Output Work Directory. This directory is created automatically.

-rOutput_Report_Dir Output report directory; if none is defined, none Optional MailStream Plus uses the Output Work Directory. This directory is created automatically.

-nIndicator Appends job name to the output working Directory, none Optional Output Mail.Dat Directory, Output Report Directory, and Temporary Directory

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 449 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

Argument Description Maximum Required or Length Optional

-lMailStream Installation root folder for MailStream Plus none Optional - Unix Plus_install_Location and Linux only

-3Mail360 Installation root folder for MAIL360 Manager none Optional - Unix Manager_nstall_Location and Linux only

-gCampaign_file Informed Delivery campaign file none Optional

Sample Call with Required Arguments

msdrwf -jJobname -iInput_file -pParameter_file

• Ensure that you substitute the italicized items with your argument. • Ensure that there are no spaces between the switch and the argument (example: -jprodjob)

Return Codes

MailStream Plus generates msdrwf command line processing return codes are generated from an internal table. This table assigns an error code and severity level, then writes a detailed description of the error to STDOUT. The return codes are:

Return Code Value Description

0 Successful completion

1 MailStream Plus job ended with error

2 API error occurred

3 Command line argument error occurred

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 450 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

MSDRAPI - Application Programmers' Interface

MSDRAPI, the MailStream Plus callable API, allows you to perform postal presorting from within your own programs. The API supports calls from Windows, UNIX, and Linux systems. The MailStream Plus Workflow API is a C++ API that works with any programing language that supports calls to a C++ API. Note: On Windows, you must add the location of the runtime library to the path before calling the MSDRAPI.dll. The runtime library is located in directory %PBMSP%\rts.

API Function

MSDRAPIRTN(int) MSDRAPI(MSPAPIError *status, RunMSPParm *mspapiparm);

API Structures

typdef struct MSPAPIError {char code[MSPAPI_ERRORCODE_MAXCHARSIZE+1]; //

number */ char description[MSPAPI_ERRORDESCRIPTION_MAXCHARSIZE+1]; //< Error description */ } MSPAPIError;

typedef struct _RunMSPParm {char chMSPJobName[MSPAPI_JOBNAME_MAXCHARSIZE + 1]; // Job Name – Required */ char chMSPMailDatName[MSPAPI_MAILDAT_NAME_MAXCHARSIZE +1]; // Mail.Dat License Code/File set ID – Optional */ char chFileMsstin[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Input File – Required */ char chFileMsstbk[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Bank File – Optional */ char chFileMsidcmi[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Informed Delivery Campaign File – Optional */ char chFileMspricp[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Parameter File – Required */ char chFileMsnaon[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Output File – Optional */ char chFileMsstor[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Reject File – Optional */ char chDirWork[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Output Work Directory – Optional – If not provided will us MSP Data area */ char chDirTemp[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Temp Directory – Optional if not provided Output Work Directory

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 451 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

will be used */ char chDirMailDat[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Output Mail.Dat Directory – Optional if not provided Output Work

Directory used */ char chDirReports[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Output Report Directory – Optional if not provided Output Work Directory used */ char chMSPInstLoc[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Location where MailStream Plus is installed – Optional */ char chIMBInstLoc[MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE]; // Location where MAIL360 Manager is installed - Optional */; char chMSPNameOutDirSw; // Indicator to append Job Name to output Directory Paths. Optional - if set, job name is appended to output working directory, output Mail.dat directory, output report directory, temp directory*/; } RunMSPParm;

MSPAPIError

Type Name Size Description

char code [MSPAPI_ERRORCODE_MAXCHARSIZE+1] Error code is Ennnn or Wnnnn, where n indicates the error or warning number

char description [MSPAPI_ERRORDESCRIPTION_MAXCHARSIZE+1] Error description

Type Name Size Description

char chMSPJobName [MSPAPI_JOBNAME_MAXCHARSIZE] MailStream Plus job name

char chMSPMailDatName [MSPAPI_MAILDAT_NAME_MAXCHARSIZE] MailStream Plus Mail.dat file name

char chFileMsidcmi [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Input Informed Delivery Campaign file

char chFileMsstin [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Input file

char chFileMsstbk [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Bank file

char chFileMspricp [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Input parameter file

char chFileMsnaon [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Output file

char chFileMsstor [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Rejected records file

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 452 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

Type Name Size Description

char char chDirWork [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Output Work file

char char chDirTemp [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Temporary work file

char char chDirMailDat [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Mail.dat output directory

char chDirReports [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Output report directory

char chMSPInstLoc [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] MailStream Plus installation location; Used only to run a non-production/test version of the products. Set the location to the product installation parent directory.

char chIMBInstLoc [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] MAIL360 Manager installation location; Used only to run a non-production/test version of the products. Set the location to the product installation parent directory.

char chMSPNameOutDirSw [MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE] Appends job name to the output working Directory, Output Mail.Dat Directory, Output Report Directory, and Temporary Directory

Constants

Name Value Description

MSPAPI_FILEPATH_MAXCHARSIZE 512 Maximum number of characters in the file/path/directory name

MSPAPI_JOBNAME_MAXCHARSIZE 8 Maximum number of characters for a Job name

MSPAPI_MAILDAT_NAME_MAXCHARSIZE 8 Maximum number of characters for Mail.Dat name

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 453 MailStream Plus Workflow Interface

Name Value Description

MSPAPI_ERRORCODE_MAXCHARSIZE 5 Maximum number of characters for the Error Code

MSPAPI_ERRORDESCRIPTION_MAXCHARSIZE 1024 Maximum number of characters in the error description

MSPAPI_SUCCESS 0 If no error occurred

MSPAPI_MSP_ERROR 1 If error occurred

MSPAPI_API_ERROR 2 If error occurred prior to calling the MailStream Plus presort API

API Return Codes

• 0 - Processing Successful • 1 - MailStream Plus processing ended in error • 2 - Encountered API error prior to calling MailStream Plus

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 454 5 - USPS® Informed Delivery

In this section

Informed Delivery support 456 Informed Delivery campaign file (MSIDCMI) 456 USPS® Informed Delivery

Informed Delivery support

USPS® Informed Delivery is a "consumer-facing feature that gives eligible residential consumers the ability to see a daily digital preview of their household's mail (USPS)." MailStream Plus supports Informed Delivery through parameters, with an Informed Delivery campaign file with an Informed Delivery campaign file supplied by the mailer.

Supporting parameters

• IDCURL - Parameter that defines the input location and length of up to four URLs used to create *.RMR records linked to the *.PDR and *.PBC files • REPORT MAILDAT - Contains a flag to create Informed Delivery campaigns

Informed Delivery campaign file (MSIDCMI)

This user-supplied control file defines your Informed Delivery campaign information. This file will contains these record types: • Campaign Record • Split Record • URL Record • Comment Record A single Informed Delivery campaign file can define multiple campaigns.

Informed Delivery campaign file formats, by platform

• Windows®, UNIX™/Linux® - Line-sequential file with a maximum length of 110 bytes • z/OS® - Fixed-length file, 110 bytes • IBM® i - Fixed-Length file, 110 bytes • Create a fixed-length file with a record length of 110. • On the last page of the Submit Job screens (UPCPSB04), enter the values to specify the location of that file.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 456 USPS® Informed Delivery

Campaign Record

The campaign record defines the Informed Delivery campaign. The file may contain multiple campaign records, but the Campaign ID must be unique.

Positions Field name Length Description Mail.dat record populated

001-002 Record type 2 Must be CM

004-011 Campaign ID 8 Must be unique, alphanumeric

013-072 Campaign title 60 Campaign title RMS-1003

Split Record

The split record defines each of the splits within the campaign (for example, "A/B Testing"). There is no limit to the number of splits for a campaign. The Split ID must be unique across all campaigns. The Campaign ID links each split to a campaign.

Positions Field name Length Description Mail.dat record populated

001-002 Record type 2 Must be SP

004-011 Split ID 8 Must be unique, alphanumeric RMS-1002

013-020 Campaign ID 8 Campaign ID containing this split; alphanumeric

022-048 Campaign code 27 Split name RMS-1004

049-061 Reserved 13

063-092 Display name 30 Name to display for this campaign split RMS-1006

094-101 Start date 8 Start date for this campaign split, YYYYMMDD format RMS-1007

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 457 USPS® Informed Delivery

Positions Field name Length Description Mail.dat record populated

103-110 End date 8 End date for this campaign split, YYYYMMDD format RMS-1008

URL Record

The URL record defines the URLs that are associated to each split. There can be up to four URL records linked to each split, one of each type. The Split ID links the URL record to the split record.

Positions Field name Length Description Mail.dat record populated

001-002 Record type 2 Must be UA, UB, UC, or UD RMR-1004

004-011 Split ID 8 Split ID containing this URL; Must be unique, alphanumeric

013 Link to 1 • C = Component • P = Piece

015 URL from 1 name/address • Y = URL will be determined from name/address record record; This option is valid only when Link to is P • N = Not from name/address record

017 URL template 1 Template code; Defaults to A if blank RMR-1008 code

019-269 URL 250 Contains the URL; If URL from RMR-1005 Name/address Record is Y, this field may contain the base (first part of the URL). MailStream Plus will append information that is specified by the IDCURL parameter.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 458 USPS® Informed Delivery

Comment Record

The Comment record allows you to define comments about your Informed Delivery campaign.

Positions Field name Length Description

001-002 Record type 2 Must be **

004-107 Comment 107 Free form descriptive text

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 459 6 - Defining IBM® i Job Parameters

In this section

Parameters Defined On the Global Parameter Edit Screen 461 Defining IBM® i Job Parameters

Parameters Defined On the Global Parameter Edit Screen

Most MailStream Plus parameters are defined using individual CHUI screens. The MailStream Plus Parameter Reference cross-references all parameters and their fields to their respective CHUI screens. Some parameters are do not have individual CHUI screens, and are defined on the Global Parameter Edit (UPCRDEDT) screen. It's useful to have the MailStream Plus Parameter Reference available to know all of the fields available for each parameter. Use F23=Card Edit to enter Global Card Image Editor. The parameters defined using the UPCRDEDT screen are:

Table 15: Parameters Defined on the Global Parameter Edit Screen

Parameter Description

ADDLBF Allows you to add more buffer space to perform name/address or statistics processing

ALG AU Allows you to indicate whether you are commingling your mail (for example, combining different rates on one pallet)

ALG BL Overrides the defaults that determine how MailStream Plus bundles the mail

ALG LV Defines the presort level for bundles and/or containers; container type(s); whether you will allow single-bundle trays, or overflow trays; presort subclass for this presort level

BG FRC Defines the pieces, bundles, weight, volume, and thickness to force a container for a specific container type

BG MAX Allows you to override the defaults governing the maximum weight, volume, and thickness of a container of mail

BG MIN Allows you to override the defaults governing the minimum number of pieces, minimum number of bundles, and the minimum weight, volume, and thickness for each container type

BL FRC Overrides the default settings and changes the number of mailpieces required to make a bundle

BL MAX Overrides the defaults governing the maximum size of a bundle of carrier, presort, or residual mail

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 461 Defining IBM® i Job Parameters

Parameter Description

CPYCNT Create multiple output name and address records from one input name/ address record based on the value in the copy count field.

E DESC Allows you to identify the location of the Entry Point Description Constant in the name/address file

EXITIN Activates routines that will assume processing control just after reading each record, before invoking MOVExx parameters, or before invoking stop/start ZIP Code comparisons

EXITOP Activates routines that will assume processing control just before each OPEN, WRITE, and CLOSE operation for specific sequential files

IDCURL (Informed Delivery) Defines the input name/address file location and length of up to four URLs used to create the RMR records linked to the PDR/PBC file

IN CTY Allows you to take advantage of in-county discounts for Periodicals mail

ML MIN Allows you to override the defaults governing the carrier route and 3/5-digit presort mailings

MOVExx Specifies the destination, length, and source of data to be moved

NDC SQ Allows you to reorder the processing of mail for different NDCs (Network Delivery Centers, formerly BMCs or Bulk Mail Centers)

PB FRC Overrides defaults to force a pallet

PB MAX Allows you to override the defaults governing the maximum size of a bundle of mail on a pallet

PL LVL Allows you to specify whether you want to make a pallet for each level and subtype of your sortation

POSTIJ Indicate where to post the Mailer's Choice inkjet file information in the name/address file or to a separate file

QP AMT Allows you to change the qualifying amounts for bundles on pallets defined for a particular presort level

R FLAG Allows you to define residential name/address records

RENMBR Overrides the default to specify pallet and bag/tray numbers

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 462 Defining IBM® i Job Parameters

Parameter Description

RTYPES Allows you to place a key field on each header and each trailer record to help with re-sorting later in the process by invoking the MREX00 program

SCF SQ Allows you to change the sortation sequences of SCF codes

SRTFLD Specifies the sort key for the final sort of the name/address records and some MailStream Plus reports

SRTFLn Specifies the sort key for the final sort of the name/address records and some MailStream Plus reports

TABLSZ Allows you to override the internal table sizes (batch code, entry point, piece attributes, list codes, or statements of mailing/summaries) with a table you specify.

The following pages outline the steps for defining these parameters.

Step-by-Step

To define some optional processing functions: 1. Press F23 on the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen. You will see the UPCRDEDT (parameter edit) screen.

2. Press F10 to define an additional parameter. MailStream Plus changes the appearance of the screen, adding a window.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 463 Defining IBM® i Job Parameters

3. Under the Enter card type to be added line, type the name of the parameter you wish to define. 4. Press ENTER to display an 80-position parameter line. You will use this line to define your parameter details. Note: Each parameter definition screen varies according to the specific parameter you are defining. Use the individual parameter layouts in the Parameter Reference to define your processing details.

For this parameter, you would specify the Commingling Indicator, an option indicating whether to commingle mail on pallets.

5. Press F6 to save the current parameter definition.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 464 Defining IBM® i Job Parameters

MailStream Plus returns you to the initial UPCRDEDT screen. You will see the currently defined parameters listed on this screen. You can go back and edit any of the defined parameters by entering a 2 in front of a parameter and pressing ENTER.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 465 7 - IBM® i System-Wide Commands

In this section

Entering Commands at the Command Line 467 Using the Job Import Utility 469 IBM® i System-Wide Commands

Entering Commands at the Command Line

From a command line, you can enter the following commands to run or submit a MailStream Plus job: • UPRUNJOB - Runs the job interactively • UPSBMJOB - Submits the job to run in batch mode When you enter the UPRUNJOB or UPSBMJOB commands, you have two options. • Type the command and then press F4 for a screen prompting you for the input name/address file, library, and member, as well as processing limitations. – Or – • Type the command and the Job ID of the job you want to run or submit, and then press ENTER to run or submit the job with the same name/address file and other parameters that you used last time this job was submitted. In addition to entering these commands at the system prompt, you can include them in your control language (CL) programs to submit several jobs in succession. Note: For your system to recognize these commands, your library list must contain the MailStream Plus library (default G1MSPGMS) and the Global library (default G1@@PGMS). The libraries for other products should not be in the library list.

Run MailStream Plus Jobs with UPRUNJOB

UPRUNJOB (MailStream Plus Run Job) is an optional command that executes a MailStream Plus job interactively, from a command line, or from within a control language program. You can use UPRUNJOB in a job stream to run jobs in a specific order. The library list must contain the MailStream Plus library before UPRUNJOB can be executed. Use command ADDLIBLE G1MSPGMS to accomplish this. Note: Substitute the name of your MailStream Plus library for "G1MSPGMS," if necessary.

The fields on the UPRUNJOB command reflect the field values that are available through the job submission function screens. Value *SAME means that the last values on those screens will be used. The values typed on this command do not replace the defined values on the Submit MailStream Plus Job screens. 1. To execute the UPRUNJOB command interactively, place your cursor on the command line. 2. Type UPRUNJOB, and press F4. You will see the following screen:

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 467 IBM® i System-Wide Commands

The initial UPRUNJOB screen displays three columns. • The first column lists the field and parameter selections available in UPRUNJOB. • The second column provides entry fields for all parameter definitions. • The third column lists all valid values or valid value types for each field. You may use F11 to display the keywords for your parameter selections. The keywords provide an alternative method of typing commands and parameters.

3. Complete the entries on this screen. When you use UPRUNJOB: • You must specify the Job ID to execute. • If you specify *SAME for any output file, library, member name, or exit routine name, MailStream Plus uses either the value specified in your most recent job submission or uses the default values.

4. Page down to see additional UPRUNJOB selections. 5. Using the guidelines for defining the options on the previous screen, complete the entries on the second screen. 6. Press ENTER to run your job using your specified parameters.

Submit MailStream Plus Jobs with UPSBMJOB

UPSBMJOB (MailStream Plus Submit Job) is an optional command that submits a MailStream Plus job for batch processing from the command line or from within a control language program. You can use UPSBMJOB in a job stream to submit jobs in a specific order. The library list must contain

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 468 IBM® i System-Wide Commands

the MailStream Plus library before UPSBMJOB can be executed. Use command ADDLIBLE G1MSPGMS to accomplish this. Note: Substitute the name of your MailStream Plus library for "G1MSPGMS," if necessary.

The fields on the UPSBMJOB command reflect the field values that are available through the job submission function screens. Value *SAME means that the last values on those screens will be used. The values typed on this command, however, will not replace the values on the Submit MailStream Plus Job screens. Note: The Submit Job command is similar to the Run Job command (UPRUNJOB), with the addition of the job description, job name, and hold on queue parameters.

To run the UPSBMJOB command interactively, your cursor must be positioned on a command entry line. 1. Type UPSBMJOB in the command entry line. Press F4. The initial UPSBMJOB screen displays three columns. • The first column lists the field and parameter selections available in UPSBMJOB. • The second column provides entry fields for all parameter definitions • The third column lists all valid values or valid value types for each field. You may use F11 to display the keywords for your parameter selections. The keywords provide an alternative method of typing commands and parameters.

2. Complete the entries on this screen. When you use UPSBMJOB: • You must specify the Job ID. • The library list must contain the MailStream Plus library before UPSBMJOB can be executed using command ADDLIBLE. The fields on the UPSBMJOB command reflect the field values that are available through the job submission function screens.

3. Page down to see the next Submit MailStream Plus Job screen.Using the guidelines for completing the previous screen, complete the entries on the second screen. 4. Press ENTER to submit your job to batch using your specified parameters.

Using the Job Import Utility

Use the Job Import Utility to create a ready-to-run job from a flat parameter file and parameters specified on the import command. To use the Job Import Utility, follow these steps: 1. Add the product installation and global library to your library list. Use the ADDLIBLE or EDTLIBL command. Example: ADDLIBLE LIB(G1MSPGMS) and ADDLIBLE LIB(G1@@PGMS).

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 469 IBM® i System-Wide Commands

2. Ensure that the job does not already exist. • Call G1MM01. • Select option 1: MailStream Plus. • Verify that the job does not appear in the list.

3. Create a file to hold the job parameters to be imported using the create source file command: 4. Example: CRTSRCPF FILE(MYLIB/PARMFILE) RCDLEN(92) Note: The file must have a record length of 92. You may also use an existing source file.

5. FTP the job parameters into the source file using your preferred method. You will FTP the parameter file from the source platform (Windows or Unix, for example) into a new or existing member of the source physical file created in step 3. Note: Some FTP clients cannot send parameters directly to a source physical file. In these cases, create an 80-byte file and FTP the parameter file into that file. Copy the file containing the 80-byte parameter file to the source physical file, using the CPYF command, with parameter option FMTOPT(*CVTSRC).

6. Import the job using this command: IMPJOBMSP, then press F4. 7. Fill out these entries on the Import Job screen:

Parameter Description

[Parameter] Input File Name/Library/Member Source physical file that you created in step 3 and member you FTP'd the parameters into in step 4

Job ID Name of the job you want to create: A Job ID may be from one to five characters in length. The characters may be A-Z, 0-9, or special characters $, @, #, or _. Embedded blanks are not permitted.

® Job Work Library Name of the library where the IBM i parameter file will be created

Create Work Library Specify whether to create the Job Work Library if it does not already exist. If library does not exist but Create Work Library was not specified, the program will fail with CPF9810.

Job Input N/A File Name/Library/Member In the created job, this is the default input file name on the job submission screen. Specify it here because there is no parameter to define it.

Job Bank File Name/Library/Member In the created job, this will be the default bank input file name on the job submission screen. Specify it here because there is no parameter to define it.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 470 IBM® i System-Wide Commands

Note: Other variables on the Submit Batch Job screens are set to their default values, including job description and output file names.

8. Verify the results using the command WRKMBRPDM MSWORKLIB/PRMMSjobid.

9. Review the following members by specifying option 5=Display:

Parameter Member Description

IGNORED Parameters that were recognized, but not otherwise processed, such as TESTIT and CHCKPT.

ORIGINAL Copy of the complete list of parameters being imported, as specified in step 5

PROCESSED Parameters that were imported, but that do not appear in any parameter member, such as parameters that are specified on the "Submit Batch Job" screens. For example: FILEDF, DB LIB, BYPEXP, AUXIL1, and EXITOP, and so on. The values on those parameters will appear on the "Submit Batch Job" screens.

UNKNOWN Parameters that were ignored because their names were unrecognized.

Other members Contain the imported, sorted-out parameters used by the application.

Note: Parameters that are commented out with a leading "*" (asterisk) or "* " (asterisk+space) are sorted to the appropriate member, but are not otherwise processed.

10. Run the job. • Verify that the job now exists and is ready to run with no modifications.

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 471 IBM® i System-Wide Commands

• CALL G1MM01 • Select option 1: MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System. • The Last Activity displayed on the Work with Jobs screen will show as "Import Job"

• On the Define and/or Submit a Presort Job screen, the values listed under Last Activity indicate the date and time the job was imported, and will show user IMPJOBMSP.

Example: Creating a Job that Uses an Existing Library

This section describes the steps to create a job named DEMO with a work library of MSWORKLIB. This job: • Uses a product install library of G1MSPGMS • Uses parameters that were FTP'd into file MYLIB/PARMFILE member PARMMBR • Assumes library MYLIB already exists 1. Run the commands ADDLIBLE LIB(G1MSPGMS) and ADDLIBLE LIB(G1@@PGMS). 2. CALL G1MM01. 3. Select option 1: MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System. 4. Verify that the job does not appear in the list. 5. Run the command CRTSRCPF FILE(MYLIB/PARMFILE) RCDLEN(92). 6. FTP parameters into MYLIB/PARMFILE member PARMMBR. 7. Run the command IMPJOBMSP INPPRMFIL(MYLIB/PARMFILE) INPPRMMBR(PARMMBR) JOBID(DEMO) WORKLIB(MSWORKLIB) CRTWRKLIB(N) INPNAFIL(MYNALIB/MYNAFILE) INPNAMBR(*FIRST). 8. Run the command WRKMBRPDM MSWORKLIB/PRMMSDEMO, and use option 5 to display the contents of the members. 9. Run the job. • CALL G1MM01 and select option 1: MailStream Plus Presorting and Reporting System. • Use option 16 next to job "DEMO," or use the commands UPRUNJOB or UPSBMJOB to run or submit the job: UPRUNJOB JOBID(DEMO)

Error Messages

IMPJOBMSP may return the following escape messages: • MP0100: Job already exists • All CHKOBJ escape messages, including: • CPF9810: Library xxxxxxxxxx not found

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 472 IBM® i System-Wide Commands

• CPF9801: Object xxxxxxxxxx in library xxxxxxxxxx not found (file not found) • CPF9815: Member xxxxxxxxxx file xxxxxxxxxx in library xxxxxxxxxx not found

MailStream Plus™ 8.3.6 MailStream Plus Guide 473 Copyright

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without the written permission of Pitney Bowes Software Inc. © 2018 Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All rights reserved. MapInfo and Group 1 Software, and their respective logos, are trademarks of Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All other marks and trademarks are property of their respective holders.

USPS® Notices All rights reserved. MailStream Plus, Manifest Reporting Plus, DuoSort, and Palletization Plus are trademarks of Pitney Bowes Software. Pitney Bowes and “Engineering the flow of communication” and "Craftsmen of Commerce" are registered trademarks of Pitney Bowes, Inc. All other marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Pitney Bowes Inc. holds a non-exclusive license to publish and sell ZIP + 4® databases on optical and magnetic media. The following trademarks are owned by the United States Postal Service: CASS, CASS Certified, DPV, eLOT, FASTforward, First-Class Mail, Intelligent Mail, LACSLink, NCOALink, PAVE, PLANET Code, Postal Service, POSTNET, Post Office, RDI, SuiteLink , United States Postal Service, Standard Mail, United States Post Office, USPS, ZIP Code, and ZIP + 4. This list is not exhaustive of the trademarks belonging to the Postal Service. Pitney Bowes Inc. is a non-exclusive licensee of USPS® for NCOALink® processing. Prices for Pitney Bowes Software's products, options, and services are not established, controlled, or approved by USPS® or United States Government. When utilizing RDI™ data to determine parcel-shipping costs, the business decision on which parcel delivery company to use is not made by the USPS® or United States Government. 3001 Summer Street Stamford CT 06926-0700 USA www.pitneybowes.com

© 2018 Pitney Bowes Software Inc. All rights reserved